+ Note: this module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module.
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> CM11 <serial-device>
+
+ CM11 is the X10 module to interface X10 devices with the PC.
+
+ The current implementation can evaluate incoming data on the powerline of
+ any kind. It can send on, off, dimdown and dimup commands.
+
+ The name of the serial-device depends on your distribution. If
+ serial-device is none, then no device will be opened, so you can experiment
+ without hardware attached.
+
+ If you experience problems (for verbose 4 you get a lot of "Bad CRC message"
+ in the log), then try to define your device as
+ define <name> FHZ <serial-device> strangetty
+
+
+ Example:
+
+ define x10if CM11 /dev/ttyUSB3
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set <name> reopen
+
+ Reopens the serial port.
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get <name> fwrev
+
+ Reads the firmware revision of the CM11 device. Returns error
+ if the serial connection to the device times out. Can be used for error
+ detection.
+
+
+ get <name> time
+
+ Reads the internal time of the device which is the total uptime (modulo one
+ year), since fhem sets the time to 0.00:00:00 if the device requests the time
+ to be set after being powered on. Returns error
+ if the serial connection to the device times out. Can be used for error
+ detection.
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/00_CUL.pm b/FHEM/00_CUL.pm
index aae21f57e..3e932f13a 100755
--- a/FHEM/00_CUL.pm
+++ b/FHEM/00_CUL.pm
@@ -1022,3 +1022,236 @@ CUL_Attr(@)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
CUL
+
+
+
+
+ The CUL/CUR/CUN is a family of RF devices sold by busware.de.
+
+ With the opensource firmware (see this link) they are capable
+ to receive and send different 868MHz protocols (FS20/FHT/S300/EM/HMS).
+ It is even possible to use these devices as range extenders/routers, see the
+ CUL_RFR module for details.
+
+
+ Some protocols (FS20, FHT and KS300) are converted by this module so that
+ the same logical device can be used, irrespective if the radio telegram is
+ received by a CUL or an FHZ device. Other protocols (S300/EM) need their
+ own modules. E.g. S300 devices are processed by the CUL_WS module if the
+ signals are received by the CUL, similarly EMWZ/EMGZ/EMEM is handled by the
+ CUL_EM module.
+
+ It is possible to attach more than one device in order to get better
+ reception, fhem will filter out duplicate messages.
+
+ Note: this module may require the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort
+ module if you attach the device via USB and the OS sets strange default
+ parameters for serial devices.
+
+
+
+ <device> specifies the serial port to communicate with the CUL or
+ CUR. The name of the serial-device depends on your distribution, under
+ linux the cdc_acm kernel module is responsible, and usually a
+ /dev/ttyACM0 device will be created. If your distribution does not have a
+ cdc_acm module, you can force usbserial to handle the CUL by the
+ following command:
modprobe usbserial vendor=0x03eb
+ product=0x204b
In this case the device is most probably
+ /dev/ttyUSB0.
+
+ You can also specify a baudrate if the device name contains the @
+ character, e.g.: /dev/ttyACM0@38400
+
+ If the baudrate is "directio" (e.g.: /dev/ttyACM0@directio), then the
+ perl module Device::SerialPort is not needed, and fhem opens the device
+ with simple file io. This might work if the operating system uses sane
+ defaults for the serial parameters, e.g. some Linux distributions and
+ OSX.
+
+
+ Network-connected devices (CUN):
+ <device> specifies the host:port of the device. E.g.
+ 192.168.0.244:2323
+
+
+ If the device is called none, then no device will be opened, so you
+ can experiment without hardware attached.
+
+ The FHTID is a 4 digit hex number, and it is used when the CUL/CUR talks to
+ FHT devices or when CUR requests data. Set it to 0000 to avoid answering
+ any FHT80b request by the CUL.
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+
raw
+ Issue a CUL firmware command. See the this document
+ for details on CUL commands.
+
+
+
freq / bWidth / rAmpl / sens
+ SlowRF mode only.
+ Set the CUL frequency / bandwidth / receiver-amplitude / sensitivity
+
+ Use it with care, it may destroy your hardware and it even may be
+ illegal to do so. Note: the parameters used for RFR transmission are
+ not affected.
+
+
freq sets both the reception and transmission frequency. Note:
+ although the CC1101 can be set to frequencies between 315 and 915
+ MHz, the antenna interface and the antenna of the CUL is tuned for
+ exactly one frequency. Default is 868.3MHz (or 433MHz)
+
bWidth can be set to values between 58kHz and 812kHz. Large values
+ are susceptible to interference, but make possible to receive
+ inaccurate or multiple transmitters. It affects tranmission too.
+ Default is 325kHz.
+
rAmpl is receiver amplification, with values between 24 and 42 dB.
+ Bigger values allow reception of weak signals. Default is 42.
+
sens is the decision boundery between the on and off values, and it
+ is 4, 8, 12 or 16 dB. Smaller values allow reception of less clear
+ signals. Default is 4dB.
+
+
+
+
hmPairForSec
+ HomeMatic mode only.
+ Set the CUL in Pairing-Mode for the given seconds. Any device set into
+ pairing mode in this time will be paired with fhem.
+
+
+
hmPairSerial
+ HomeMatic mode only.
+ Try to pair with the given device. The argument is a 10 character
+ string, usually starting with letters and ending with digits, printed on
+ the backside of the device. It is not necessary to put the given device
+ in learning mode if it is a receiver.
+
+
led
+ Set the CUL led off (00), on (01) or blinking (02).
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+
version
+ return the CUL firmware version
+
+
uptime
+ return the CUL uptime (time since CUL reset).
+
+
raw
+ Issue a CUL firmware command, and wait for one line of data returned by
+ the CUL. See the CUL firmware README document for details on CUL
+ commands.
+
+
fhtbuf
+ CUL has a message buffer for the FHT. If the buffer is full, then newly
+ issued commands will be dropped, and an "EOB" message is issued to the
+ fhem log.
+ fhtbuf returns the free memory in this buffer (in hex),
+ an empty buffer in the CUL-V2 is 74 bytes, in CUL-V3/CUN 200 Bytes.
+ A message occupies 3 + 2x(number of FHT commands) bytes,
+ this is the second reason why sending multiple FHT commands with one
+ set is a good idea. The first reason is, that
+ these FHT commands are sent at once to the FHT.
+
+
+
ccconf
+ Read some CUL radio-chip (cc1101) registers (frequency, bandwidth, etc),
+ and display them in human readable form.
+
+
+
cmds
+ Depending on the firmware installed, CULs have a different set of
+ possible commands. Please refer to the README of the firmware of your
+ CUL to interpret the response of this command. See also the raw-
+ command.
+
sendpool
+ If using more than one CUL/CUN for covering a large area, sending
+ different events by the different CUL's might disturb each other. This
+ phenomenon is also known as the Palm-Beach-Resort effect.
+ Putting them in a common sendpool will serialize sending the events.
+ E.g. if you have three CUN's, you have to specify following
+ attributes:
+ attr CUN1 sendpool CUN1,CUN2,CUN3
+ attr CUN2 sendpool CUN1,CUN2,CUN3
+ attr CUN3 sendpool CUN1,CUN2,CUN3
+
+
addvaltrigger
+ Create triggers for additional device values. Right now these are RSSI
+ and RAWMSG for the CUL family and RAWMSG for the FHZ.
+
+
rfmode
+ Configure the RF Transceiver of the CUL (the CC1101). Available
+ arguments are:
+
+
SlowRF
+ To communicate with FS20/FHT/HMS/EM1010/S300/Hoermann devices @1kHz
+ datarate. This is the default.
+
+
HomeMatic
+ To communicate with HomeMatic type of devices @20kHz datarate
+
+
MAX
+ To communicate with MAX! type of devices @20kHz datarate
+
+
+
+
hmId
+ Set the HomeMatic ID of this device. If this attribute is absent, the
+ ID will be F1<FHTID>. Note 1: after setting or changing this
+ attribute you have to relearn all your HomeMatic devices. Note 2: the
+ value _must_ be a 6 digit hex number, and 000000 is not valid. fhem
+ wont complain if it is not correct, but the communication won't work.
+
+
+
hmProtocolEvents
+ Generate events for HomeMatic protocol messages. These are normally
+ used for debugging, by activating "inform timer" in a telnet session,
+ or looking at the "Event Monitor" window in the FHEMWEB frontend.
+ Example:
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/00_FHZ.pm b/FHEM/00_FHZ.pm
index 5cf049b5a..6ff3b3340 100755
--- a/FHEM/00_FHZ.pm
+++ b/FHEM/00_FHZ.pm
@@ -785,3 +785,186 @@ FHZ_Read($)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
FHZ
+
+ Note: this module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module
+ if the devices is connected via USB or a serial port.
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> FHZ <serial-device>
+
+ Specifies the serial port to communicate with the FHZ1000PC or FHZ1300PC.
+ The name(s) of the serial-device(s) depends on your distribution.
+
+ If the serial-device is called none, then no device will be opened, so you
+ can experiment without hardware attached.
+
+ The program can service multiple devices, FS20 and FHT device commands will
+ be sent out through the last FHZ device defined before the definition of
+ the FS20/FHT device. To change the association, use the IODev attribute.
+
+
+ For GNU/Linux you may want to read our hints for
+ GNU/Linux about multiple USB
+ devices.
+
+ Note:The firmware of the FHZ1x00 will drop commands if the airtime
+ for the last hour would exceed 1% (which corresponds roughly to 163
+ commands). For this purpose there is a command counter for the last hour
+ (see list FHZDEVICE), which triggers with "TRANSMIT LIMIT EXCEEDED" if
+ there were more than 163 commands in the last hour.
+
+ If you experience problems (for verbose 4 you get a lot of "Bad CRC
+ message" in the log), then try to define your device as define
+ <name> FHZ <serial-device> strangetty
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set FHZ <variable> [<value>]
+
+ where value is one of:
+
+ FHTcode
+ initFS20
+ initHMS
+ stopHMS
+ initfull
+ raw
+ open
+ reopen
+ close
+ time
+
+ Notes:
+
+
raw is used to send out "raw" FS20/FHT messages ("setters" only - no query messages!).
+ See message byte streams in FHEM/00_FHZ.pm and the doc directory for some examples.
+
In order to set the time of your FHT's, schedule this command every
+ minute:
+ define fhz_timer at +*00:01:00 set FHZ time
+ See the loglevel to prevent logging of
+ this command.
+
+
FHTcode is a two digit hex number (from 00 to 63?) and sets the
+ central FHT code, which is used by the FHT devices. After changing
+ it, you must reprogram each FHT80b with: PROG (until Sond
+ appears), then select CEnt, Prog, Select nA.
+
If the FHT ceases to work for FHT devices whereas other devices
+ (e.g. HMS, KS300) continue to work, a
+ set FHZ initfull
command could help. Try
+ set FHZ reopen
if the FHZ
+ ceases to work completely. If all else fails, shutdown fhem, unplug
+ and replug the FHZ device. Problems with FHZ may also be related to
+ long USB cables or insufficient power on the USB - use a powered hub
+ to improve this particular part of such issues.
+ See our USB page
+ for detailed USB / electromag. interference troubleshooting.
+
initfull issues the initialization sequence for the FHZ
+ device:
+
+ get FHZ init2
+ get FHZ serial
+ set FHZ initHMS
+ set FHZ initFS20
+ set FHZ time
+ set FHZ raw 04 01010100010000
+
reopen closes and reopens the serial device port. This
+ implicitly initializes the FHZ and issues the
+ initfull command sequence.
+
stopHMS probably is the inverse of initHMS
+ (I don't have authoritative info on what exactly it does).
+
close closes and frees the serial device port until you open
+ it again with open, e.g. useful if you need to temporarily
+ unload the ftdi_sio kernel module to use the bit-bang mode.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get FHZ <value>
+
+ where value is one of:
+
+ init1
+ init2
+ init3
+ serial
+ fhtbuf
+
+ Notes:
+
+
The mentioned codes are needed for initializing the FHZ1X00
+
The answer for a command is also displayed by list FHZ
+
+
+ The FHZ1x00PC has a message buffer for the FHT (see the FHT entry in
+ the set section). If the buffer is full, then newly
+ issued commands will be dropped, if the attribute fhtsoftbuffer is not set.
+ fhtbuf returns the free memory in this buffer (in hex),
+ an empty buffer in the FHZ1000 is 2c (42 bytes), in the FHZ1300 is 4a
+ (74 bytes). A message occupies 3 + 2x(number of FHT commands) bytes,
+ this is the second reason why sending multiple FHT commands with one
+ set is a good idea. The first reason is, that
+ these FHT commands are sent at once to the FHT.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+
+
do_not_notify
+ Disable FileLog/notify/inform notification for a device. This affects
+ the received signal, the set and trigger commands.
loglevel
+ Set the device loglevel to e.g. 6 if you do not wish messages from a
+ given device to appear in the global logfile (FHZ/FS20/FHT). E.g. to
+ set the FHT time, you should schedule "set FHZ time" every minute, but
+ this in turn makes your logfile unreadable. These messages will not be
+ generated if the FHZ attribute loglevel is set to 6.
+ On the other hand, if you have to debug a given device, setting its
+ loglevel to a smaller value than the value of the global verbose attribute,
+ it will output its messages normally seen only with higher global verbose
+ levels.
+
fhtsoftbuffer
+ As the FHZ command buffer for FHT devices is limited (see fhtbuf),
+ and commands are only sent to the FHT device every 120 seconds,
+ the hardware buffer may overflow and FHT commands get lost.
+ Setting this attribute implements an "unlimited" software buffer.
+ Default is disabled (i.e. not set or set to 0).
+ The HMLAN is the fhem module for the eQ-3 HomeMatic LAN Configurator.
+
+ The fhem module will emulate a CUL device, so the CUL_HM
+ module can be used to define HomeMatic devices.
+
+ In order to use it with fhem you must disable the encryption first
+ with the "HomeMatic Lan Interface Configurator" (which is part of the
+ supplied Windows software), by selecting the device, "Change IP Settings",
+ and deselect "AES Encrypt Lan Communication".
+ This device can be used in parallel with a CCU and (readonly) with fhem. To do this:
+
+
start the fhem/contrib/tcptee.pl program
+
redirect the CCU to the local host
+
disable the LAN-Encryption on the CCU for the Lan configurator
+
set the dummy attribute for the HMLAN device in fhem
+
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> HMLAN <ip-address>[:port]
+
+ port is 1000 by default.
+ If the ip-address is called none, then no device will be opened, so you
+ can experiment without hardware attached.
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/00_KM271.pm b/FHEM/00_KM271.pm
index 11b649eaf..bccbe152e 100755
--- a/FHEM/00_KM271.pm
+++ b/FHEM/00_KM271.pm
@@ -814,3 +814,238 @@ KM271_SetReading($$$$$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
KM271
+
+ KM271 is the name of the communication device for the Buderus Logamatic 2105
+ or 2107 heating controller. It is connected via a serial line to the fhem
+ computer. The fhem module sets the communication device into log-mode, which
+ then will generate an event on change of the inner parameters. There are
+ about 20.000 events a day, the FHEM module ignores about 90% of them, if the
+ all_km271_events attribute is not set.
+
+
+ Note: this module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module.
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> KM271 <serial-device-name>
+
+ Example:
+
+ define KM271 KM271 /dev/ttyS0@2400
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set KM271 <param> [<value> [<values>]]
+ where param is one of:
+
+
hk1_tagsoll <temp>
+ sets the by day temperature for heating circuit 1
+ 0.5 celsius resolution - temperature between 10 and 30 celsius
+
hk2_tagsoll <temp>
+ sets the by day temperature for heating circuit 2
+ (see above)
+
hk1_nachtsoll <temp>
+ sets the by night temperature for heating circuit 1
+ (see above)
+
hk2_nachtsoll <temp>
+ sets the by night temperature for heating circuit 2
+ (see above)
+
hk1_betriebsart [automatik|nacht|tag]
+ sets the working mode for heating circuit 1
+
+
automatik: the timer program is active and the summer configuration is in effect
+
nacht: manual by night working mode, no timer program is in effect
+
tag: manual by day working mode, no timer program is in effect
+
+
+
hk2_betriebsart [automatik|nacht|tag]
+ sets the working mode for heating circuit 2
+ (see above)
+
ww_soll <temp>
+ sets the hot water temperature
+ 1.0 celsius resolution - temperature between 30 and 60 celsius
+
ww_betriebsart [automatik|nacht|tag]
+ sets the working mode for hot water
+
+
automatik: hot water production according to the working modes of both heating circuits
+
nacht: no hot water at all
+
tag: manual permanent hot water
+
+
ww_on-for-timer [period]
+ start hot water production for the given period
+ period must have the format HH:MM
+ ww_betriebsart is set according to the attribut ww_timermode. For switching-off hot water a single one-time at command is automatically generated which will set ww_betriebsart back to nacht
+
hk1_programm [eigen|familie|frueh|spaet|vormittag|nachmittag|mittag|single|senior]
+ sets the timer program for heating circuit 1
+
+
eigen: the custom program defined by the user (see below) is used
+
all others: predefined programs from Buderus for various situations (see Buderus manual for details)
+
+
hk2_programm [eigen|familie|frueh|spaet|vormittag|nachmittag|mittag|single|senior]
+ sets the timer program for heating circuit 2
+ (see above)
+
hk1_timer [<position> delete|<position> <on-day> <on-time> <off-day> <off-time>]
+ sets (or deactivates) a by day working mode time interval for the custom program of heating circuit 1
+
+
position: addresses a slot of the custom timer program and must be between 1 and 21
+ The slot will be set to the interval specified by the following on- and off-timepoints or is deactivated when the next argument is delete.
+
on-day: first part of the on-timepoint
+ valid arguments are [mo|di|mi|do|fr|sa|so]
+
on-time: second part of the on-timepoint
+ valid arguments have the format HH:MM (supported resolution: 10 min)
+
off-day: first part of the off-timepoint
+ (see above)
+
off-time: second part of the off-timepoint
+ valid arguments have the format HH:MM (supported resolution: 10 min)
+
+ As the on-timepoint is reached, the heating circuit is switched to by day working mode and when the off-timepoint is attained, the circuit falls back to by night working mode.
+ A program can be build up by chaining up to 21 of these intervals. They are ordered by the position argument. There's no behind the scene magic that will automatically consolidate the list.
+ The consistency of the program is in the responsibility of the user.
+
+ Example:
+
+ set KM271 hk1_timer 1 mo 06:30 mo 08:20
+
+ This will toogle the by day working mode every Monday at 6:30 and will fall back to by night working mode at 8:20 the same day.
+
hk2_timer [<position> delete|<position> <on-day> <on-time> <off-day> <off-time>]
+ sets (or deactivates) a by day working mode time interval for the custom program of heating circuit 2
+ (see above)
+
logmode set to logmode / request all readings again
all_km271_events
+ If this attribute is set to 1, do not ignore following events:
+ HK1_Vorlaufisttemperatur, HK2_Vorlaufisttemperatur, Kessel_Vorlaufisttemperatur,
+ Kessel_Integral, Kessel_Integral1
+ These events account for ca. 92% of all events.
+ All UNKNOWN events are ignored too, most of them were only seen
+ directly after setting the device into logmode.
+
+
+
ww_timermode [automatik|tag]
+ Defines the working mode for the ww_on-for-timer command (default is tag).
+ ww_on-for-timer will set the ww_betriebsart of the heater according to this attribute.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Generated events:
+
+
Abgastemperatur
+
Aussentemperatur
+
Aussentemperatur_gedaempft
+
Brenner_Ansteuerung
+
Brenner_Ausschalttemperatur
+
Brenner_Einschalttemperatur
+
Brenner_Laufzeit1_Minuten2
+
Brenner_Laufzeit1_Minuten1
+
Brenner_Laufzeit1_Minuten
+
Brenner_Laufzeit2_Minuten2
+
Brenner_Laufzeit2_Minuten1
+
Brenner_Laufzeit2_Minuten
+
Brenner_Mod_Stellglied
+
ERR_Fehlerspeicher1
+
ERR_Fehlerspeicher2
+
ERR_Fehlerspeicher3
+
ERR_Fehlerspeicher4
+
ERR_Letzter_Fehlerstatus
+
HK1_Ausschaltoptimierung
+
HK1_Betriebswerte1
+
HK1_Betriebswerte2
+
HK1_Einschaltoptimierung
+
HK1_Heizkennlinie_+10_Grad
+
HK1_Heizkennlinie_-10_Grad
+
HK1_Heizkennlinie_0_Grad
+
HK1_Mischerstellung
+
HK1_Pumpe
+
HK1_Raumisttemperatur
+
HK1_Raumsolltemperatur
+
HK1_Vorlaufisttemperatur
+
HK1_Vorlaufsolltemperatur
+
HK2_Ausschaltoptimierung
+
HK2_Betriebswerte1
+
HK2_Betriebswerte2
+
HK2_Einschaltoptimierung
+
HK2_Heizkennlinie_+10_Grad
+
HK2_Heizkennlinie_-10_Grad
+
HK2_Heizkennlinie_0_Grad
+
HK2_Mischerstellung
+
HK2_Pumpe
+
HK2_Raumisttemperatur
+
HK2_Raumsolltemperatur
+
HK2_Vorlaufisttemperatur
+
HK2_Vorlaufsolltemperatur
+
Kessel_Betrieb
+
Kessel_Fehler
+
Kessel_Integral
+
Kessel_Integral1
+
Kessel_Vorlaufisttemperatur
+
Kessel_Vorlaufsolltemperatur
+
Modulkennung
+
NoData
+
Versionsnummer_NK
+
Versionsnummer_VK
+
WW_Betriebswerte1
+
WW_Betriebswerte2
+
WW_Einschaltoptimierung
+
WW_Isttemperatur
+
WW_Pumpentyp
+
WW_Solltemperatur
+
+
+ As I cannot explain all the values, I logged data for a period and plotted
+ each received value in the following logs:
+
+ All of these events are reported directly after initialization (or after
+ requesting logmode), along with some 60 configuration records (6byte long
+ each). Most parameters from these records are reverse engeneered, they
+ all start with CFG_ for configuration and PRG_ for timer program information.
+
+ Use infrared signals received by an lirc device as toggle events.
+
+ Note: this module needs the Lirc::Client perl module.
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> LIRC <lircrc_file>
+ Example:
+
+ define Lirc LIRC /etc/lirc/lircrc
+
+ Note: In the lirc configuration file you have to define each possible event.
+ If you have this configuration
+
+ begin
+ prog = fhem
+ button = pwr
+ config = IrPower
+ end
+ and you press the pwr button the IrPower toggle event occures at fhem.
+
+ define IrPower01 notify IrPower set lamp toggle
+ turns the lamp on and off.
+ If you want a faster reaction to keypresses you have to change the
+ defaultvalue of readytimeout from 5 seconds to e.g. 1 second in fhem.pl
+
+
+
+
+ Set
N/A
+
+
+ Get
N/A
+
+
+ Attributes
N/A
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/00_OWX.pm b/FHEM/00_OWX.pm
index f42bfa06a..a960b55e6 100644
--- a/FHEM/00_OWX.pm
+++ b/FHEM/00_OWX.pm
@@ -2088,3 +2088,94 @@ sub OWX_Verify_CUNO ($$) {
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
OWX
+
FHEM module to commmunicate with 1-Wire bus devices
+
via an active DS2480/DS2482/DS2490/DS9097U bus master interface attached to an
+ USB port or
+
via a passive DS9097 interface attached to an USB port or
+
via a network-attached CUNO or through a COC on the RaspBerry Pi
+
Internally these interfaces are vastly different, read the corresponding Wiki pages
+
+
+ Example
+
sets the time period in seconds for "kicking" the 1-Wire bus
+ (default is 300 seconds). This means:
+
With 1-Wire bus interfaces that do not supply power to the 1-Wire bus
+ (attr buspower parasitic), the 1-Wire bus is reset at these intervals.
+
With 1-Wire bus interfaces that supply power to the 1-Wire bus (attr
+ buspower = real), all temperature measurement devices on the bus receive
+ the command to start a temperature conversion (saves a lot of time when
+ reading)
+
With 1-Wire bus interfaces that contain a busmaster chip, the response
+ to a reset pulse contains information about alarms.
performs an "alarm search" for devices on the 1-Wire bus and, if
+ found, generates an event in the log (not with CUNO).
+
+
+ get <name> devices
+
redicovers all devices on the 1-Wire bus. If a device found has a
+ previous definition, this is automatically used. If a device is found but has no
+ definition, it is autocreated. If a defined device is not on the 1-Wire bus, it
+ is autodeleted.
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/00_TCM.pm b/FHEM/00_TCM.pm
index 1130462f7..9eacd2923 100755
--- a/FHEM/00_TCM.pm
+++ b/FHEM/00_TCM.pm
@@ -668,3 +668,84 @@ TCM_Undef($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
TCM
+
+ The TCM module serves an USB or TCP/IP connected TCM120 or TCM310 EnOcean
+ Transceiver module. These are mostly packaged together with a serial to USB
+ chip and an antenna, e.g. the BSC BOR contains the TCM120, the EUL from
+ busware contains a TCM310. See also the datasheet available from www.enocean.com.
+
+ As the TCM120 and the TCM310 speak completely different protocols, this
+ module implements 2 drivers in one. It is the "physical" part for the EnOcean module.
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> TCM [120|310] <device>
+
+ First you have to specify the type of the EnOcean Transceiver Chip , i.e
+ either 120 for the TCM120 or 310 for the TCM310.
+ device can take the same parameters (@baudrate, @directio,
+ TCP/IP, none) like the CUL, but you probably have
+ to specify the baudrate: the TCM120 should be opened with 9600 Baud, the
+ TCM310 with 57600 baud.
+ Example:
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/00_TUL.pm b/FHEM/00_TUL.pm
index 3a0ad3426..50ce646d7 100644
--- a/FHEM/00_TUL.pm
+++ b/FHEM/00_TUL.pm
@@ -1084,3 +1084,95 @@ sub sendRequest($$)
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
TUL
+
+
+
+
+ The TUL module is the representation of a EIB / KNX connector in FHEM.
+ EIB instances represent the EIB / KNX devices and will need a TUL as IODev to communicate with the EIB / KNX network.
+ The TUL module is designed to connect to EIB network either using EIBD or the TUL usb stick created by busware.de
+
+ Note: this module may require the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort
+ module if you attach the device via USB and the OS sets strange default
+ parameters for serial devices.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> TUL <device> <physical address>
+
+ TUL usb stick / TPUART serial devices:
+ <device> specifies the serial port to communicate with the TUL.
+ The name of the serial-device depends on your distribution, under
+ linux the cdc_acm kernel module is responsible, and usually a
+ /dev/ttyACM0 device will be created. If your distribution does not have a
+ cdc_acm module, you can force usbserial to handle the TUL by the
+ following command:
modprobe usbserial vendor=0x03eb
+ product=0x204b
In this case the device is most probably
+ /dev/ttyUSB0.
+
+ You can also specify a baudrate if the device name contains the @
+ character, e.g.: /dev/ttyACM0@19200
+ Note: For TUL usb stick the baudrate 19200 is needed and this is the default
+ when no baudrate is given.
+
+
+ Example:
+ define tul TUL tul:/dev/ttyACM0 1.1.249
+
+ EIBD:
+ <device> specifies the host:port of the eibd device. E.g.
+ eibd:192.168.0.244:2323. When using the standard port, the port can be omitted.
+
+
+ Example:
+ define tul TUL eibd:localhost 1.1.249
+
+
+ If the device is called none, then no device will be opened, so you
+ can experiment without hardware attached.
+
+ The physical address is used as the source address of telegrams sent to EIB network.
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/00_ZWDongle.pm b/FHEM/00_ZWDongle.pm
index 21d78e5fd..6e2c829c7 100755
--- a/FHEM/00_ZWDongle.pm
+++ b/FHEM/00_ZWDongle.pm
@@ -534,3 +534,103 @@ ZWDongle_Ready($)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
ZWDongle
+
+ This module serves a ZWave dongle, which is attached via USB or TCP/IP, and
+ enables the use of ZWave devices (see also the ZWave
+ module). It was tested wit a Goodway WD6001, but since the protocol is
+ standardized, it should work with other devices too. A notable exception is
+ the USB device from Merten.
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> ZWDongle <device>
+
+
+ Upon initial connection the module will get the homeId of the attached
+ device. Since the DevIo module is used to open the device, you can also use
+ devices connected via TCP/IP. See this paragraph on
+ device naming details.
+
+ Example:
+
addNode [on|off]
+ Activate (or deactivate) inclusion mode. The controller (i.e. the dongle)
+ will accept inclusion (i.e. pairing/learning) requests only while in this
+ mode. After activating inclusion mode usually you have to press a switch
+ three times within 1.5 seconds on the node to be included into the network
+ of the controller. If autocreate is active, a fhem device will be created
+ after inclusion.
+
+
removeNode [on|off]
+ Activate (or deactivate) exclusion mode. Note: the corresponding fhem
+ device have to be deleted manually.
+
+
createNode id
+ Request the class information for the specified node, and create a fhem
+ device upon reception of the answer. Used for previously included nodes,
+ see the nodeList get command below.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+
nodeList
+ return the list of included nodeIds. Can be used to recreate fhem-nodes
+ with the createNode command.
+
+
homeId
+ return the six hex-digit homeId of the controller.
+
+
caps, ctrlCaps, version
+ return different controller specific information. Needed by developers only.
+
+
nodeInfo
+ return node specific information. Needed by developers only.
+
+
+
raw
+ Send raw data to the controller. Developer only.
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/01_FHEMWEB.pm b/FHEM/01_FHEMWEB.pm
index b88622f94..12ec8d229 100755
--- a/FHEM/01_FHEMWEB.pm
+++ b/FHEM/01_FHEMWEB.pm
@@ -2517,3 +2517,317 @@ FW_Set($@)
#####################################
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
FHEMWEB
+
+ FHEMWEB is the builtin web-frontend (webpgm2). It implements a simple web
+ server (optionally with Basic-Auth and HTTPS), so no additional program is
+ needed.
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> FHEMWEB <tcp-portnr> [global]
+
+ Enable the webfrontend on port <tcp-portnr>. If global is specified,
+ then requests from all interfaces (not only localhost / 127.0.0.1) are
+ serviced.
+ To enable listening on IPV6 see the comments here.
+
+ Feature: http://host:port/fhem/icons/<devicename> will return
+ the icon associated with the current status of <devicename>.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set <name> rereadicons
+
+ Rereads the icons in the icon path and updates the mapping from logical icons to physical files.
+ Use after adding, deleting or changing icons.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+
icon <logical icon>
+
+ returns the absolute path to the logical icon. Example:
+
+ get myFHEMWEB icon FS20.on
+ /data/Homeautomation/fhem/FHEM/FS20.on.png
+
+
+
pathlist
+ return FHEMWEB specific directories, where files for given types are located
+
+
+
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+
+
webname
+ Path after the http://hostname:port/ specification. Defaults to fhem,
+ i.e the default http address is http://localhost:8083/fhem
+
+
+
+
refresh
+ If set, a http-equiv="refresh" entry will be genererated with the given
+ argument (i.e. the browser will reload the page after the given
+ seconds).
+
+
+
+
plotmode
+ Specifies how to generate the plots:
+
+
gnuplot
+ Call the gnuplot script with each logfile. The filename
+ specification of the FileLog device will
+ determine what is in the plot. The data is converted into an
+ image on the backend with gnuplot.
+
gnuplot-scroll
+ Fhemweb will offer zoom and scroll buttons in order to navigate
+ in the current logfile, i.e. you can select just a part of the
+ data to be displayed. The more data is contained in a single
+ logfile, the easier you can navigate. The recommendation is to
+ store the data for a whole year in one logfile. The data is
+ converted into an image on the backend with gnuplot.
+
SVG
+ The same scrolling as with gnuplot scroll, but the data is sent
+ as an SVG script to the frontend, which will compute
+ the image: no need for gnuplot on the backend.
+ This is the default. Note: SVG is supported on the Android
+ platform by Opera/Firefox and the Internet Explorer before 9
+ needs a plugin.
+
+
+ See also the attribute fixedrange.
+ Note: for gnuplot & gnuplot-scroll mode the gnuplot output is
+ redirected to the file gnuplot.err in the /tmp directory
+
+
+
+
plotsize
+ the default size of the plot, in pixels, separated by comma:
+ width,height. You can set individual sizes by setting the plotsize of
+ the weblink. Default is 800,160 for desktop, and 480,160 for
+ smallscreen.
+
+
+
+
fixedrange
+ Can be applied to weblink devices (FHEMWEB).
+ Contains two time specs in the form YYYY-MM-DD separated by a space.
+ In plotmode gnuplot-scroll or SVG the given time-range will be used,
+ and no scrolling for this weblinks will be possible. Needed e.g. for
+ looking at last-years data without scrolling.
+ If the value is one of day, week, month, year than set the zoom level
+ for this weblink independently of the user specified zoom-level.
+ This is useful for pages with multiple plots: one of the plots is best
+ viewed in with the default (day) zoom, the other one with a week zoom.
+
+
+
+
+
smallscreen, touchpad
+ Optimize for small screen size (i.e. smartphones) or for touchpad
+ devices (i.e. tablets)
+ Note: The default configuration installed with make install-pgm2
+ installs 2 FHEMWEB instances: port 8083 for desktop browsers and
+ port 8084 for smallscreen browsers, both using SVG rendering.
+ On Android SVG is supported by Opera/Firefox.
+
+ WebApp suppport if specifying one of the above options: After viewing
+ the site on the iPhone or iPad in Safari, add it to the home-screen to
+ get full-screen support.
+
+
+
+
plotfork
+ If set, generate the logs in a parallel process. Note: do not use it
+ on Windows and on systems with small memory foorprint.
+
+
+
+
basicAuth, basicAuthMsg
+ request a username/password authentication for access. You have to set
+ the basicAuth attribute to the Base64 encoded value of
+ <user>:<password>, e.g.:
+ # Calculate first the encoded string with the commandline program
+ $ echo -n fhemuser:secret | base64
+ ZmhlbXVzZXI6c2VjcmV0
+ fhem.cfg:
+ attr WEB basicAuth ZmhlbXVzZXI6c2VjcmV0
+
+ You can of course use other means of base64 encoding, e.g. online
+ Base64 encoders. If basicAuthMsg is set, it will be displayed in the
+ popup window when requesting the username/password.
+
+ If the argument of basicAuth is enclosed in {}, then it will be
+ evaluated, and the $user and $password variable will be set to the
+ values entered. If the return value is true, then the password will be
+ accepted.
+ Example:
+
+ attr WEB basicAuth { "$user:$password" eq "admin:secret" }
+ attr WEB basicAuth {use FritzBoxUtils;;FB_checkPw("localhost","$password") }
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
HTTPS
+ Enable HTTPS connections. This feature requires the perl module
+ IO::Socket::SSL, to be installed with cpan -i IO::Socket::SSL or
+ apt-get install libio-socket-ssl-perl; OSX and the FritzBox-7390
+ already have this module.
+
+ A local certificate has to be generated into a directory called certs,
+ this directory must be in the modpath
+ directory, at the same level as the FHEM directory.
+
stylesheetPrefix
+ prefix for the files style.css, svg_style.css and svg_defs.svg. If the file
+ with the prefix is missing, the default file (without prefix) will be used.
+ These files have to be placed into the FHEM directory, and can be selected
+ directly from the "Select style" FHEMWEB menu entry. Example:
+
+ attr WEB stylesheetPrefix dark
+
+ Referenced files:
+
hiddenroom
+ Komma separated list of rooms to "hide", i.e. not to show. Special
+ values are input, detail and save, in which case the input areas, link
+ to the detailed views or save button is hidden (although each aspect
+ still can be addressed through url manipulation).
+ The list can also contain values from the additional "Howto/Wiki/FAQ"
+ block.
+
+
+
+
+
longpoll
+ Affects devices states in the room overview only.
+ In this mode status update is refreshed more or less instantaneously,
+ and state change (on/off only) is done without requesting a complete
+ refresh from the server.
+
+
+
+
+
redirectCmds
+ Clear the browser URL window after issuing the command by redirecting
+ the browser, as a reload for the same site might have unintended
+ side-effects. Default is 1 (enabled). Disable it by setting this
+ attribute to 0 if you want to study the command syntax, in order to
+ communicate with FHEMWEB.
+
+
+
+
+
webCmd
+ Colon separated list of commands to be shown in the room overview for a
+ certain device. On smallscreen devices only the first value is
+ accessible.
+ If the first value references a command, for which "set
+ device ?" lists a number possible choices (e.g. desired-temp for FHT
+ devices), then a select widget will be displayed. If the values are
+ "slider,min,step,max", then a javascript driven slider is displayed.
+ if the value is "time", then a javascript timepicker is displayed.
+ If the command is state, then the value will be used as a command.
+ Examples:
+
+ attr lamp webCmd on:off:on-for-timer 10
+ define d1 dummy
+ attr d1 webCmd state
+ attr d1 set setList state:on,off
+ define d2 dummy
+ attr d2 webCmd state
+ attr d2 set setList state:slider,0,1,10
+ define d3 dummy
+ attr d3 webCmd state
+ attr d3 set setList state:time
+
+ Note: this is an attribute for the displayed device, not for the FHEMWEB
+ instance.
+
+
+
+
+
fwmodpath
+ Set the "modpath" for this intance of FHEMWEB. Used to search .gplot
+ files, pictures, etc. Default is the modpath/FHEM directory.
+
+
+
+
+
fwcompress
+ Enable compressing the HTML data (default is 1, i.e. yes, use 0 to switch it off).
+
+
+
+
+
icon
+ Set the icon for a device in the room overview. There is an
+ icon-chooser in FHEMWEB to ease this task. Setting icons for the room
+ itself is indirect: there must exist an icon with the name
+ ico.png in the modpath/fwmodpath directory.
+
+
+
+
+
reverseLogs
+ Display the lines from the logfile in a reversed order, newest on the
+ top, so that you dont have to scroll down to look at the latest entries.
+ Note: enabling this attribute will prevent FHEMWEB from streaming
+ logfiles, resulting in a considerably increased memory consumption
+ (about 6 times the size of the file on the disk).
+
+
+ Defines the HTTP server. <infix> is the portion behind the FHEMWEB base URL (usually
+ http://hostname:8083/fhem), <directory> is the absolute path the
+ files are served from, and <friendlyname> is the name displayed in the side menu of FHEMWEB.
+
+ Example:
+
+ define myJSFrontend HTTPSRV jsf /usr/share/jsfrontend My little frontend
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ n/a
+
+
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+
+
directoryindex: if the request is sent with no filename, i.e. the infix (with or without trailing slash) only, the file given in this attribute is loaded. Defaults to index.html.
+
+
+
+ Usage information
+
+
+
+ The above example on http://hostname:8083/fhem will return the file
+ /usr/share/jsfrontend/foo.html for http://hostname:8083/fhem/jsf/foo.html.
+ If no filename is given, the filename prescribed by the directoryindex attribute is returned.
+
+ Notice: All links are relative to http://hostname:8083/fhem.
+
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/02_RSS.pm b/FHEM/02_RSS.pm
index dd92bbcdf..32ad6cc09 100644
--- a/FHEM/02_RSS.pm
+++ b/FHEM/02_RSS.pm
@@ -472,3 +472,178 @@ RSS_CGI(){
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
RSS
+
+ Provides a freely configurable RSS feed.
+
+ Currently a media RSS feed delivering status pictures in JPEG format is supported. This media
+ RSS feed can be used to feed a status display to a network-enabled photo frame.
+
+ You need to have the perl module GD installed. This module is most likely not
+ available for small systems like Fritz!Box.
+ RSS is an extension to FHEMWEB. You must install FHEMWEB to use RSS.
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> RSS jpg <hostname> <filename>
+
+ Defines the RSS feed. jpg is a fixed literal to allow for future
+ extensions. <hostname> is the hostname of the fhem server as
+ seen from the consumer of the RSS feed. <filename> is the
+ name of the file that contains the layout definition.
+ Rereads the layout definition from the file. Useful to enable
+ changes in the layout on-the-fly.
+
+
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+
+
size The dimensions of the JPEG picture in the format
+ <width>x<height>.
+
bg The directory that contains the background pictures (must be in JPEG format).
+
tmin The background picture is shown at least tmin seconds,
+ no matter how frequently the RSS feed consumer accesses the page.
+
+
+
+ Usage information
+
+
+ If a least one RSS feed is defined, the menu entry RSS appears in the FHEMWEB
+ side menu. If you click it you get a list of all defined RSS feeds. The URL of any such is
+ RSS feed is http://hostname:port/fhem/rss/name.rss with hostname and
+ name from the RSS feed's definition and the port
+ (usually 8083) and literal /fhem from the underlying FHEMWEB
+ definition.
+
+ The media RSS feed points to a dynamically generated JPEG picture. The URL of the JPEG picture
+ belonging to the RSS feed is http://hostname:port/fhem/rss/name.jpg, i.e. the URL
+ of the RSS feed with the extension rss changed to jpg.
+
+ To render the JPEG picture the current, or, if tmin seconds have elapsed, the next
+ JPEG picture from the directory bg is chosen and scaled to the dimensions given
+ in size. The background is black if no usable JPEG picture can be found. Next the
+ script in the layout definition is used to superimpose items on
+ the background.
+
+ You can directly access the URL of the JPEG picture in your browser. Reload the page to see
+ how it works.
+
+ The media RSS feed advertises to refresh after 1 minute (ttl). Some photo frames ignore it and
+ use their preset refresh rate. Go for a photo frame with an adjustable refresh rate (e.g
+ every 5 seconds) if you have the choice!
+
+ This is how the fhem config part might look like:
+ The layout definition is a script for placing items on the background. It is read top-down.
+ It consists of layout control commands and items placement commands. Layout control
+ commands define the appearance of subsequent items. Item placement commands actually
+ render items.
+
+ Everything after a # is treated as a comment and ignored. You can fold long lines by
+ putting a \ at the end.
+
+ Layout control commands
+
+
font <font> Sets the font. <font> is the name of a TrueType font (e.g.
+ Arial) or the full path to a TrueType font
+ (e.g. /usr/share/fonts/truetype/arial.ttf),
+ whatever works on your system.
+
+
rgb <color> Sets the color. <color> is a 6-digit hex number, every 2 digits
+ determining the red, green and blue color components as in HTML color codes (e.g.
+ FF0000 for red, C0C0C0 for light gray).
+
+
pt <pt> Sets the font size in points.
+
+
+ Item placement commands
+
+
text <x> <y> <text> Renders the text <text> at the
+ position (<x>, <y>) using the current font, font size and color.
+ (0,0) is the upper left corner. Coordinates equal or
+ greater than 1 are considered to be pixels, coordinates between 0 and 1 are considered to
+ be relative to the total width or height of the picture. You can use
+ { <perl special> } for <text> to fully
+ access device readings and do some programming on the fly. See below for examples.
+
+
time <x> <y> Renders the current time in HH:MM format.
+
seconds <x> <y> <format> Renders the curent seconds. Maybe usefull for a RSS Clock. With option colon a :
+
date <x> <y> Renders the current date in DD:MM:YYY format.
+
img <x> <y> <s> <imgtype> <srctype> <arg> Renders a picture at the
+ position (<x>, <y>). The <imgtype> is one of gif, jpeg, png.
+ The picture is scaled by the factor <s> (a decimal value). If <srctype> is file, the picture
+ is loaded from the filename <arg>, if <srctype> is url, the picture
+ is loaded from the URL <arg>. You can use
+ { <perl special> } for <arg>. See below for example.
+ Notice: do not load the image from URL that is served by fhem as it leads to a deadlock.
+
+
+
+ This is how a layout definition might look like:
+
+ font /usr/share/fonts/truetype/arial.ttf # must be a TrueType font
+ rgb c0c0c0 # HTML color notation, RGB
+ pt 48 # font size in points
+ time 0.10 0.90
+ pt 24
+ text 0.10 0.95 { ReadingsVal("MyWeather","temperature","?"). "C" }
+ img 20 530 0.5 png file { "/usr/share/fhem/www/images/weather/" . ReadingsVal("MyWeather","icon","") . ".png" }
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/09_BS.pm b/FHEM/09_BS.pm
index 2f6fc68e0..4fe226849 100644
--- a/FHEM/09_BS.pm
+++ b/FHEM/09_BS.pm
@@ -130,3 +130,75 @@ BS_Parse($$)
#############################
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
BS
+
+ The module BS allows to collect data from a brightness sensor through a
+ FHZ device. For details on the brightness sensor see
+ busware wiki.
+ You can have at most nine different brightness sensors in range of your
+ FHZ.
+
+
+ The state contains the brightness in % (reading brightness) and
+ the brightness in lux (reading lux). The flags
+ reading is always zero. The meaning of these readings is explained in more
+ detail on the above mentioned wiki page.
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> BS <sensor#> [<RExt>]
+
+
+ <sensor#> is the number of sensor in the brightness
+ sensor address system that runs from 1 to 9.
+
+ <RExt> is the value of the resistor on your brightness
+ sensor in Ω (Ohm). The brightness reading in % is proportional to the resistance, the
+ lux reading is proportional to the resistance squared. The value is
+ optional. The default resistance is RExt= 50.000Ω.
+
+
+ Example:
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/09_CUL_FHTTK.pm b/FHEM/09_CUL_FHTTK.pm
index ff500b347..21304262d 100644
--- a/FHEM/09_CUL_FHTTK.pm
+++ b/FHEM/09_CUL_FHTTK.pm
@@ -254,3 +254,63 @@ CUL_FHTTK_Parse($$)
#############################
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
CUL_FHTTK
+
+ This module handles messages from the FHT80 TF "Fenster-Tür-Kontakt" (Window-Door-Contact)
+ which are normally only acted upon by the FHT80B. With this module,
+ FHT80 TFs are in a limited way (see Wiki
+ for detailed explanation of TF's mode of operation) usable similar to HMS100 TFK. The name
+ of the module was chosen as a) only CUL will spill out the datagrams and b) "TF" designates
+ usually temperature+humidity sensors (no clue, why ELV didn't label this one "TFK" like with
+ FS20 and HMS).
+ As said before, FHEM can receive FHT80 TF radio (868.35 MHz) messages only through an
+ CUL device, so this must be defined first.
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> CUL_FHTTK <devicecode>
+
+
+ <devicecode> is a six digit hex number, given to the FHT80 TF during
+ production, i. e. it is not changeable. (Yes, it keeps this code after changing batteries
+ as well.)
+
+ Examples:
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/09_USF1000.pm b/FHEM/09_USF1000.pm
index 84fb3ed2e..7a6985c0e 100644
--- a/FHEM/09_USF1000.pm
+++ b/FHEM/09_USF1000.pm
@@ -176,3 +176,79 @@ USF1000_Parse($$)
#############################
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
USF1000
+
+ Fhem can receive your tank's fill level from the USF1000S device
+ through a FHZ device, so one must be defined first.
+ The state contains the fill level in % (lower case v in the device state)
+ and the current volume in liters (upper case V in the device state).
+ Measured distance to the liquid's surface, fill level, volume and warnings
+ (Test mode, Battery low) are available. Due to the design of the USF1000S
+ protocol, you can have only one USF1000S in range of your FHZ as these
+ devices cannot be distinguished.
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> USF1000 <geometry>
+
+
+ <geometry> determines the form of the tank and the
+ position of the sensor. The following geometries are currently
+ supported:
+
+
cub <length> <width> <height> <offset>
+
cylv <diameter> <height> <offset>
+
+
+ cub stands for a cuboid whose base is <length> × <width>.
+ cylv stands for a vertical cylinder whose diameter is <diameter>.
+ <height> is the distance of the surface of the liquid from the ground
+ if the tank is full. <offset> is the distance of the sensor relative to
+ the surface of the liquid. All quantities are expressed in meters.
+
+
+ Example:
+
+ define MyTank USF1000 cylv 2 1 0.3: a cylindrical water tank with
+ 2 meters diameter. The water stands 1 meter high if the tank is full. The
+ sensor is fixed 1,3 meters above ground.
+
+ Correct device definition is the key for HM environment simple maintenance.
+
+
+ Background to define entities:
+ HM devices has a 3 byte (6 digit hex value) HMid - which is key for
+ addressing. Each device hosts one or more channels. HMid for a channel is
+ the device's HMid plus the channel number (1 byte, 2 digit) in hex.
+ Channels should be defined for all multi-channel devices. Channel entities
+ cannot be defined if the hosting device does not exist Note: FHEM
+ mappes channel 1 to the device if it is not defined explicitely. Therefore
+ it does not need to be defined for single channel devices.
+
+ Note: if a device is deleted all assotiated channels will be removed as
+ well. An example for a full definition of a 2 channel switch is given
+ below:
+
+
+
+ livingRoomSwitch is the device managing communication. This device is
+ defined prior to channels to be able to setup references.
+ LivingroomMainLight is channel 01 dealing with status of light, channel
+ peers and channel assotiated register. If not defined channel 01 is covered
+ by the device entity. LivingRoomBackLight is the second 'channel',
+ channel 02. Its definition is mandatory to operate this function.
+
+ Sender specials: HM threats each button of remotes, push buttons and
+ similar as channels. It is possible (not necessary) to define a channel per
+ button. If all channels are defined access to pairing informatin is
+ possible as well as access to channel related register. Furthermore names
+ make the traces better readable.
+
+ define may also be invoked by the autocreate
+ module, together with the necessary hmClass and subType attributes.
+ Usually you issue a hmPairForSec and press the
+ corresponding button on the device to be paired, or issue a hmPairSerial set command if the device is a receiver
+ and you know its serial number. Autocreate will then create a fhem
+ device and set all necessary attributes. Without pairing the device
+ will not accept messages from fhem. fhem may create the device even if
+ the pairing is not successful. Upon a successful pairing you'll see a
+ CommandAccepted entry in the details section of the CUL_HM device.
+
+ If you cannot use autocreate, then you have to specify:
+
+
the <6-digit-hex-code>or HMid+ch <8-digit-hex-code>
+ It is the unique, hardcoded device-address and cannot be changed (no,
+ you cannot choose it arbitrarily like for FS20 devices). You may
+ detect it by inspecting the fhem log.
+
the hmClass attribute
+ which is either sender or receiver
+
the subType attribute
+ which is one of switch dimmer blindActuator remote sensor swi
+ pushButton threeStateSensor motionDetector keyMatic winMatic
+ smokeDetector
+
+ Without these attributes fhem won't be able to decode device messages
+ appropriately.
+
+ Notes
+
+
If the interface is a CUL device, the rfmode
+ attribute of the corresponding CUL/CUN device must be set to HomeMatic.
+ Note: this mode is BidCos/Homematic only, you will not receive
+ FS20/HMS/EM/S300 messages via this device. Previously defined FS20/HMS
+ etc devices must be assigned to a different input device (CUL/FHZ/etc).
+
+
Currently supported device families: remote, switch, dimmer,
+ blindActuator, motionDetector, smokeDetector, threeStateSensor,
+ THSensor, winmatic. Special devices: KS550, HM-CC-TC and the KFM100.
+
+
Device messages can only be interpreted correctly if the device type is
+ known. fhem will extract the device type from a "pairing request"
+ message, even if it won't respond to it (see hmPairSerial and hmPairForSec to enable pairing).
+ As an alternative, set the correct subType and model attributes, for a
+ list of possible subType values see "attr hmdevice ?".
+
+
The so called "AES-Encryption" is in reality a signing request: if it is
+ enabled, an actor device will only execute a received command, if a
+ correct answer to a request generated by the actor is received. This
+ means:
+
+
Reaction to commands is noticably slower, as 3 messages are sent
+ instead of one before the action is processed by the actor.
+
Every command and its final ack from the device is sent in clear,
+ so an outside observer will know the status of each device.
+
The firmware implementation is buggy: the "toggle" event is executed
+ before the answer for the signing request is received, at
+ least by some switches (HM-LC-Sw1-Pl and HM-LC-SW2-PB-FM).
+
The HMLAN configurator will answer signing
+ requests by itself, and if it is configured with the 3-byte address
+ of a foreign CCU which is still configurerd with the default
+ password, it is able to answer signing requests correctly.
+
AES-Encryption is not useable with a CUL device as the interface,
+ but it is supported with a HMLAN. Due to the issues above I do not
+ recommend using Homematic encryption at all.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ Note: devices which are normally send-only (remote/sensor/etc) must be set
+ into pairing/learning mode in order to receive the following commands.
+
+
+
+ General commands (available to most hm devices):
+
+
actiondetect <[hhh:mm]|off>
+ Supports 'alive' or better 'not alive' detection for devices. [hhh:mm] is the maxumin silent time for the device. Upon no message received in this period an event will be raised "<device> is dead". If the device sends again another notification is posted "<device> is alive".
+ This actiondetect will be autocreated for each device with build in cyclic status report.
+ Controlling entity is a pseudo device "ActionDetector" with HMId "000000".
+ Due to performance considerations the report latency is set to 600sec (10min). It can be controlled by the attribute "actCycle" of "ActionDetector".
+ Once entered to the supervision the HM device has 2 attributes:
+
+ actStatus: activity status of the device
+ actCycle: detection period [hhh.mm]
+
+ Furthermore the overall function can be viewed checking out the "ActionDetector" entity. Here the status of all entities is present in the READING section.
+ Note: This function can be enabled for devices with non-cyclic messages as well. It is up to the user to enter a reasonable cycletime.
+
+
getConfig
+ Will read major configuration items stored in the HM device. Executed
+ on a channel it will read pair Inforamtion, List0, List1 and List3 of
+ the 1st internal peer. Furthermore the peerlist will be retrieved for
+ teh given channel. If executed on a device the command will get the
+ above info or all assotated channels. Not included will be the
+ configuration for additional peers. The command is a shortcut
+ for a selection of other commands.
+
+
getdevicepair
+ will read the peers (see devicepair) that are assigned to a channel.
+ This command needs to be executed per channel. Information will be
+ stored in the field Peers of the channel (see devicepair for specials
+ about single-channel deivces). For sender the same procedure as
+ described in devicepair is necessary to get a reading. Also note that
+ a proper diaplay will only be possible if define per channel (button)
+ was done - see define.
+
+
getpair
+ read pair information of the device. See also pair
+
+
getRegRaw [List0|List1|List2|List3|List4|List5|List6]
+ <peerChannel>
+
+ Read registerset in raw format. Description of the registers is beyond
+ the scope of this documentation.
+
+ Registers are structured in so called lists each containing a set of
+ registers.
+
+ List0: device-level settings e.g. CUL-pairing or dimmer thermal limit
+ settings.
+
+ List1: per channel settings e.g. time to drive the blind up and
+ down.
+
+ List3: per 'link' settings - means per peer-channel. This is a lot of
+ data!. It controlls actions taken upon receive of a trigger from the
+ peer.
+
+ List4: settings for channel (button) of a remote
+
+ <PeerChannel> paired HMid+ch, i.e. 4 byte (8 digit) value like
+ '12345601'. It is mendatory for List 3 and 4 and can be left out for
+ List 0 and 1.
+
+ 'all' can be used to get data of each paired link of the channel.
+
+ 'selfxx' can be used to address data for internal channels (associated
+ with the build-in switches if any). xx is the number of the channel in
+ decimal.
+
+ Note1: execution depends on the entity. If List1 is requested on a
+ device rather then a channel the command will retrieve List1 for all
+ channels assotiated. List3 with peerChannel = all will get all link
+ for all channel if executed on a device.
+
+ Note2: for 'sender' see remote
+
+ Note3: the information retrieval may take a while - especially for
+ devices with a lot of channels and links. It may be necessary to
+ refresh the web interface manually to view the results
+
+ Note4: the direct buttons on a HM device are hidden by default.
+ Nevertheless those are implemented as links as well. To get access to
+ the 'internal links' it is necessary to issue 'set <name> setReg
+ intKeyVisib 1' or 'set <name> setRegRaw List0 2 81'. Reset it
+ by replacing '81' with '01' example:
+
+
+ set mydimmer getRegRaw List1
+ set mydimmer getRegRaw List3 all
+
+
+
pair
+ Pair the device again with its known serialNumber (e.g. after a device
+ reset) to the CUL. If paired, devices will report status information to
+ the CUL. If not paired, the device wont respond to requests, and
+ certain status information is also not reported. Paring is on device
+ level and is common for all channels. See also getPair and unpair.
+
regRaw [List0|List1|List2|List3|List4] <addr> <data>
+ <peerChannel>
+ Will set register for device or channel. See also getRegRaw. <addr> and
+ <data> are 1 byte values that need to be given in hex.
+ Example:
+
+ set mydimmer regRaw List1 0B 10 00000000
+ set mydimmer regRaw List1 0C 00 00000000
+
+ will set the max drive time up for a blind actor to 25,6sec
+
regSet <regName> <value> <peerChannel>
+ For some major register a readable version is implemented supporting
+ register names <regName> and value conversionsing. Only a subset
+ of register can be supproted.
+ <value> is the data in human readable manner that will be written
+ to the register.
+ <peerChannel> is required if this register is defined on a per
+ 'devicepair' base. It can be set to '0' other wise.See getRegRaw for full description
+ Supported register for a device can be explored using
+
set regSet ? 0 0
+ Condensed register description will be printed
+ using
+
set regSet <regname> ? 0
+
+
reset
+ Factory reset the device. You need to pair it again to use it with
+ fhem.
+
+
sign [on|off]
+ Activate or deactivate signing (also called AES encryption, see the note above). Warning: if the device is attached via
+ a CUL, you won't be able to switch it (or deactivate signing) from
+ fhem before you reset the device directly.
+
+
statusRequest
+ Update device status. For multichannel devices it should be issued on
+ an per channel base
+
+
unpair
+ "Unpair" the device, i.e. make it available to pair with other master
+ devices. See pair for description.
+
virtual <number of buttons>
+ configures a defined curcuit as virtual remote controll. Then number
+ of button being added is 1 to 255. If the command is issued a second
+ time for the same entity additional buttons will be added.
+ Example for usage:
+
+ define vRemote CUL_HM 100000 # the selected HMid must not be in use
+ set vRemote virtual 20 # define 20 button remote controll
+ set vRemote_Btn4 devicepair 0 <actorchannel> # pairs Button 4 and 5 to the given channel
+ set vRemote_Btn4 press
+ set vRemote_Btn5 press long
+
on-for-timer <sec> -
+ set the switch on for the given seconds [0-85825945]. Note:
+ off-for-timer like FS20 is not supported. It needs to be programmed
+ on link level.
+
on-till <time> - set the switch on for the given end time.
+
set <name> on-till 20:32:10
+ Currently a max of 24h is supported with endtime.
+
toggle - toggle the switch.
+
+
+
dimmer, blindActuator
+
+
0 - 100 [on-time] [ramp-time]
+ set the actuator to the given value (in percent)
+ with a resolution of 0.5.
+ Optional for dimmer on-time and ramp time can be choosen, both in seconds with 0.1s granularity.
+ On-time is analog "on-for-timer".
+ Ramp-time default is 2.5s, 0 means instantanous
+
+
on set level to 100%
+
off set level to 0%
+
toggle - toggle between off and the last on-value
+
remotes, pushButton
+ This class of devices does not react on requests unless they are put
+ to learn mode. FHEM obeys this behavior by stacking all requests until
+ learn mode is detected. Manual interaction of the user is necessary to
+ activate learn mode. Whether commands are pending is reported on
+ device level with parameter 'protCmdPend'.
+
+
devicepair <btn_no> <hmDevice> [single|dual]
+ [set|unset] [actor|remote]
+
+ Pair/unpair will establish a connection between a sender-channel and
+ an actuator-channel called link in HM nomenclatur. Trigger from
+ sender-channel, e.g. button press, will be processed by the
+ actuator-channel without CCU interaction. Sender-channel waits for an
+ acknowledge of each actuator paired to it. Positive indication will be
+ given once all actuator responded.
+
+ Sender must be set into learning mode after command execution. FHEM
+ postpones the commands until then.
+
+ devicepair can be repeated for an existing devicepair. This will cause
+ parameter reset to HM defaults for this link.
+
+ Even though the command is executed on a remote or push-button it will
+ as well take effect on the actuator directly. Both sides' pairing is
+ virtually independant and has different impact on sender and receiver
+ side.
+
+ Devicepairing of one actuator-channel to multiple sender-channel as
+ well as one sender-channel to multiple Actuator-channel is
+ possible.
+
+ <hmDevice> is the actuator-channel to be paired.
+
+ <btn_no> is the sender-channel (button) to be paired. If
+ 'single' is choosen buttons are counted from 1. For 'dual' btn_no is
+ the number of the Button-pair to be used. I.e. '3' in dual is the
+ 3rd button pair correcponding to button 5 and 6 in single mode.
+
+ If the command is executed on a channel the btn_no is ignored.
+
+ [single|dual]: this mode impacts the default behavior of the
+ Actuator upon using this button. E.g. a dimmer can be learned to a
+ single button or to a button pair.
+
+ 'dual' (default) Button pairs two buttons to one actuator. With a
+ dimmer this means one button for dim-up and one for dim-down.
+
+ 'single' uses only one button of the sender. It is useful for e.g. for
+ simple switch actuator to toggle on/off. Nevertheless also dimmer can
+ be learned to only one button.
+
+ 'set' will setup pairing for the channels
+
+ 'unset' will remove the pairing for the channels
+
+ [actor|remote|both] limits the execution to only actor or only remote.
+ This gives the user the option to redo the pairing on the remote
+ channel while the settings in the actor will not be removed.
+
+ Example:
+ set myRemote devicepair 2 mySwActChn single set # pair second button to an actuator channel
+ set myRmtBtn devicepair 0 mySwActChn single set #myRmtBtn is a button of the remote. '0' is not processed here
+ set myRemote devicepair 2 mySwActChn dual set #pair button 3 and 4
+ set myRemote devicepair 3 mySwActChn dual unset #remove pairing for button 5 and 6
+ set myRemote devicepair 3 mySwActChn dual unset aktor #remove pairing for button 5 and 6 in actor only
+ set myRemote devicepair 3 mySwActChn dual set remote #pair button 5 and 6 on remote only. Link settings il mySwActChn will be maintained
+
press [long|short]
+ simulates a button press short (default) or long. Note that the current
+ implementation will not specify the duration for long. Only one trigger
+ will be sent of type "long".
+
+
+
+
smokeDetector
+ Note: All these commands work right now only if you have more then one
+ smoekDetector, and you paired them to form a group. For issuing the
+ commands you have to use the master of this group, and currently you
+ have to guess which of the detectors is the master.
+
+
test - execute a network test
+
alarmOn - initiate an alarm
+
alarmOff - switch off the alarm
+
+
+
+
4Dis (HM-PB-4DIS-WM)
+
+
text <btn_no> [on|off] <text1> <text2>
+ Set the text on the display of the device. To this purpose issue
+ this set command first (or a number of them), and then choose from
+ the teach-in menu of the 4Dis the "Central" to transmit the data.
+ Example:
+
+ set 4Dis text 1 on On Lamp
+ set 4Dis text 1 off Kitchen Off
+
+
+
+
+
Climate-Control (HM-CC-TC)
+
+
day-temp <tmp>
+ night-temp <tmp>
+ party-temp <tmp>
+ desired-temp <tmp>
+ Set different temperatures. Temp must be between 6 and 30
+ Celsius, and precision is half a degree.
+
tempListSat HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
+ tempListSun HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
+ tempListMon HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
+ tempListTue HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
+ tempListThu HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
+ tempListWed HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
+ tempListFri HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
+ Specify a list of temperature intervals. Up to 24 intervals can be
+ specified for each week day, the resolution is 10 Minutes. The
+ last time spec must always be 24:00.
+ Example: set th tempListSat 06:00 19 23:00 22.5 24:00 19
+ Meaning: until 6:00 temperature shall be 19, from then until 23:00 temperature shall be
+ 22.5, thereafter until midnight, 19 degrees celsius is desired.
led [off|red|green|yellow]
+ switches the LED of the channel to the color. If the command is
+ executed on a device it will set all LEDs to the specified
+ color.
+ For Expert all LEDs can be set individual by providing a 8-digit hex number to the device.
+
ilum <brightness><duration>
+ <brightness> [0-15] of backlight.
+ <duration> [0-127] in sec. 0 is permanent 'on'.
+
+
+
+
OutputUnit (HM-OU-CFM-PL)
+
+
led <color>[,<color>..]
+ Possible colors are [redL|greenL|yellowL|redS|greenS|yellowS]. A
+ sequence of colors can be given separating the color entries by ','.
+ White spaces must not be used in the list. 'S' indicates short and
+ 'L' long ilumination.
+
playTone <MP3No>[,<MP3No>..]
+ Play a series of tones. List is to be entered separated by ','. White
+ spaces must not be used in the list.
+
+
+
HM-RC-19xxx
+
+
alarm <count>
+ issue an alarm message to the remote
+
service <count>
+ issue an service message to the remote
+
symbol <symbol> [set|unset]
+ activate a symbol as available on the remote.
+
beep [off|1|2|3]
+ activate tone
+
backlight [off|on|slow|fast]
+ activate backlight
+
display <text> comma unit tone backlight <symbol(s)>
+
+ control display of the remote
+ <text> : up to 5 chars
+ comma : 'comma' activates the comma, 'no' leaves it off
+ [unit] : set the unit symbols.
+ [off|Proz|Watt|x3|C|x5|x6|x7|F|x9|x10|x11|x12|x13|x14|x15]. Currently
+ the x3..x15 display is not tested.
+
+ tone : activate one of the 3 tones [off|1|2|3]
+
+ backlight: activate backlight flash mode [off|on|slow|fast]
+
+ <symbol(s)> activate symbol display. Multople symbols can be
+ acticated at the same time, concatinating them comma separated. Don't
+ use spaces here. Possiblesymbols are
+
+ [bulb|switch|window|door|blind|scene|phone|bell|clock|arrowUp|arrowDown]
+ Example:
+
+ # "hello" in display, symb bulb on, backlight, beep
+ set FB1 display Hello no off 1 on bulb
+ # "1234,5" in display with unit 'W'. Symbols scene,phone,bell and
+ # clock are active. Backlight flashing fast, Beep is second tone
+ set FB1 display 12345 comma Watt 2 fast scene,phone,bell,clock
+
+
+
+
+
keyMatic
+
The Keymatic uses the AES signed communication. Therefore the control
+ of the Keymatic is only together with the HM-LAN adapter possible. But
+ the CUL can read and react on the status information of the
+ Keymatic.
+
+
lock
+ The lock bolt moves to the locking position
+
unlock [sec]
+ The lock bolt moves to the unlocking position. [sec]: Sets the
+ delay in seconds after the lock automatically locked again. 0 -
+ 65535 seconds
+
open [sec]
+ Unlocked the door so that the door can be opened.
+ [sec]: Sets the delay in seconds after the lock automatically locked
+ again. 0 - 65535 seconds
+
inhibit [on|off]
+ Block / unblock all directly paired remotes and the hardware buttons of the
+ keyMatic. If inhibit set on, the door lock drive can be controlled only by
+ FHEM.
+ Examples:
+
+ # Lock the lock
+ set keymatic lock
+ # open the door and relock the lock after 60 seconds
+ set keymatic unlock 60
+
+
+
+
+
+ Debugging:
+
+
raw <data> ...
+ Only needed for experimentation.
+ send a list of "raw" commands. The first command will be
+ immediately sent, the next one after the previous one is acked by
+ the target. The length will be computed automatically, and the
+ message counter will be incremented if the first two charcters are
+ ++. Example (enable AES):
+ set hm1 raw ++A001F100001234560105000000001\
+ ++A001F10000123456010802010AF10B000C00\
+ ++A001F1000012345601080801\
+ ++A001F100001234560106
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+
param <paramName>
+ returns the content of the relevant parameter for the entity.
+ Note: if this command is executed on a channel and 'model' is
+ requested the content hosting device's 'model' will be returned.
+
+
reg <addr> <list> <peerID>
+ returns the value of a register. The data is taken from the storage in
+ FHEM. It is not read again. If registercontent is not present at this
+ point in time please use getReg in advance.
+
+ <addr> address in hex of the register. Registername can be used alternaly if available in FHEM.
+ <list> list from which the register is taken. If rgistername is used list is ignored and can be set to 0.
+ <peerID> identifies the registerbank in case of list3 and list4. It an be set to dummy if not used.
+
+
regList
+ returns a list of register that are implemented in FHEM for this device.
+
hmClass,
+ model,
+ subType
+ These attributes are set automatically after a successful pairing.
+ They are not supposed to be set by hand, and are necessary in order to
+ correctly interpret device messages or to be able to send them.
+
rawToReadable
+ Used to convert raw KFM100 values to readable data, based on measured
+ values. E.g. fill slowly your container, while monitoring the
+ values reported with inform. You'll see:
+
+ Apply these values with: "attr KFM100 rawToReadable 10:0 50:20 79:40 270:100".
+ fhem will do a linear interpolation for values between the bounderies.
+
+
unit
+ set the reported unit by the KFM100 if rawToReadable is active. E.g.
+ attr KFM100 unit Liter
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/10_CUL_IR.pm b/FHEM/10_CUL_IR.pm
index aee0dd8fe..bce0529bf 100644
--- a/FHEM/10_CUL_IR.pm
+++ b/FHEM/10_CUL_IR.pm
@@ -343,3 +343,142 @@ CUL_IR_Attr(@)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
CUL_IR
+
+
+ The CUL_IR module interprets Infrared messages received by the CUN/CUNO/CUNOv2/TuxRadio.
+ Those devices can receive Infrared Signals from basically any Remote controller and will transform
+ that information in a so called Button-Code
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> CUL_IR <IODev>
+
+ <IODev> is the devicename of the IR-receivung device, e.g. CUNO1.
+
+ Your definition should look like E.g.:
+
+ define IR-Dev CUL_IR CUNO1
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+
+
irLearnForSec
+ Sets the CUL_IR device in an IR-Code Learning mode for the given seconds. Any received IR-Code will
+ be stored as a Button attribute for this devices. The name of these attributes is dependent on the two
+ attributes learncount and learnprefix.
+ Attention: Before learning IR-Codes the CUL_IR device needs to be set in IR-Receiving mode
+ by modifying the irReceive attribute.
+
+
+
irSend
+ Sends out IR-commands via the connected IODev. The IR-command can be specified as buttonname according
+ to Button.* or as IR-Code directly. If a buttonname is specified, the
+ corresponding IR-Code will be sent out.
+ Example:
+
set IR-Dev irSend ButtonA001
+ If defining an IR-Code directly the following Code-Syntax needs to be followed:
+
IRCode: <PP><AAAA><CCCC><FF>
+ with P = Protocol; A = Address; C = Command; F = Flags
+ With the Flags you can modify IR-Repetition. Flags between 00-0E will produce
+ 0-15 IR-Repetitions.
+ You can type the IR-Code as plain as above, or with a heading "I" as learnt for the buttons.
+ Example:
+ set IR-Dev irSend 0A07070F0F02
+ set IR-Dev irSend I0A07070F0F00
+
+
irReceive
+ Configure the IR Transceiver of the <IODev> (the CUNO1). Available
+ arguments are:
+
+
OFF
+ Switching off the reception of IR signals. This is the default.
+
+
ON
+ Switching on the reception of IR signals. This is WITHOUT filtering repetitions. This is
+ not recommended as many remote controls do repeat their signals.
+
+
ON_NR
+ Switching on the reception of IR signals with filtering of repetitions. This is
+ the recommended modus operandi.
+
+
+
+
Button.*
+ Button.* is the wildcard for all learnt IR-Codes. IR-Codes are learnt as Button-Attributes.
+ The name for a learnt Button - IR-Code is compiled out of three elements:
+
+ Button<learnprefix><learncount>
+
+ When the CUL_IR device is set into learning mode it will generate a
+ new button-attribute for each new IR-Code received.This is done according to the following syntax:
+
+ <Button-Attribute-Name> <IR-Code>
+ Examples of learnt button-attributes with EMPTY <learnprefix> and <learncount> starting from 1:
+
+ To make sure that something happens when this IR-code is received later on one has to modify the attribute
+ and to add commands as attribute values.
+ Examples:
+
+ Button001 I02029A000000 set WZ_Lamp on
+ Button002 I02029A000001 set Switch on
Group.*
+ Group.* is the wildcard for IR-Code groups. With these attributes one can define
+ IR-Code parts, which may match to several Button-IR-Codes.
+ This is done by defining group-attributes that contain only parts of the IR-Code.
+ The syntax is:
+
+ <Group-Attribute-Name> <IR-Code>
+ Examples of a group-attribute is:
+
+ Group001 I02029A
+ With this all IR-Codes starting with I02029A will match the Group001.
+
+
learncount
+ learncount is used to store the next button-code-number that needs to be learned.
+ By manually modifying this attribute new button sequences can be arranged.
+
+
learnprefix
+ learnprefix is a string which will be added to the button-attribute-name.
+ A button-attribute-name is constructed by:
+
+ Button<learnprefix><learncount>
+ If learnprefix is empty the button-attribute-name only contains the term
+ "Button" and the actual number of learncount.
+
+ EIB/KNX is a standard for building automation / home automation.
+ It is mainly based on a twisted pair wiring, but also other mediums (ip, wireless) are specified.
+
+ While the module TUL represents the connection to the EIB network,
+ the EIB modules represent individual EIB devices. This module provides a basic set of operations (on, off, on-till, etc.)
+ to switch on/off EIB devices. Sophisticated setups can be achieved by combining a number of
+ EIB module instances or by sending raw hex values to the network (set raw ).
+
+ EIB/KNX defines a series of Datapoint Type as standard data types used
+ to allow general interpretation of values of devices manufactured by diferent companies.
+ This datatypes are used to interpret the status of a device, so the state in FHEM will then
+ show the correct value.
+
+
+
+ Define an EIB device, connected via a TUL. The
+ <group> parameters are either a group name notation (0-15/0-15/0-255) or the hex representation of the value (0-f0-f0-ff).
+ The <main group> is used for sending of commands to the EIB network.
+ The state of the instance will be updated when a new state is received from the network for any of the given groups.
+ This is usefull for example for toggle switches where a on command is send to one group and the real state (on or off) is
+ responded back on a second group.
+
+ For actors and sensors the
+ autocreate module may help.
+
+ Example:
+
model
+ set the model according to the datapoint types defined by the (EIB / KNX specifications).
+ The device state in FHEM is interpreted and shown according to the specification.
+
+ Devices sold by numerous hardware verndors (e.g. Eltako, Peha, etc), using
+ the RF Protocol provided by the EnOcean Alliance.
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> EnOcean <ID>
+
+
+ Define an EnOcean device, connected via a TCM. The
+ <ID> parameter is an 8 digit hex number. For remotes and sensors the
+ autocreate module may help you.
+
+ Example:
+
+ define switch1 EnOcean ffc54500
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+
MD15 commands. Note: The command is not sent until the MD15
+ wakes up and sends a mesage, usually every 10 minutes.
+
+
actuator <value>
+ Set the actuator to the specifed percent value (0-100)
+
desired-temp <value>
+ Use the builtin PI regulator, and set the desired temperature to the
+ specified degree. The actual value will be taken from the temperature
+ reported by the MD15 or from the attribute actualTemp if it is set
+
unattended
+ Do not regulate the MD15.
+
+
+
subType dimmCtrl, tested with ElTako Dimmer only
+
+ where value is one of A0,AI,B0,BI,C0,CI,D0,DI, combinations of
+ these and released, in fact we are trying to emulate a PTM100 type remote.
+
+
+ If you define an eventMap attribute with on/off,
+ then you'll be able to easily set the device from the WEB frontend.
+ In order to control devices, you cannot reuse the ID's of other devices
+ (like remotes), instead you have to create your own, which must be in the
+ allowed ID-Range of the underlying IO device. For this first query the
+ TCM with the "get <tcm> idbase" command. You can use
+ up to 128 ID's starting with the base shown there. If you are using an
+ ID outside of the allowed range, you'll see an ERR_ID_RANGE message in the
+ fhem log.
+
+ Example:
+
+ set switch1 BI
+ set switch1 B0,CI
+ attr eventMap BI:on B0:off
+ set switch1 on
+
actualTemp
+ The value of the actual temperature, used when controlling MD15 devices.
+ Should by filled via a notify from a distinct temperature sensor. If
+ absent, the reported temperature from the MD15 is used.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Generated events:
+
+
switch. Switches (remotes) with more than one (pair) of buttons
+ are separate devices with separate address.
+
+
A0
+
AI
+
B0
+
BI
+
C0
+
CI
+
D0
+
DI
+
A0,BI
+
<BtnX,BtnY> where BtnX and BtnY is one of the above, e.g.
+ A0,BI or D0,CI
+
buttons:released
+
buttons: released
+
+
+
FSB61/FSM61 (set model to FSB61 or FSM61 manually)
+
+
released
+ The status of the device my become "released", this is not the case
+ for a normal switch.
+
+
+
windowHandle (HOPPE SecuSignal). Set the subType attr to windowHandle.
+
+
closed
+
open
+
tilted
+
open from tilted
+
+
keycard. Set the subType attr to keycard. (untested)
+
+
keycard inserted
+
keycard removed
+
+
STM-250 Door and window contact.
+
+
closed
+
open
+
learnBtn: on
+
+
SR04* (Temp sensor + Presence button and desired temp dial).
+ Set the
+ model attribute to one of SR04 SR04P SR04PT SR04PST SR04PMS or the
+ subType attribute to SR04.
+
MD15-FtL-HE (Heating/Valve-regulator)
+ The subType attibute must be MD15. This is done if the device was created by
+ autocreate.
+
+
$actuator %
+
currentValue: $actuator
+
serviceOn: [yes|no]
+
energyInput: [enabled|disabled]
+
energyStorage: [charged|empty]
+
battery: [ok|empty]
+
cover: [open|closed]
+
tempSensor: [failed|ok]
+
window: [open|closed]
+
actuator: [ok|obstructed]
+
temperature: $tmp
+
+
+
Ratio Presence Sensor Eagle PM101.
+ Set the model attribute to PM101
+
+
brightness: $lux
+
channel1: [on|off]
+
channel2: [on|off]
+
+
+
FAH60,FAH63,FIH63 brigthness senor.
+ Set subType to FAH or model to FAH60/FAH63/FIH63 manually.
+
+
brightness: $lux
+
state: $lux
+
+
+
FABH63,FBH55,FBH63,FIBH63 Motion/brightness sensor.
+ Set subType to FBH or model to FABH63/FBH55/FBH63/FIBH63 manually.
+
+
brightness: $lux
+
motion:[yes|no]
+
state: [motion: yes|no]
+
+
FTF55 Temperature sensor.
+ Set subType to FTF or model to FTF55 manually.
+
+
temperature: $temp
+
state: $temp
+
+
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/10_FS20.pm b/FHEM/10_FS20.pm
index 295988637..0e6d7fd4a 100755
--- a/FHEM/10_FS20.pm
+++ b/FHEM/10_FS20.pm
@@ -470,3 +470,241 @@ four2hex($$)
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
FS20
+
+ The FS20 protocol is used by a wide range of devices, which are either of
+ the sender/sensor category or the receiver/actuator category. The radio
+ (868.35 MHz) messages are either received through an FHZ
+ or an CUL device, so this must be defined first.
+
+
+
+ The values of housecode, button, fg, lm, and gm can be either defined as
+ hexadecimal value or as ELV-like "quad-decimal" value with digits 1-4. We
+ will reference this ELV-like notation as ELV4 later in this document. You
+ may even mix both hexadecimal and ELV4 notations, because FHEM can detect
+ the used notation automatically by counting the digits.
+
+
+
<housecode> is a 4 digit hex or 8 digit ELV4 number,
+ corresponding to the housecode address.
+
<button> is a 2 digit hex or 4 digit ELV4 number,
+ corresponding to a button of the transmitter.
+
The optional <fgaddr> specifies the function group.
+ It is a 2 digit hex or 4 digit ELV address. The first digit of the hex
+ address must be F or the first 2 digits of the ELV4 address must be
+ 44.
+
The optional <lmaddr> specifies the local
+ master. It is a 2 digit hex or 4 digit ELV address. The last digit of the
+ hex address must be F or the last 2 digits of the ELV4 address must be
+ 44.
+
The optional gm specifies the global master, the address must be FF if
+ defined as hex value or 4444 if defined as ELV4 value.
+ dim06% dim12% dim18% dim25% dim31% dim37% dim43% dim50%
+ dim56% dim62% dim68% dim75% dim81% dim87% dim93% dim100%
+ dimdown
+ dimup
+ dimupdown
+ off
+ off-for-timer
+ on # dimmer: set to value before switching it off
+ on-for-timer # see the note
+ on-old-for-timer # set to previous (before switching it on)
+ ramp-on-time # time to reach the desired dim value on dimmers
+ ramp-off-time # time to reach the off state on dimmers
+ reset
+ sendstate
+ timer
+ toggle # between off and previous dim val
+ on-till # Special, see the note
+
+ Examples:
+
+ set lamp on
+ set lamp1,lamp2,lamp3 on
+ set lamp1-lamp3 on
+ set lamp on-for-timer 12
+
+
+ Notes:
+
+
Use reset with care: the device forgets even the housecode.
+
+
As the FS20 protocol needs about 0.22 seconds to transmit a
+ sequence, a pause of 0.22 seconds is inserted after each command.
+
+
The FS20ST switches on for dim*%, dimup. It does not respond to
+ sendstate.
+
If the timer is set (i.e. it is not 0) then on, dim*,
+ and *-for-timer will take it into account (at least by the FS20ST).
+
+
The time argument ranges from 0.25sec to 4 hours and
+ 16 minutes.
+ As the time is encoded in one byte there are only 112 distinct
+ values, the resolution gets coarse with larger values. The program
+ will report the used timeout if the specified one cannot be set
+ exactly. The resolution is 0.25 sec from 0 to 4 sec, 0.5 sec from 4
+ to 8 sec, 1 sec from 8 to 16 sec and so on. If you need better
+ precision for large values, use at which has a 1
+ sec resolution.
+
on-till requires an absolute time in the "at" format (HH:MM:SS, HH:MM
+ or { <perl code> }, where the perl-code returns a time
+ specification).
+ If the current time is greater than the specified time, then the
+ command is ignored, else an "on" command is generated, and for the
+ given "till-time" an off command is scheduleld via the at command.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
N/A
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+
+
IODev
+ Set the IO or physical device which should be used for sending signals
+ for this "logical" device. An example for the physical device is an FHZ
+ or a CUL. Note: Upon startup fhem assigns each logical device
+ (FS20/HMS/KS300/etc) the last physical device which can receive data
+ for this type of device. The attribute IODev needs to be used only if
+ you attached more than one physical device capable of receiving signals
+ for this logical device.
+
+
+
eventMap
+ Replace event names and set arguments. The value of this attribute
+ consists of a list of space separated values, each value is a colon
+ separated pair. The first part specifies the "old" value, the second
+ the new/desired value. If the first character is slash(/) or komma(,)
+ then split not by space but by this character, enabling to embed spaces.
+ Examples:
+ attr store eventMap on:open off:closed
+ attr store eventMap /on-for-timer 10:open/off:closed/
+ set store open
+
dummy
+ Set the device attribute dummy to define devices which should not
+ output any radio signals. Associated notifys will be executed if
+ the signal is received. Used e.g. to react to a code from a sender, but
+ it will not emit radio signal if triggered in the web frontend.
+
+
+
+
follow-on-for-timer
+ schedule a "setstate off;trigger off" for the time specified as argument to
+ the on-for-timer command. Or the same with on, if the command is
+ off-for-timer.
+
+
+
+
follow-on-timer
+ Like with follow-on-for-timer schedule a "setstate off;trigger off", but
+ this time for the time specified as argument in seconds to this attribute.
+ This is used to follow the pre-programmed timer, which was set previously
+ with the timer command or manually by pressing the button on the device,
+ see your manual for details.
+
model
+ The model attribute denotes the model type of the device.
+ The attributes will (currently) not be used by the fhem.pl directly.
+ It can be used by e.g. external programs or web interfaces to
+ distinguish classes of devices and send the appropriate commands
+ (e.g. "on" or "off" to a fs20st, "dim..%" to fs20du etc.).
+ The spelling of the model names are as quoted on the printed
+ documentation which comes which each device. This name is used
+ without blanks in all lower-case letters. Valid characters should be
+ a-z 0-9 and - (dash),
+ other characters should be ommited. Here is a list of "official"
+ devices:
ignore
+ Ignore this device, e.g. if it belongs to your neighbour. The device
+ won't trigger any FileLogs/notifys, issued commands will silently
+ ignored (no RF signal will be sent out, just like for the dummy attribute). The device won't appear in the
+ list command (only if it is explicitely asked for it), nor will it
+ appear in commands which use some wildcard/attribute as name specifiers
+ (see devspec). You still get them with the
+ "ignored=1" special devspec.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Generated events:
+
+ From an FS20 device you can receive one of the following events.
+
on
+
off
+
toggle
+
dimdown
+
dimup
+
dimupdown
+
on-for-timer
+ Which event is sent is device dependent and can sometimes configured on
+ the device.
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/10_IT.pm b/FHEM/10_IT.pm
index a3ea881f7..f264d2fe6 100644
--- a/FHEM/10_IT.pm
+++ b/FHEM/10_IT.pm
@@ -304,3 +304,196 @@ IT_Parse($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
IT - InterTechno
+
+ The InterTechno 433MHZ protocol is used by a wide range of devices, which are either of
+ the sender/sensor category or the receiver/actuator category. As we right now are only
+ able to SEND InterTechno commands, but CAN'T receive them, this module at the moment
+ supports just devices like switches, dimmers, etc. through an CUL device, so this must be defined first.
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> IT <housecode> <on-code> <off-code>
+ [<dimup-code>] [<dimdown-code>]
+ or
+ define <name> IT <ITRotarySwitches|FLS100RotarySwitches>
+
+
+ The value of housecode is a 10-digit InterTechno Code, consisting of 0/1/F as it is
+ defined as a tri-state protocol. These digits depend on your device you are using.
+
+ Bit 11/12 are used for switching/dimming. As different manufacturers are using
+ different bit-codes you can specifiy here the 2-digit code for off/on/dimup/dimdown
+ in the same form: 0/1/F.
+
+ The value of ITRotarySwitches consist of the value of the alpha switch A-P and
+ the numeric switch 1-16 as set on the intertechno device. E.g. A1 or G12.
+
+ The value of FLS100RotarySwitches consist of the value of the I,II,II,IV switch
+ and the numeric 1,2,3,4 swicht. E.g. I2 or IV4.
+
+ The value of ITRotarySwitches and FLS100RotarySwitches is internaly translated
+ into a houscode value.
+
+
+
<housecode> is a 10 digit tri-state number (0/1/F) depending on
+ your device setting (see list below).
+
<on-code> is a 2 digit tri-state number for switching your device on;
+ It is appended to the housecode to build the 12-digits IT-Message.
+
<off-code> is a 2 digit tri-state number for switching your device off;
+ It is appended to the housecode to build the 12-digits IT-Message.
+
The optional <dimup-code> is a 2 digit tri-state number for dimming your device up;
+ It is appended to the housecode to build the 12-digits IT-Message.
+
The optional <dimdown-code> is a 2 digit tri-state number for dimming your device down;
+ It is appended to the housecode to build the 12-digits IT-Message.
+
+
+
+ Examples:
+
+ define lamp IT 01FF010101 11 00 01 10
+ define roll1 IT 111111111F 11 00 01 10
+ define otherlamp IT 000000000F 11 10 00 00
+ define otherroll1 IT FFFFFFF00F 11 10
+ define itswitch1 IT A1
+ define lamp IT J10
+ define flsswitch1 IT IV1
+ define lamp IT II2
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set <name> <value> [<time>]
+
+ where value is one of:
+
+ dimdown
+ dimup
+ off
+ on
+ on-till # Special, see the note
+
+ Examples:
+
+ set lamp on
+ set lamp1,lamp2,lamp3 on
+ set lamp1-lamp3 on
+ set lamp off
+
+
+ Notes:
+
+
on-till requires an absolute time in the "at" format (HH:MM:SS, HH:MM
+ or { <perl code> }, where the perl-code returns a time
+ specification).
+ If the current time is greater than the specified time, then the
+ command is ignored, else an "on" command is generated, and for the
+ given "till-time" an off command is scheduleld via the at command.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
N/A
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+
+
IODev
+ Set the IO or physical device which should be used for sending signals
+ for this "logical" device. An example for the physical device is a CUL.
+ Note: Upon startup fhem DOES NOT assigns an InterTechno device an
+ IODevice! The attribute IODev needs to be used AT ANY TIME!
+
+
+
eventMap
+ Replace event names and set arguments. The value of this attribute
+ consists of a list of space separated values, each value is a colon
+ separated pair. The first part specifies the "old" value, the second
+ the new/desired value. If the first character is slash(/) or komma(,)
+ then split not by space but by this character, enabling to embed spaces.
+ Examples:
+ attr store eventMap on:open off:closed
+ attr store eventMap /on-for-timer 10:open/off:closed/
+ set store open
+
dummy
+ Set the device attribute dummy to define devices which should not
+ output any radio signals. Associated notifys will be executed if
+ the signal is received. Used e.g. to react to a code from a sender, but
+ it will not emit radio signal if triggered in the web frontend.
+
model
+ The model attribute denotes the model type of the device.
+ The attributes will (currently) not be used by the fhem.pl directly.
+ It can be used by e.g. external programs or web interfaces to
+ distinguish classes of devices and send the appropriate commands
+ (e.g. "on" or "off" to a switch, "dim..%" to dimmers etc.).
+ The spelling of the model names are as quoted on the printed
+ documentation which comes which each device. This name is used
+ without blanks in all lower-case letters. Valid characters should be
+ a-z 0-9 and - (dash),
+ other characters should be ommited. Here is a list of "official"
+ devices:
+ Sender/Sensor: itremote
+
+ Dimmer: itdimmer
+
+ Receiver/Actor: itswitch
+
+
+
+
+
ignore
+ Ignore this device, e.g. if it belongs to your neighbour. The device
+ won't trigger any FileLogs/notifys, issued commands will silently
+ ignored (no RF signal will be sent out, just like for the dummy attribute). The device won't appear in the
+ list command (only if it is explicitely asked for it), nor will it
+ appear in commands which use some wildcard/attribute as name specifiers
+ (see devspec). You still get them with the
+ "ignored=1" special devspec.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Generated events:
+
+ From an IT device you can receive one of the following events.
+
on
+
off
+
dimdown
+
dimup
+ Which event is sent is device dependent and can sometimes configured on
+ the device.
+
+ This module is used to control ZWave devices via FHEM, see www.z-wave.com on details for this device family.
+ This module is a client of the ZWDongle module, which
+ is directly attached to the controller via USB or TCP/IP.
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> ZWave <homeId> <id> [classes]
+
+
+ <homeId> is the homeId of the controller node, and id is the id of the
+ slave node in the network of this controller.
+ classes is a hex-list of ZWave device classes. This argument is usually
+ specified by autocreate when creating a device. If you wish to manually
+ create a device, use the classes attribute instead, see below for details.
+ Defining a ZWave device the first time is usually done by autocreate.
+
+ Example:
+
+ define lamp ZWave 00ce2074 9
+ attr lamp classes SWITCH_BINARY BASIC MANUFACTURER_SPECIFIC VERSION SWITCH_ALL ASSOCIATION METER CONFIGURATION ALARM
+
+
+
+
+ Note: the sets/gets/generated events of a gven node depend on the classes
+ supported by this node. If a node supports 3 classes, then the union of
+ these sets/gets/events will be available for this node.
+ Commands for battery operated nodes will be queues internally, and sent when
+ the node sends a message. Answer to get commands appear then as events, the
+ corresponding readings will be updated.
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+
+ Class BASIC
+
basicValue value
+ Send value (0-255) to this device. The interpretation is device dependent,
+ e.g. for a SWITCH_BINARY device 0 is off and anything else is on.
+
+
Class SWITCH_BINARY
+
on
+ switch the device on
+
off
+ switch the device off
+
reportOn,reportOff
+ activate/deactivate the reporting of device state changes to the association group.
+
+
Class CONFIGURATION
+
configByte cfgAddress 8bitValue
+ configWord cfgAddress 16bitValue
+ configLong cfgAddress 32bitValue
+ Send a configuration value for the parameter cfgAddress. cfgAddress and
+ value is node specific.
+
configDefault cfgAddress
+ Reset the configuration parameter for the cfgAddress parameter to its default value.
+ See the device documentation to determine this value.
+
+
Class WAKE_UP
+
wakeupInterval value
+ Set the wakeup interval of battery operated devices to the given value in
+ seconds. Upon wakeup the device sends a wakeup notification.
+
+
Class ASSOCIATION
+
associationAdd groupId nodeId ...
+ Add the specified list of nodeIds to the assotion group groupId.
+ Note: upon creating a fhem-device for the first time fhem will automatically
+ add the controller to the first association group of the node corresponding
+ to the fhem device, i.e it issues a "set name associationAdd 1 controllerNodeId"
+
+
associationDel groupId nodeId ...
+ Remove the specified list of nodeIds from the assotion group groupId.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+
+ Class BASIC
+
basicStatus
+ return the status of the node as basicReport:XY. The value (XY) depends on
+ the node, e.g a SWITCH_BINARY device report 00 for off and FF (255) for on.
+
+
Class SWITCH_BINARY
+
swbStatus
+ return the status of the node, as state:on or state:off.
+
+
Class SENSOR_BINARY
+
sbStatus
+ return the status of the node, as state:open or state:closed.
+
+
Class CONFIGURATION
+
config cfgAddress
+ return the value of the configuration parameter cfgAddress. The value is
+ device specific.
+
+
Class ALARM
+
alarm alarmId
+ return the value for alarmId. The value is device specific.
+
+
Class BATTERY
+
battery
+ return the charge of the battery in %, as battery:value %
+
+
Class WAKE_UP
+
wakeupInterval
+ return the wakeup interval in seconds, in the form
+ wakeupReport:interval:seconds target:id
+
+
Class ASSOCIATION
+
association groupId
+ return the list of nodeIds in the association group groupId in the form:
+ assocGroup_X:Max:Y Nodes:id,id...
+
+
Class VERSION
+
version
+ return the version information of this node in the form:
+ Lib:A Prot:x.y App:a.b
+
+
classes
+ This attribute is needed by the ZWave module, as the list of the possible
+ set/get commands depends on it. It contains a space separated list of
+ class names (capital letters).
+
+ desired-temp
+ day-temp night-temp
+ report1 report2
+ refreshvalues
+ mode
+ holiday1 holiday2 # see mode holiday_short or holiday
+ manu-temp # No clue what it does.
+ year month day hour minute
+ time date
+ lowtemp-offset # Alarm-Temp.-Differenz
+ windowopen-temp
+ mon-from1 mon-to1 mon-from2 mon-to2
+ tue-from1 tue-to1 tue-from2 tue-to2
+ wed-from1 wed-to1 wed-from2 wed-to2
+ thu-from1 thu-to1 thu-from2 thu-to2
+ fri-from1 fri-to1 fri-from2 fri-to2
+ sat-from1 sat-to1 sat-from2 sat-to2
+ sun-from1 sun-to1 sun-from2 sun-to2
+
+
+ Examples:
+
+ set wz desired-temp 22.5
+ set fl desired-temp 20.5 day-temp 19.0 night-temp 16.0
+
+
+
+ Notes:
+
+
Following events are reported (more or less regularly) by each FHT
+ device: measured-temp actuator actuator1...actuator8
+ warnings
+ You can use these strings for notify or
+ FileLog definitions.
+
+
warnings can contain following strings:
+ none, Battery low,Temperature too low, Window open,
+ Fault on window sensor
+
+
actuator (without a suffix) stands for all actuators.
+
actuator or actuator1..8 can take following values:
+
+
<value>%
+ This is the normal case, the actuator is instructed to
+ open to this value.
+
offset <value>%
+ The actuator is running with this offset.
+
lime-protection
+ The actuator was instructed to execute the lime-protection
+ procedure.
+
synctime
+ If you select Sond/Sync on the FHT80B, you'll see a count
+ down.
+
test
+ The actuator was instructed by the FHT80b to emit a beep.
+
pair
+ The the FHT80b sent a "you-belong-to-me" to this actuator.
+
+
+
+
+
The FHT is very economical (or lazy), it accepts one message from the
+ FHZ1x00 every 115+x seconds, where x depends on the housecode. Don't
+ be surprised if your command is only accepted 10 minutes later by the
+ device. FHT commands are buffered in the FHZ1x00/CUL till they are
+ sent to the FHT, see the related fhtbuf entry in the
+ get section. You can send up to 8
+ commands in one message at once to the FHT if you specify them all as
+ arguments to the same set command, see the example above.
+
+
time sets hour and minute to local time
+
+
date sets year, month and date to local time
+
+
refreshvalues is an alias for report1 255 report2 255
+
+
All *-temp values need a temperature
+ as argument, which will be rounded to 0.5 Celsius.
+ Temperature values must between 5.5 and 30.5 Celsius. Value 5.5 sets
+ the actuator to OFF, value 30.5 set the actuator to ON
+
+
mode is one of auto, manual, holiday or
+ holiday_short.
+ If the mode is holiday, then the mode switches back to either auto or
+ manual at 00:00 of the day specified by the following:
+
+
holiday1 sets the end-day of the holiday
+
holiday2 sets the end-month of the holiday
+
+ For holiday_short (party mode)
+
+
holiday1 sets the absolute hour to switch back from this
+ mode (in 10-minute steps, max 144)
+
holiday2 sets the day of month to switch back from this mode
+ (can only be today or tomorrow, since holiday1 accepts only 24 hours).
+ Example:
+
+
current date is 29 Jan, time is 18:05
+
you want to switch to party mode until tomorrow 1:00
+
set holiday1 to 6 (6 x 10min = 1hour) and holiday2 to 30
+
+
+ The temperature for the holiday period is set by the desired-temperature
+ parameter. Note that you cannot set holiday mode for days earlier than the
+ day after tomorrow, for this you must use holiday_short.
+ Note also, you cannot set parameters seperately, you must set them in one command.
+ Example:
+
+ set FHT1 mode holiday holiday1 24 holiday2 12 desired-temp 14
+
+
+
+
The *-from1/*-from2/*-to1/*-to2 valuetypes need a time
+ spec as argument in the HH:MM format. They define the periods, where
+ the day-temp is valid. The minute (MM) will be rounded to 10, and
+ 24:00 means off.
+
+
+
To synchronize the FHT time and to "wake" muted FHTs it is adviseable
+ to schedule following command:
+ define fht_sync at +*3:30 set TYPE=FHT time
+
+
+
report1 with parameter 255 requests all settings for
+ monday till sunday to be sent. The argument is a bitfield, to request
+ unique values add up the following:
+
+
1: monday
+
2: tuesday
+
4: thursday
+
8: wednesday
+
16: friday
+
32: saturday
+
64: sunday
+
+ measured-temp and actuator is sent along if it is considered
+ appropriate
+ by the FHT.
+
+ Note: This command generates a lot of RF traffic, which can
+ lead to further problems, especially if the reception is not clear.
+
+
+
report2 with parameter 255 requests the following
+ settings to be reported: day-temp night-temp windowopen-temp
+ lowtemp-offset desired-temp measured-temp mode warnings.
+ The argument is (more or less) a bitfield, to request unique values
+ add up the following:
+
+
1: warnings
+
2: mode
+
4: day-temp, night-temp, windowopen-temp
+
64: lowtemp-offset
+
+ measured-temp and actuator is sent along if it is considered
+ appropriate
+
+ by the FHT.
+
+
+
lowtemp-offset needs a temperature as argument, valid
+ values must be between 1.0 and 5.0 Celsius. It will trigger a
+ warning if desired-temp - measured-temp >
+ lowtemp-offset in a room for at least 1.5 hours after the last
+ desired-temp change.
+
+
FHEM optionally has an internal software buffer for FHT devices.
+ This buffer should prevent transmission errors. If there is no
+ confirmation for a given period, FHEM resends the command. You can
+ see the queued commands with list
+ <fht-device>.
+ See the fhtsoftbuffer,
+ retrycount and
+ minfhtbuffer attributes for details.
+
+
+
If a buffer is still in the softbuffer, it will be sent in the
+ following order: desired-temp,mode,report1,report2,
+ holiday1,holiday2,day-temp,night-temp, [all other commands]
+
dummy
+ Note:It makes sense to define an FHT device even for an FHT8b,
+ else you will receive "unknown FHT device, please define one" message
+ for each FHT8b as the CUL is reporting the 8b valve messages. But you
+ should set the dummy attribute for these devices, else the internal FHT
+ buffer of the CUL will be filled with data for the 8b's which is never
+ consumed. If the buffer is full, you'll get "EOB" messages from the CUL,
+ and you cannot transmit any data to the 80b's
retrycount
+ If the fhtsoftbuffer attribute is set, then
+ resend commands retrycount times if after 240 seconds
+ no confirmation message is received from the corresponding FHT
+ device.
+ Default is 3.
+
+
+
minfhtbuffer
+ FHEM won't send commands to the FHZ if its fhtbuffer is below
+ this value, default is 0. If this value is low, then the ordering of
+ fht commands (see the note in the FHT section of set)
+ has little effect, as only commands in the softbuffer can be
+ prioritized. The maximum value should be 7 below the hardware maximum
+ (see fhtbuf).
+
+
+
+
lazy
+ If the lazy attribute is set, FHEM won't send commands to the FHT if
+ the current reading and the value to be set are already identical. This
+ may help avoiding conflicts with the max-1%-time-on-air rule in large
+ installations. Not set per default.
+
+
+
+
tmpcorr
+ Correct the temperature reported by the FHT by the value specified.
+ Note: only the measured-temp value reported by fhem (used for logging)
+ will be modified.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Generated events:
+
+
actuator
+
actuator1 actuator2 actuator3 actuator4
+ actuator5 actuator6 actuator7 actuator8
+ (sent if you configured an offset for the associated valve)
+
+ Fhem can directly control FHT8V type valves via a CUL
+ device without an intermediate FHT. This paragraph documents one of the
+ building blocks, the other is the PID device.
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> FHT <housecode> [IODev]
+
+
+ <housecode> is a four digit hex number,
+ and must have the following relation to the housecode of the corresponding CUL
+ device:
+
given the CUL housecode as AABB, then this housecode must be
+ of the form CCBB, where CC is greater or equal to AA, but less then AA+8.
+
+ This form is chosen so that the CUL can update all FHT8V valve states
+ within 2 minutes.
+
+
+ <IODev> must be specified if the last defined CUL device
+ is not the one to use. Usually this is done voa the IODev attribute, but as the address checked is performed
+ at the definition, we must use an exception here.
+
+
+ Examples:
+
+ define wz FHT8V 3232
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+
set <name> valve <value;>
+ Set the valve to the given value (in percent, from 0 to 100).
+
+
set <name> pair
+ Pair the valve with the CUL.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+
get <name> valve
+ Read back the valve position from the CUL FHT buffer, and convert it to percent (from 0 to 100).
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/12_HMS.pm b/FHEM/12_HMS.pm
index 1312f7064..60210a6c8 100755
--- a/FHEM/12_HMS.pm
+++ b/FHEM/12_HMS.pm
@@ -235,3 +235,83 @@ HMS_Parse($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
HMS
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> HMS <housecode>
+
+
+ <housecode> is a four digit hex number,
+ corresponding to the address of the HMS device.
+
+
+ Examples:
+
+ define temp HMS 1234
+
+ Notes:
+
+
There is _NO_ guarantee that the code will work as expected in all
+ circumstances, the authors are not liable for any damage occuring as a
+ result of incomplete or buggy code
+
+
Currently supported devices are the HMS100-T HMS100-TF HMS100-WD
+ HMS100-MG HMS100-TFK HMS100-CO HMS100-FIT RM100-2 RM100-3
+
+
The housecode of the HMS devices may change if the battery is renewed.
+ In order to make life easier, you can define a "wildcard" device for each
+ type of HMS device. First the real device-id will be checked, then the
+ wildcard device id. The wildcards are:
+
+
1000 for the HMS100-TF
+
1001 for the HMS100-T
+
1002 for the HMS100-WD
+
1003 for the RM100-2
+
1004 for the HMS100-TFK/li>
+
1006 for the HMS100-MG
+
1008 for the HMS100-CO
+
100e for the HMS100-FIT
+
+
+
+
Some battery low notifications are not yet implemented (RM100,
+ HMS100WD).
+
Please test your installation before relying on the
+ functionality.
model (hms100-t hms100-tf hms100-wd hms100-mg
+ hms100-co hms100-tfk hms100-fit rm100-2)
+
+
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/13_KS300.pm b/FHEM/13_KS300.pm
index 28054e8a1..96b18790b 100755
--- a/FHEM/13_KS300.pm
+++ b/FHEM/13_KS300.pm
@@ -332,3 +332,75 @@ KS300_Parse($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
KS300
+
+ Fhem can receive the KS300 radio (868.35 MHz) messages through FHZ, WS300 or an CUL
+ device, so one of them must be defined first.
+ This module services messages received by the FHZ device, if you use one of
+ the other alternetives, see the WS300 or CUL_WS entries.
+ Note: The KS555 is also reported to work.
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+
+ <housecode> is a four digit hex number,
+ corresponding to the address of the KS300 device, right now it is ignored.
+ The ml/raincounter defaults to 255 ml, but it must be specified if you wish
+ to set the wind factor, which defaults to 1.0.
+
+
+ Examples:
+
rainadjustment
+ If this attribute is set, fhem automatically accounts for rain counter
+ resets after a battery change and random counter switches as experienced
+ by some users. The raw rain counter values are adjusted by an offset
+ in order to flatten out the sudden large increases and decreases in
+ the received rain counter values. Default is off.
+
+
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/14_CUL_TX.pm b/FHEM/14_CUL_TX.pm
index a809fcfa1..5d8b8af48 100644
--- a/FHEM/14_CUL_TX.pm
+++ b/FHEM/14_CUL_TX.pm
@@ -143,3 +143,63 @@ CUL_TX_Parse($$)
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
CUL_TX
+
+ The CUL_TX module interprets TX2/TX3 type of messages received by the CUL,
+ see also http://www.f6fbb.org/domo/sensors/tx3_th.php.
+ This protocol is used by the La Crosse TX3-TH thermo/hygro sensor and other
+ wireless themperature sensors. Please report the manufacturer/model of other
+ working devices.
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> CUL_TX <code> [corr] [minsecs]
+
+
+ <code> is the code of the autogenerated address of the TX device (0
+ to 127)
+ corr is a correction factor, which will be added to the value received from
+ the device.
+ minsecs are the minimum seconds between two log entries or notifications
+ from this device. E.g. if set to 300, logs of the same type will occure
+ with a minimum rate of one per 5 minutes even if the device sends a message
+ every minute. (Reduces the log file size and reduces the time to display
+ the plots)
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/14_CUL_WS.pm b/FHEM/14_CUL_WS.pm
index f26146e1a..7a0819046 100755
--- a/FHEM/14_CUL_WS.pm
+++ b/FHEM/14_CUL_WS.pm
@@ -358,3 +358,48 @@ CUL_WS_Attr(@)
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
CUL_WS
+
+ The CUL_WS module interprets S300 type of messages received by the CUL.
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> CUL_WS <code> [corr1...corr4]
+
+ <code> is the code which must be set on the S300 device. Valid values
+ are 1 through 8.
+ corr1..corr4 are up to 4 numerical correction factors, which will be added
+ to the respective value to calibrate the device. Note: rain-values will be
+ multiplied and not added to the correction factor.
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/15_CUL_EM.pm b/FHEM/15_CUL_EM.pm
index e3e56410a..75dea8290 100755
--- a/FHEM/15_CUL_EM.pm
+++ b/FHEM/15_CUL_EM.pm
@@ -250,3 +250,77 @@ CUL_EM_Parse($$)
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
CUL_EM
+
+ The CUL_EM module interprets EM type of messages received by the CUL, notably
+ from EMEM, EMWZ or EMGZ devices.
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> CUL_EM <code> [corr1 corr2
+ CostPerUnit BasicFeePerMonth]
+
+ <code> is the code which must be set on the EM device. Valid values
+ are 1 through 12. 1-4 denotes EMWZ, 5-8 EMEM and 9-12 EMGZ devices.
+
+ corr1 is used to correct the current number, corr2
+ for the total number.
+
+
for EMWZ devices you should specify the rotation speed (R/kW)
+ of your watt-meter (e.g. 150) for corr1 and 12 times this value for
+ corr2
+
for EMEM devices the corr1 value is 0.01, and the corr2 value is
+ 0.001
+
+
+
+ CostPerUnit and BasicFeePerMonth are used to compute your
+ daily and mothly fees. Your COST will appear in the log, generated once
+ daiy (without the basic fee) or month (with the bassic fee included). Your
+ definition should look like E.g.:
+
+
+ Tipp: You can configure your EMWZ device to show in the CUM column of the
+ STATE reading the current reading of your meter. For this purpose: multiply
+ the current reading (from the real device) with the corr1 value (RperKW),
+ and substract the RAW CUM value from it. Now set the basis reading of your
+ EMWZ device (named emwz) to this value.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+ The CUL_RFR module is used to "attach" a second CUL to your base CUL, and
+ use it as a repeater / range extender. RFR is shorthand for RF_ROUTER.
+ Transmission of the data uses the CC1101 packet capabilities with GFSK
+ modulation at 250kBaud after pinging the base CUL at the usual 1kBaud. When
+ configured, the RFR device can be used like another CUL connected directly to
+ fhem.
+
+
+
+ Before you can use this feature in fhem, you have to enable/configure RF
+ ROUTING in both CUL's:
+
+
First give your base CUL (which remains connected to the PC) an RFR ID
+ by issuing the fhem command "set MyCUL raw ui0100". With this command
+ the base CUL will get the ID 01, and it will not relay messages to other
+ CUL's (as the second number is 00).
+
Now replace the base CUL with the RFR CUL, and set its id by issuing
+ the fhem command "set MyCUL raw ui0201". Now remove this CUL and attach the
+ original, base CUL again. The RFR CUL got the id 02, and will relay every
+ message to the base CUL with id 01.
+
Take the RFR CUL, and attach it to an USB power supply, as seen on
+ the image. As the configured base id is not 00, it will activate RF
+ reception on boot, and will start sending messages to the base CUL.
+
Now you have to define this RFR cul as a fhem device:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> CUL_RFR <own-id> <base-id>
+
+ <own-id> is the id of the RFR CUL not connected to the PC,
+ <base-id> is the id of the CUL connected to the PC. Both parameters
+ have two characters, each representing a one byte hex number.
+ Example:
+
+ set MyCUL raw ui0100
+ # Now replace the base CUL with the RFR CUL
+ set MyCUL raw ui0201
+ # Reattach the base CUL to the PC and attach the RFR CUL to a
+ USB power supply
+ define MyRFR CUL_RFR 02 01
+
+ The rest of the attributes is the same as for the CUL.
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/17_SIS_PMS.pm b/FHEM/17_SIS_PMS.pm
index 01a30982a..0c49b68a1 100755
--- a/FHEM/17_SIS_PMS.pm
+++ b/FHEM/17_SIS_PMS.pm
@@ -266,3 +266,97 @@ SIS_PMS_Set($@)
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
+
SIS_PMS
+
+ This module is responsible for handling the actual sockets (power on,
+ power off, toggle) on a "Silver Shield Power Manager", see SISPM
+ for how to define access to one (SIS_PMS stands for "Silver Shield Power Manager Socket").
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> SIS_PMS <serial> <socket>
+
+
+ To securely distinguish multiple attached Power Manager devices, the
+ serial number of those is used. You get these with "sispmctl -s" - or
+ just let autocreate define the sockets attached for you.
+
+
+
<serial> is the serial number of the Power Manager device, see above.
+
<socket> is a number between 1 and 4 (for a 4 socket model)
+ off
+ on
+ toggle
+ on-till # Special, see the note
+ off-till # Special, see the note
+
+ Examples:
+
+ set lamp on
+ set lamp1,lamp2,lamp3 on
+ set lamp1-lamp3 on
+ set hql_lamp on-till 18:45
+
+
+ Notes:
+
+
As an external program is used, a noticeable delay may occur.
+
*-till requires an absolute time in the "at" format (HH:MM:SS, HH:MM
+ or { <perl code> }, where the perl-code returns a time
+ specification).
+ If the current time is greater than the specified time, then the
+ command is ignored, else an "on" or "off" command, respectively, is
+ generated, and for the given time an "off"/"on" command is
+ scheduleld via the at command.
dummy
+ Set the device attribute dummy to define devices which should not
+ output any signals. Associated notifys will be executed if the signal
+ is received. Used e.g. to react to a code from a sender, but it will
+ not actually switch if triggered in the web frontend.
+
+ The CUL_HOERMANN module registers the 868MHz Hoermann Garage-Door-Opener
+ signals received by the CUL. Note: As the structure of this signal is
+ not understood, no checksum is verified, so it is likely to receive bogus
+ messages.
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/20_OWFS.pm b/FHEM/20_OWFS.pm
index 1e4f38b81..9812ba3aa 100644
--- a/FHEM/20_OWFS.pm
+++ b/FHEM/20_OWFS.pm
@@ -218,3 +218,149 @@ OWFS_Undef($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
OWFS
+
+ OWFS is a suite of programs that designed to make the 1-wire bus and its
+ devices easily accessible. The underlying priciple is to create a virtual
+ filesystem, with the unique ID being the directory, and the individual
+ properties of the device are represented as simple files that can be read
+ and written.
+ where value is one of (not supported by passive Devices e.g. DS9097):
+
+
+ address (read-only)
+ The entire 64-bit unique ID. address starts with the family code.
+ Given as upper case hexidecimal digits (0-9A-F).
+
+
+ crc8 (read-only)
+ The 8-bit error correction portion. Uses cyclic redundancy check. Computed
+ from the preceeding 56 bits of the unique ID number.
+ Given as upper case hexidecimal digits (0-9A-F).
+
+
+ family (read-only)
+ The 8-bit family code. Unique to each type of device.
+ Given as upper case hexidecimal digits (0-9A-F).
+
+
+ id (read-only)
+ The 48-bit middle portion of the unique ID number. Does not include the
+ family code or CRC.
+ Given as upper case hexidecimal digits (0-9A-F).
+
+
+ locator (read-only)
+ Uses an extension of the 1-wire design from iButtonLink company that
+ associated 1-wire physical connections with a unique 1-wire code. If
+ the connection is behind a Link Locator the locator will show a unique
+ 8-byte number (16 character hexidecimal) starting with family code FE.
+ If no Link Locator is between the device and the master, the locator
+ field will be all FF.
+
+
+ present (read-only)
+ Is the device currently present on the 1-wire bus?
+
+
+ type (read-only)
+ Part name assigned by Dallas Semi. E.g. DS2401 Alternative packaging
+ (iButton vs chip) will not be distiguished.
+
+
+
+ Examples:
+
+ get DS9490R type
+ DS9490R type => DS1420
+ get DS9490R address
+ DS9490R address => 8193302D0000002B
+
+
+ Defines an X10 device via its model, housecode and unitcode.
+
+ Notes:
+
+
<model> is one of
+
+
lm12: lamp module, dimmable
+
lm15: lamp module, not dimmable
+
am12: appliance module, not dimmable
+
tm12: tranceiver module, not dimmable. Its
+ unitcode is 1.
+
+ Model determines whether a dim command is reasonable to be sent
+ or not.
+
<housecode> ranges from A to P.
+
<unitcode> ranges from 1 to 16.
+
+
+
+ Examples:
+
+ define lamp1 X10 lm12 N 10
+ define pump X10 am12 B 7
+ define lamp2 X10 lm15 N 11
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set <name> <value> [<argument>]
+
+ where value is one of:
+
+ dimdown # requires argument, see the note
+ dimup # requires argument, see the note
+ off
+ on
+ on-till # Special, see the note
+ on-for-timer # Special, see the note
+
+ Examples:
+
+ set lamp1 dimup 10
+ set lamp1,lamp2 off
+ set pump off
+ set lamp2 on-till 19:59
+ set lamp2 on-for-timer 00:02:30
+
+
+ Notes:
+
+
Only switching and dimming are supported by now.
+
Dimming is valid only for a dimmable device as specified by
+ the model argument in its define
+ statement.
+
An X10 device has 210 discrete brightness levels. If you use a
+ X10 sender, e.g. a remote control or a wall switch to dim, a
+ brightness step is 100%/210.
+
dimdown and dimup take a number in the
+ range from 0 to 22 as argument. It is assumed that argument 1 is
+ a 1% brightness change (microdim) and arguments 2 to 22 are
+ 10%..100% brightness changes. The meaning of argument 0 is
+ unclear.
+
This currently leads to some confusion in the logs as the
+ dimdown and dimup codes are logged with
+ different meaning of the arguments depending on whether the commands
+ were sent from the PC or from a remote control or a wall switch.
+
dimdown and dimup from on and off states may
+ have unexpected results. This seems to be a feature of the X10
+ devices.
+
on-till requires an absolute time in the "at" format
+ (HH:MM:SS, HH:MM) or { <perl code> }, where the perl code
+ returns a time specification).
+ If the current time is greater than the specified time, then the
+ command is ignored, else an "on" command is generated, and for the
+ given "till-time" an off command is scheduleld via the at command.
+
+
on-for-timer requires a relative time in the "at" format
+ (HH:MM:SS, HH:MM) or { <perl code> }, where the perl code
+ returns a time specification).
+
attr <name> stateAL0
+ <string>
+ character string for denoting low normal condition, default is green down
+ triangle, e.g. the code <span
+ style="color:green">▾</span> leading to the sign ▾
+
+
attr <name> stateAH0
+ <string>
+ character string for denoting high alarm condition, default is green
+ upward triangle, e.g. the code <span
+ style="color:green">▴</span> leading to the sign ▴
+
+
attr <name> stateAL1
+ <string>
+ character string for denoting low alarm condition, default is red down
+ triangle, e.g. the code <span style="color:red">▾</span>
+ leading to the sign ▾
+
attr <name> stateAH1
+ <string>
+ character string for denoting high alarm condition, default is red upward
+ triangle, e.g. the code <span style="color:red">▴</span>
+ leading to the sign ▴
+
+
For each of the following attributes, the channel identification A,B,C,D may be
+ used.
attr <name> event on-change|on-update
+ This attribte work similarly, but not identically to the standard event-on-update-change/event-on-update-reading attribute.
+
event on-update (default) will write a notify/FileLog event any time a measurement is received.
+
event on-change will write a notify/FileLog event only when a measurement is different from the previous one.
attr <name> event on-change|on-update
+ This attribte work similarly, but not identically to the standard event-on-update-change/event-on-update-reading attribute.
+
event on-update (default) will write a notify/FileLog event any time a measurement is received.
+
event on-change will write a notify/FileLog event only when a measurement is different from the previous one.
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/21_OWID.pm b/FHEM/21_OWID.pm
index 45c6c9135..78f33f94c 100644
--- a/FHEM/21_OWID.pm
+++ b/FHEM/21_OWID.pm
@@ -210,3 +210,44 @@ sub OWID_Undef ($) {
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
OWID
+
FHEM module for 1-Wire devices that know only their unique ROM ID
+ Note: This 1-Wire module so far works only with the OWX interface module.
+ Please define an OWX device first.
+ Example
+
+ define ROM1 OWX_ID OWCOUNT CE780F000000
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> OWID <id>
+
Define a 1-Wire device.
+
+ <id>
+ 12-character unique ROM id of the converter device without family id and
+ CRC code
+ [<model>] Defines the sensor model (and thus
+ 1-Wire family id), currently the following values are permitted:
+
model DS2438 with family id 26 (default if the model parameter is
+ omitted). Measured is a temperature value, an external voltage and the current supply voltage
+
+
+
+ <id>
+ 12-character unique ROM id of the converter device without family id and
+ CRC code
+
+ <interval>
+ Measurement interval in seconds. The default is 300 seconds.
attr <name> event on-change|on-update
+ This attribte work similarly, but not identically to the standard event-on-update-change/event-on-update-reading attribute.
+
event on-update (default) will write a notify/FileLog event any time a measurement is received.
+
event on-change will write a notify/FileLog event only when a measurement is different from the previous one.
+ get <name> input <channel-name>
+ state for channel (A,B, ... or defined channel name)
+ This value reflects the measured value, not necessarily the one set as
+ output state, because the output transistors are open collector switches. A measured
+ state of 1 = OFF therefore corresponds to an output state of 1 = OFF, but a measured
+ state of 0 = ON can also be due to an external shortening of the output.
attr <name> event on-change|on-update
+ This attribte work similarly, but not identically to the standard event-on-update-change/event-on-update-reading attribute.
+
event on-update (default) will write a notify/FileLog event any time a measurement is received.
+
event on-change will write a notify/FileLog event only when a measurement is different from the previous one.
+ temperature (read-only)
+ Read by the chip at high resolution (~12 bits). Units are selected from
+ the defined OWFS Device. See temp-scale for choices.
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/21_OWTHERM.pm b/FHEM/21_OWTHERM.pm
index 0e6d518fc..b8d3d9137 100755
--- a/FHEM/21_OWTHERM.pm
+++ b/FHEM/21_OWTHERM.pm
@@ -818,3 +818,126 @@ sub OWXTHERM_SetValues($@) {
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
OWTHERM
+
FHEM module to commmunicate with 1-Wire bus digital thermometer devices
+ Note: This is the only 1-Wire module which so far works with both the OWFS and the
+ OWX interface module. Please define an OWFS device or an OWX device first.
+ Example
+
attr <name> stateAL <string>
+
+ character string for denoting low alarm condition, default is red down
+ triangle, e.g. the code <span style="color:red">▾</span>
+ leading to the sign ▾
+
+
attr <name> stateAH <string>
+
+ character string for denoting high alarm condition, default is red upward
+ triangle, e.g. the code <span style="color:red">▴</span>
+ leading to the sign ▴
+
attr <name> event on-change|on-update
+ This attribte work similarly, but not identically to the standard event-on-update-change/event-on-update-reading attribute.
+
event on-update (default) will write a notify/FileLog event any time a measurement is received.
+
event on-change will write a notify/FileLog event only when a measurement is different from the previous one.
+ Defines an Allnet 4027 device (Box with 8 relays) connected to an ALL4000 via its ip address. The status of the device is also pooled (delay interval), because someone else is able to change the state via the webinterface of the device.
+
+
+ Examples:
+
+ define lamp1 ALL4027 192.168.8.200 0 7 60
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set <name> <value>
+
+ where value is one of:
+
+ off
+ on
+ on-for-timer <Seconds>
+ toggle
+
+ Examples:
+
+ set poolpump on
+
+
+ Notes:
+
+
Toggle is special implemented. List name returns "on" or "off" even after a toggle command
+ Defines an Web-IO-Digital device (Box with up to 12 digital in/outputs, www.wut.de) via ip address. The status of the device is also pooled (delay interval).
+ Note: this module needs the HTTP::Request and LWP::UserAgent perl modules.
+
+ Please also note: the PDU must use firmware 3.1 or later and set to unencrypted mode.
+
+ Defines a switching device, where sockets can be switched
+
+
+
separately (just use 0-4 as socket number)
+
all together (use 1234 as socket number)
+
in arbitrary groups (e.g 13 switches socket 1 and 3, 42
+ switches socket 2 and 4, etc...), invalid numbers are
+ ignored
+
+
+ User name and password are optional. When no user name or
+ password is passed, the module looks for a configfile at
+ '/var/log/fhem/netio.conf'. If no config file is found, it
+ uses 'admin/admin' as user/pass, since this is the default
+ configuration for the device.
+
+ Alternatively you can pass a path to a configfile instead of
+ the user/pass combo. (e.g. /var/tmp/tmp.conf)
+ Configfile-Format:
+
+ This module is for the old RFXCOM USB or LAN based 433 Mhz RF receivers and transmitters (order order code 80002 and others). It does not support the new RFXtrx433 transmitter because it uses a different protocol. See RFXTRX for support of the RFXtrx433 transmitter.
+These receivers supports many protocols like Oregon Scientific weather sensors, RFXMeter devices, X10 security and lighting devices and others.
+ Currently the following parser modules are implemented:
+
+
41_OREGON.pm (see device OREGON): Process messages Oregon Scientific weather sensors.
+ See http://www.rfxcom.com/oregon.htm of
+ Oregon Scientific weather sensors that could be received by the RFXCOM receivers.
+ Until now the following Oregon Scientific weather sensors have been tested successfully: BTHR918, BTHR918N, PCR800, RGR918, THGR228N, THGR810, THR128, THWR288A, WTGR800, WGR918. It will probably work with many other Oregon sensors supported by RFXCOM receivers. Please give feedback if you use other sensors.
+
43_RFXX10REC.pm (see device RFXX10REC): Process X10 security and X10 lighting devices.
+
+
+ Note: this module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module
+ if the devices is connected via USB or a serial port.
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> RFXCOM <device> [noinit]
+
+
+ USB-connected (80002):
+ <device> specifies the USB port to communicate with the RFXCOM receiver.
+ Normally on Linux the device will be named /dev/ttyUSBx, where x is a number.
+ For example /dev/ttyUSB0.
+
+ Example:
+ define RFXCOMUSB RFXCOM /dev/ttyUSB0
+
+
+
+ Network-connected devices:
+
+ <device> specifies the host:port of the device. E.g.
+ 192.168.1.5:10001
+
+
+ noninit is optional and issues that the RFXCOM device should not be
+ initialized. This is useful if you share a RFXCOM device. It is also useful
+ for testing to simulate a RFXCOM receiver via netcat or via FHEM2FHEM.
+
+
+ Example:
+ define RFXCOMTCP RFXCOM 192.168.1.5:10001
+
+ define RFXCOMTCP2 RFXCOM 192.168.1.121:10001 noinit
+
+
longids
+ Comma separated list of device-types for RFXCOM that should be handled using long IDs. This additional ID is a one byte hex string and is generated by the Oregon sensor when is it powered on. The value seems to be randomly generated. This has the advantage that you may use more than one Oregon sensor of the same type even if it has no switch to set a sensor id. For example the author uses two BTHR918N sensors at the same time. All have different deviceids. The drawback is that the deviceid changes after changing batteries. All devices listed as longids will get an additional one byte hex string appended to the device name.
+Default is to use long IDs for all devices.
+
+ Examples:
+# Do not use any long IDs for any devices:
+attr RFXCOMUSB longids 0
+# Use any long IDs for all devices (this is default):
+attr RFXCOMUSB longids 1
+# Use longids for BTHR918N devices.
+# Will generate devices names like BTHR918N_f3.
+attr RFXCOMUSB longids BTHR918N
+# Use longids for TX3_T and TX3_H devices.
+# Will generate devices names like TX3_T_07, TX3_T_01 ,TX3_H_07.
+attr RFXCOMUSB longids TX3_T,TX3_H
+
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/41_OREGON.pm b/FHEM/41_OREGON.pm
index c65dcd822..15aff37d9 100755
--- a/FHEM/41_OREGON.pm
+++ b/FHEM/41_OREGON.pm
@@ -1073,3 +1073,47 @@ OREGON_Parse($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
OREGON
+
+ The OREGON module interprets Oregon sensor messages received by a RFXCOM receiver. You need to define a RFXCOM receiver first.
+ See RFXCOM.
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> OREGON <deviceid>
+
+ <deviceid> is the device identifier of the Oregon sensor. It consists of the sensors name and a one byte hex string (00-ff) that identifies the sensor. The define statement with the deviceid is generated automatically by autocreate. The following sensor names are used:
+BTHR918, BTHR918N, PCR800 RGR918, RTGR328N, THN132N, THGR228N, THGR328N, THGR918, THR128, THWR288A, THGR810, UV138, UVN800, WGR918, WGR800, WTGR800_A, WTGR800_T.
+
+The one byte hex string is generated by the Oregon sensor when is it powered on. The value seems to be randomly generated. This has the advantage that you may use more than one Oregon sensor of the same type even if it has no switch to set a sensor id. For exampple the author uses three BTHR918 sensors at the same time. All have different deviceids. The drawback is that the deviceid changes after changing batteries.
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/42_RFXMETER.pm b/FHEM/42_RFXMETER.pm
index 6eff5628e..7c7f420a4 100755
--- a/FHEM/42_RFXMETER.pm
+++ b/FHEM/42_RFXMETER.pm
@@ -247,3 +247,52 @@ RFXMETER_Parse($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
RFXMETER
+
+ The RFXMETER module interprets RFXCOM RFXMeter messages received by a RFXCOM receiver. You need to define an RFXCOM receiver first.
+ See the RFXCOM.
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> RFXMETER <deviceid> [<scalefactor>] [<unitname>]
+
+ <deviceid> is the device identifier of the RFXMeter sensor and is a one byte hexstring (00-ff).
+
+ <scalefactor> is an optional scaling factor. It is multiplied to the value that is received from the RFXmeter sensor.
+
+ <unitname> is an optional string that describes the value units. It is added to the Reading generated to describe the values.
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/43_RFXX10REC.pm b/FHEM/43_RFXX10REC.pm
index 09c814656..91ed59091 100755
--- a/FHEM/43_RFXX10REC.pm
+++ b/FHEM/43_RFXX10REC.pm
@@ -565,3 +565,86 @@ RFXX10REC_Parse($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
RFXX10REC
+
+ The RFXX10REC module interprets X10 security and X10 lighting messages received by a RFXCOM RF receiver. Reported also to work with KlikAanKlikUit. You need to define an RFXCOM receiver first.
+ See RFXCOM.
+
+
+ specifies the type of the X10 device:
+ X10 security devices:
+
+
ds10a (X10 security ds10a Door/Window Sensor or compatible devices. This device type reports the status of the switch [Open/Closed], status of the delay switch [min|max]], and battery status [ok|low].)
+
ms10a (X10 security ms10a motion sensor. This device type reports the status of motion sensor [normal|alert] and battery status [ok|low].))
+
sd90 (Marmitek sd90 smoke detector. This device type reports the status of the smoke detector [normal|alert] and battery status [ok|low].)
+
kr18 (X10 security remote control. Report the Reading "Security" with values [Arm|Disarm], "ButtonA" and "ButtonB" with values [on|off] )
+
+ X10 lighting devices:
+
+
ms14a (X10 motion sensor. Reports [normal|alert] on the first deviceid (motion sensor) and [on|off] for the second deviceid (light sensor))
+
x10 (All other x10 devices. Report [on|off] on both deviceids.)
+
+
+
+ <deviceid>
+
+ specifies the first device id of the device. X10 security have a a 16-Bit device id which has to be written as a hex-string (example "5a54").
+ A X10 lighting device has a house code A..P followed by a unitcode 1..16 (example "B1").
+
+
+ <devicelog>
+
+ is the name of the Reading used to report. Suggested: "Window" or "Door" for ds10a, "motion" for motion sensors, "Smoke" for sd90.
+
+
+ <deviceid2>
+
+ is optional and specifies the second device id of the device if it exists. For example sd90 smoke sensors can be configured to report two device ids. ms14a motion sensors report motion status on the first deviceid and the status of the light sensor on the second deviceid.
+
+
+ <devicelog2>
+
+ is optional for the name used for the Reading of <deviceid2>.
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/45_TRX.pm b/FHEM/45_TRX.pm
index 82f3cbc76..e0ddd282f 100755
--- a/FHEM/45_TRX.pm
+++ b/FHEM/45_TRX.pm
@@ -405,3 +405,94 @@ TRX_Ready($)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
TRX
+
+
+
+ This module is for the RFXCOM RFXtrx433 USB based 433 Mhz RF transmitters.
+This USB based transmitter is able to receive and transmit many protocols like Oregon Scientific weather sensors, X10 security and lighting devices, ARC ((address code wheels) HomeEasy, KlikAanKlikUit, ByeByeStandBy, Intertechno, ELRO,
+AB600, Duewi, DomiaLite, COCO) and others.
+ Currently the following parser modules are implemented:
+
+
46_TRX_WEATHER.pm (see device TRX): Process messages Oregon Scientific weather sensors.
+ See http://www.rfxcom.com/oregon.htm for a list of
+ Oregon Scientific weather sensors that could be received by the RFXtrx433 tranmitter.
+ Until now the following Oregon Scientific weather sensors have been tested successfully: BTHR918, BTHR918N, PCR800, RGR918, THGR228N, THGR810, THR128, THWR288A, WTGR800, WGR918. It will also work with many other Oregon sensors supported by RFXtrx433. Please give feedback if you use other sensors.
+
+
46_TRX_SECURITY.pm (see device TRX_SECURITY): Receive X10, KD101 and Visonic security sensors.
+
46_TRX_LIGHT.pm (see device RFXX10REC): Process X10, ARC, ELRO AB400D, Waveman, Chacon EMW200, IMPULS, RisingSun, Philips SBC, AC, HomeEasy EU and ANSLUT lighting devices (switches and remote control). ARC is a protocol used by devices from HomeEasy, KlikAanKlikUit, ByeByeStandBy, Intertechno, ELRO, AB600, Duewi, DomiaLite and COCO with address code wheels. AC is the protocol used by different brands with units having a learning mode button:
+KlikAanKlikUit, NEXA, CHACON, HomeEasy UK.
+
+
+ Note: this module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module
+ if the devices is connected via USB or a serial port.
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> TRX <device> [noinit]
+
+
+ USB-connected:
+ <device> specifies the USB port to communicate with the RFXtrx433 receiver.
+ Normally on Linux the device will be named /dev/ttyUSBx, where x is a number.
+ For example /dev/ttyUSB0. Please note that RFXtrx433 normally operates at 38400 baud. You may specify the baudrate used after the @ char.
+
+ Example:
+ define RFXTRXUSB TRX /dev/ttyUSB0@38400
+
+
+
+ Network-connected devices:
+
+ <device> specifies the host:port of the device. E.g.
+ 192.168.1.5:10001
+
+
+ noninit is optional and issues that the RFXtrx433 device should not be
+ initialized. This is useful if you share a RFXtrx433 device via LAN. It is
+ also useful for testing to simulate a RFXtrx433 receiver via netcat or via
+ FHEM2FHEM.
+
+
+
+ Example:
+ define RFXTRXTCP TRX 192.168.1.5:10001
+
+ define RFXTRXTCP2 TRX 192.168.1.121:10001 noinit
+
+
longids
+ Comma separated list of device-types for TRX_WEATHER that should be handled using long IDs. This additional ID is a one byte hex string and is generated by the Oregon sensor when is it powered on. The value seems to be randomly generated. This has the advantage that you may use more than one Oregon sensor of the same type even if it has no switch to set a sensor id. For example the author uses two BTHR918N sensors at the same time. All have different deviceids. The drawback is that the deviceid changes after changing batteries. All devices listed as longids will get an additional one byte hex string appended to the device name.
+Default is to use no long IDs.
+
+ Examples:
+# Do not use any long IDs for any devices (this is default):
+attr RFXCOMUSB longids 0
+# Use long IDs for all devices:
+attr RFXCOMUSB longids 1
+# Use longids for BTHR918N devices.
+# Will generate devices names like BTHR918N_f3.
+attr RFXTRXUSB longids BTHR918N
+# Use longids for TX3_T and TX3_H devices.
+# Will generate devices names like TX3_T_07, TX3_T_01 ,TX3_H_07.
+attr RFXTRXUSB longids TX3_T,TX3_H
+
+
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/46_TRX_LIGHT.pm b/FHEM/46_TRX_LIGHT.pm
index 2d99760f2..6d58ba24e 100755
--- a/FHEM/46_TRX_LIGHT.pm
+++ b/FHEM/46_TRX_LIGHT.pm
@@ -551,3 +551,112 @@ TRX_LIGHT_Parse($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
TRX_LIGHT
+
+ The TRX_LIGHT module receives and sends X10, ARC, ELRO AB400D, Waveman, Chacon EMW200, IMPULS, RisingSun, AC, HomeEasy EU and ANSLUT lighting devices (switches and remote control). Allows to send Philips SBC (receive not possible). ARC is a protocol used by devices from HomeEasy, KlikAanKlikUit, ByeByeStandBy, Intertechno, ELRO, AB600, Duewi, DomiaLite and COCO with address code wheels. AC is the protocol used by different brands with units having a learning mode button:
+KlikAanKlikUit, NEXA, CHACON, HomeEasy UK. You need to define an RFXtrx433 transceiver receiver first.
+ See TRX.
+
+
+ specifies the type of the device:
+ X10 lighting devices:
+
+
MS14A (X10 motion sensor. Reports [normal|alert] on the first deviceid (motion sensor) and [on|off] for the second deviceid (light sensor))
+
X10 (All other x10 devices. Report [off|on|dim|bright|all_off|all_on] on both deviceids.)
+
ARC (ARC devices. ARC is a protocol used by devices from HomeEasy, KlikAanKlikUit, ByeByeStandBy, Intertechno, ELRO, AB600, Duewi, DomiaLite and COCO with address code wheels. Report [off|on|all_off|all_on|chime].)
AC (AC devices. AC is the protocol used by different brands with units having a learning mode button: KlikAanKlikUit, NEXA, CHACON, HomeEasy UK. Report [off|on|level <NUM>|all_off|all_on|all_level <NUM>].)
+
HOMEEASY (HomeEasy EU devices. Report [off|on|level|all_off|all_on|all_level].)
+ specifies the first device id of the device.
+ A lighting device normally has a house code A..P followed by a unitcode 1..16 (example "B1").
+ For AC, HomeEasy EU and ANSLUT it is a 10 Character-Hex-String for the deviceid, consisting of
+ - unid-id: 8-Char-Hex: 00000001 to 03FFFFFF
+ - unit-code: 2-Char-Hex: 01 to 10
+
+
+ <devicelog>
+
+ is the name of the Reading used to report. Suggested: "motion" for motion sensors.
+
+
+ <deviceid2>
+
+ is optional and specifies the second device id of the device if it exists. For example ms14a motion sensors report motion status on the first deviceid and the status of the light sensor on the second deviceid.
+
+
+ <devicelog2>
+
+ is optional for the name used for the Reading of <deviceid2>.
+
+ off
+ on
+ dim # only for X10, KOPPLA
+ bright # only for X10, KOPPLA
+ all_off # only for X10, ARC, EMW200, AC, HOMEEASY, ANSLUT
+ all_on # only for X10, ARC, EMW200, AC, HOMEEASY, ANSLUT
+ chime # only for ARC
+ level <levelnum> # only AC, HOMEEASY, ANSLUT: set level to <levelnum> (range: 0=0% to 15=100%)
+
+ The TRX_SECURITY module interprets X10, KD101 and Visonic security sensors received by a RFXCOM RFXtrx433 RF receiver. You need to define an RFXtrx433 receiver first. See TRX.
+
+
+ specifies one of the following security devices:
+
+
DS10A (X10 security ds10a Door/Window Sensor or compatible devices. This device type reports the status of the switch [Open/Closed], status of the delay switch [min|max]], and battery status [ok|low].)
+
MS10A (X10 security ms10a motion sensor. This device type reports the status of motion sensor [normal|alert] and battery status [ok|low].))
+
SD90 (Marmitek sd90 smoke detector. This device type reports the status of the smoke detector [normal|alert] and battery status [ok|low].)
+
KR18 (X10 security remote control. Report the Reading "Security" with values [Arm|Disarm], "ButtonA" and "ButtonB" with values [on|off] )
+
KD101 (KD101 smoke sensor. Report the Reading "smoke" with values [normal|alert])
+
VISONIC_WINDOW (VISONIC security Door/Window Sensor or compatible devices. This device type reports the status of the switch [Open/Closed] and battery status [ok|low].)
+
VISONIC_MOTION (VISONIC security motion sensor. This device type reports the status of motion sensor [normal|alert] and battery status [ok|low].))
+
+
+
+ <deviceid>
+
+ specifies the first device id of the device. X10 security (DS10A, MS10A) and SD90 have a a 16 bit device id which has to be written as a hex-string (example "5a54"). All other devices have a 24 bit device id.
+
+
+ <devicelog>
+
+ is the name of the Reading used to report. Suggested: "Window" or "Door" for ds10a, "motion" for motion sensors, "smoke" for sd90.
+
+
+ <deviceid2>
+
+ is optional and specifies the second device id of the device if it exists. For example sd90 smoke sensors can be configured to report two device ids.
+
+
+ <devicelog2>
+
+ is optional for the name used for the Reading of <deviceid2>.
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/46_TRX_WEATHER.pm b/FHEM/46_TRX_WEATHER.pm
index 8e063f2fb..1a4c2c653 100755
--- a/FHEM/46_TRX_WEATHER.pm
+++ b/FHEM/46_TRX_WEATHER.pm
@@ -907,3 +907,74 @@ TRX_WEATHER_Parse($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
TRX_WEATHER
+
+ The TRX_WEATHER module interprets weather sensor messages received by a RTXtrx receiver. See http://www.rfxcom.com/oregon.htm for a list of
+ Oregon Scientific weather sensors that could be received by the RFXtrx433 tranmitter. You need to define a RFXtrx433 receiver first. See
+ See TRX.
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> OREGON <deviceid>
+
+ <deviceid> is the device identifier of the Oregon sensor. It consists of the sensors name and (only if the attribute longids is set of the RFXtrx433) an a one byte hex string (00-ff) that identifies the sensor. If an sensor uses an switch to set an additional is then this is also added. The define statement with the deviceid is generated automatically by autocreate. The following sensor names are used:
+ "THR128" (for THR128/138, THC138),
+ "THGR132N" (for THC238/268,THN132,THWR288,THRN122,THN122,AW129/131),
+ "THWR800",
+ "RTHN318",
+ "TX3_T" (for LaCrosse TX3, TX4, TX17),
+ "THGR228N" (for THGN122/123, THGN132, THGR122/228/238/268),
+ "THGR810",
+ "RTGR328",
+ "THGR328",
+ "WTGR800_T" (for temperature of WTGR800),
+ "THGR918" (for THGR918, THGRN228, THGN500),
+ "TFATS34C" (for TFA TS34C),
+ "BTHR918",
+ "BTHR918N (for BTHR918N, BTHR968),
+ "RGR918" (for RGR126/682/918),
+ "PCR800",
+ "TFA_RAIN" (for TFA rain sensor),
+ "WTGR800_A" (for wind sensor of WTGR800),
+ "WGR800" (for wind sensor of WGR800),
+ "WGR918" (for wind sensor of STR918 and WGR918),
+ "TFA_WIND" (for TFA wind sensor)
+
+
+
+ Defines a network camera device to trigger snapshots on events.
+
+ Network cameras (IP cameras) usually have a build-in function to create
+ snapshot images. This module enables the event- or time-controlled
+ recording of these images.
+ In addition, this module allows the recording of many image formats like
+ JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, BMP, ICO, PPM, XPM, XBM and SVG. The only requirement
+ is that the recorded image must be accessible via a URL.
+ So it is also possible to record images of e.g. a public Weather Camera
+ from the internet or any picture of a website.
+
+ Examples:
+ A local ip-cam takes 5 snapshots with 10 seconds delay per call:
+
+
+ A public web-cam takes only 1 snapshot per call:
+
+ define schloss IPCAM http://www2.braunschweig.de
+ attr schloss path webcam/schloss.jpg
+ attr schloss storage /srv/share/surveillance/snapshots
+
+
+ An at-Job takes every hour a snapshot:
+
+ define snapshot_schloss at +*00:01:00 get schloss image
+
+
+
+
+ Set
N/A
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get <name> <value>
+
+ where value is one of:
+
+
+ image
+ Get one or more images of the defined IP-Cam. The number of images
+ and the time interval between images can be specified using the
+ attributes snapshots and delay.
+
+
+ last
+ Show the name of the last snapshot.
+
+
+ snapshots
+ Show the total number of a image sequence.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+
+ credentials
+ Defines the location of the credentials file.
+ If you prefer to store your cam credentials in a file instead be a part of the
+ URI (see attributes path and query), set the full path
+ with filename on this attribute.
+ Example: attr ipcam3 credentials /etc/fhem/ipcam.conf
+
+ The credentials file has the following structure:
+
+ Replace <name_cam1> respectively <name_cam2>
+ with the names of your defined ip-cams and <your_username> respectively
+ <your_password> with your credentials (all without the brackets
+ < and >!).
+
+
+ delay
+ Defines the time interval between snapshots in seconds.
+ If more then one snapshot is taken, then it makes sense to define a short delay
+ between the snapshots. On the one hand, the camera is not addressed in short intervals
+ and the second may be better represented movements between images.
+ Example: attr ipcam3 delay 10
+
+ path
+ Defines the path and query component of the complete URI to get a snapshot of the
+ camera. Is the full URI of your ip-cam for example http://CAMERA_IP/snapshot.cgi?user=admin&pwd=password,
+ then only the path and query part is specified here (without the leading slash (/).
+ Example: attr ipcam3 path snapshot.cgi?user=admin&pwd=password
+
+ If you prefer to store the credentials in a file (take a look at the attribute credentials)
+ you have to set the placeholder USERNAME and PASSWORD in the path string. These placeholders
+ will be replaced with the values from the credentials file.
+ Example: attr ipcam3 path snapshot.cgi?user=USERNAME&pwd=PASSWORD
+
+ snapshots
+ Defines the total number of snapshots to be taken with the get <name> image command.
+ If this attribute is not defined, then the default value is 1.
+ The snapshots are stored in the given path of the attribute storage and are
+ numbered sequentially (starts with 1) like snapshot_01, snapshot_02, etc.
+ Furthermore, an additional file last will be saved, which is identical with
+ the last snapshot-image. The module checks the imagetype and stores all these files with
+ the devicename and a correct extension, e.g. <devicename>_snapshot_01.jpg.
+ If you like a timestamp instead a sequentially number, take a look at the attribute timestamp.
+ All files are overwritten on every get <name> image command (except: snapshots
+ with a timestamp. So, keep an eye on your diskspace if you use a timestamp extension!).
+ Example: attr ipcam3 snapshots 5
+
+
+ storage
+ Defines the location for the file storage of the snapshots. Default: $modpath/www/snapshots
+ Example: attr ipcam3 storage /srv/share/surveillance/snapshots
+
+
+ timestamp
+ If this attribute is unset or set to 0, snapshots are stored with a sequentially number
+ like <devicename>_snapshot_01.jpg, <devicename>_snapshot_02.jpg, etc.
+ If you like filenames with a timestamp postfix, e.g. <devicename>_20121023_002602.jpg,
+ set this attribute to 1.
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/50_WS300.pm b/FHEM/50_WS300.pm
index 4cea950e6..1fa033b56 100644
--- a/FHEM/50_WS300.pm
+++ b/FHEM/50_WS300.pm
@@ -604,3 +604,69 @@ NEXTPOLL:
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
WS300
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define WS300Device WS300 <serial device>
+ or
+ define <devname> WS300 [0-9]
+
+ The first line is mandatory if you have a WS300 device: it defines the
+ input device with its USB port. The name of this device is fixed and must
+ be WS300Device. It must be the first defined WS300 device.
+
+ For each additional device (with number 0 to 9) you have to define another
+ WS300 device, with an arbitrary name. The WS300 device which reports the
+ readings will be defined with the port number 9, an optional KS300 with the
+ port number 8.
+ The POKEYS module is used to control the LAN POKEYS device (POKEYS56e) which supports
+ up to 56 digital input, analog inputs, counter inputs and digital outputs.
+ Each port/pin has to be configured before it can be used.
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> POKEYS <ip-address> <pin> <io-state> [<time in ms>]
+
+ <ip-address> the IP address where the POKEYS device can be accessed
+ <pin> the pin number which should be configured
+ <io-state> the new io state of the pin Obsolete(=undef) DigIn DigOut AdcIn DigInCtRise DigInCtFall ExtDigOut GetBasic
+ <time in ms> optional else 1000ms: cyclic update time for Input pin
+
+
+ Example:
+
+ define PoInfo POKEYS 192.168.178.34 0 GetBasic
+ # creates a virtual pin for getting infos about the device with the get command
+ define Pin44in POKEYS 192.168.178.34 44 DigIn 200
+ # creates a digitial input port on pin 44
+ define Pin25out POKEYS 192.168.178.34 25 DigOut
+ # creates a digial output port on pin 25
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set <name> <state> [<time in ms>]
+
+ <state> can be OFF ON OFF_PULSE ON_PULSE
+ <time in ms> optional else 1000ms hold time for the ON_PULSE OFF_PULSE state
+
+ Example:
+
+ set Pin25out ON
+ # sets Pin25out to ON (0V)
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get <name> <type>
+
+ only supported for pins of type GetBasic
+ <type> can be Version DevName Serial User CPUload
+
+ Example:
+
+ get PoInfo Version
+ # gets the version of the POKEYS device
+
+
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+ todo
+
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/57_Calendar.pm b/FHEM/57_Calendar.pm
index 03900883b..29f6b5115 100644
--- a/FHEM/57_Calendar.pm
+++ b/FHEM/57_Calendar.pm
@@ -863,3 +863,205 @@ sub Calendar_Undef($$) {
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
+
+ A calendar device periodically gathers calendar events from the source calendar at the given URL. The file at the given URL
+ must be in ICal format.
+
+ If the URL
+ starts with https://, the perl module IO::Socket::SSL must be installed
+ (use cpan -i IO::Socket::SSL).
+
+ Note for users of Google Calendar: You can literally use the private ICal URL from your Google Calendar.
+ Google App accounts do not work since requests to the URL
+ get redirected first and the fhem mechanism for retrieving data via http/https cannot handle this. If your Google Calendar
+ URL starts with https:// and the perl module IO::Socket::SSL is not installed on your system, you can
+ replace it by http://.
+
+ The optional parameter interval is the time between subsequent updates
+ in seconds. It defaults to 3600 (1 hour).
+
+ Forces the retrieval of the calendar from the URL. The next automatic retrieval is scheduled to occur
+ interval seconds later.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get <name> full|text|summary|location|alarm|start|end <reading>|<uid>
+
+ Returns, line by line, the full state or a textual representation or the summary (subject, title) or the
+ location or the alarm time or the start time or the end time
+ of the calendar event(s) listed in the
+ reading <reading> or identified by the UID <uid>.
+
+ get <name> find <regexp>
+
+ Returns, line by line, the UIDs of all calendar events whose summary matches the regular expression
+ <regexp>.
+
+ A calendar is a set of calendar events. A calendar event has a summary (usually the title shown in a visual
+ representation of the source calendar), a start time, an end time, and zero, one or more alarm times. The calendar events are
+ fetched from the source calendar at the given URL. In case of multiple alarm times for a calendar event, only the
+ earliest alarm time is kept. Recurring calendar events are currently not supported.
+
+ A calendar event is identified by its UID. The UID is taken from the source calendar. All non-alphanumerical characters
+ are stripped off the UID to make your life easier.
+
+ A calendar event can be in one of the following states:
+
+
new
The calendar event was first seen at the most recent update. Either this was your first retrieval of
+ the calendar or you newly added the calendar event to the source calendar.
+
known
The calendar event was already there before the most recent update.
+
updated
The calendar event was already there before the most recent update but it has changed since it
+ was last retrieved.
+
deleted
The calendar event was there before the most recent update but is no longer. You removed it from the source calendar. The calendar event will be removed from all lists at the next update.
+
+ Calendar events that lie completely in the past (current time on wall clock is later than the calendar event's end time)
+ are not retrieved and are thus not accessible through the calendar.
+
+
+ A calendar event can be in one of the following modes:
+
+
upcoming
Neither the alarm time nor the start time of the calendar event is reached.
+
alarm
The alarm time has passed but the start time of the calendar event is not yet reached.
+
start
The start time has passed but the end time of the calendar event is not yet reached.
+
end
The end time of the calendar event has passed.
+
+ A calendar event transitions from one mode to another immediately when the time for the change has come. This is done by waiting
+ for the earliest future time among all alarm, start or end times of all calendar events.
+
+
+ A calendar device has several readings. Except for calname, each reading is a semicolon-separated list of UIDs of
+ calendar events that satisfy certain conditions:
+
+
calname
name of the calendar
+
all
all events
+
modeAlarm
events in alarm mode
+
modeAlarmOrStart
events in alarm or start mode
+
modeAlarmed
events that have just transitioned from upcoming to alarm mode
+
modeChanged
events that have just changed their mode somehow
+
modeEnd
events in end mode
+
modeEnded
events that have just transitioned from start to end mode
+
modeStart
events in start mode
+
modeStarted
events that have just transitioned to start mode
+
modeUpcoming
events in upcoming mode
+
stateChanged
events that have just changed their state somehow
+
stateDeleted
events in state deleted
+
stateNew
events in state new
+
stateUpdated
events in state updated
+
+
+
+
+ When a calendar event has changed, an event is created in the form
+ changed: UID mode with mode being the current mode the calendar event is in after the change.
+
+
+
+ Usage scenarios
+
+ Show all calendar events with details
+
+
+ get MyCalendar full all
+ 2767324dsfretfvds7dsfn3e4dsa234r234sdfds6bh874googlecom known alarm 31.05.2012 17:00:00 07.06.2012 16:30:00-07.06.2012 18:00:00 Erna for coffee
+ 992hydf4y44awer5466lhfdsrgl7tin6b6mckf8glmhui4googlecom known upcoming 08.06.2012 00:00:00-09.06.2012 00:00:00 Vacation
+
+
+
+ Show calendar events in your photo frame
+
+ Put a line in the layout description to show calendar events in alarm or start mode:
+ text 20 60 { fhem("get MyCalendar text modeAlarmOrStart") }
+ Think about a calendar with calendar events whose summaries (subjects, titles) are the names of devices in your fhem installation.
+ You want the respective devices to switch on when the calendar event starts and to switch off when the calendar event ends.
+
+ define SwitchActorOn notify MyCalendar:modeStarted.* { my $uid= "%EVTPART1";; my $actor= fhem("get MyCalendar summary $uid");; fhem("set $actor on") }
+ define SwitchActorOff notify MyCalendar:modeEnded.* { my $uid= "%EVTPART1";; my $actor= fhem("get MyCalendar summary $uid");; fhem("set $actor off") }
+
+ You can also do some logging:
+
+ define LogActors notify MyCalendar:mode(Started|Ended).* { my $reading= "%EVTPART0";; my $uid= "%EVTPART1";; my $actor= fhem("get MyCalendar summary $uid");; Log 1, "Actor: $actor, Reading $reading" }
+
<device> the name of a predefined device to switch.
+
<interval> is a digit number. The unit is minutes.
+
<valveThresholdOn> is a digit number. Threshold upon which device is switched on (heating required).
+
<valveThresholdOff> is a digit number. Threshold upon which device is switched off (idle).
+
+
+
+ The HCS (heating control system) device monitors the state of all detected
+ valves in a free definable interval (by default: 10 min).
+
+
+ Regulation for heating requirement or suppression of the request can be controlled by
+ valve position using also free definable thresholds.
+
+
+ In doing so, the HCS device also includes the hysteresis between two states.
+
+
+ Example:
+ Threshold valve position for heating requirement: 40% (default)
+ Threshold valve position for idle: 35% (default)
+
+
+ Heating is required when the "open" position of a valve is more than 40%. HCS
+ then activates the defined device until the "open" position of the valve has
+ lowered to 35% or less (threshold for idle).
+
+
+ In addition, the HCS device supports an optional temp-sensor. The valve-position oriented
+ regulation can be overriden by the reading of the temp-sensor.
+
+
+ Example:
+ Threshold temperature reading for heating requirement: 10° Celsius
+ Threshold temperature reading for idle: 18° Celsius
+
+
+ Is a valve reaching or exceeding the threshold for heating requirement (>=40%), but the
+ temperature reading is more than 18° Celcius, the selected device will stay deactivated.
+ The valve-position oriented regulation has been overridden by the temperature reading in this example.
+
+
+ The HCS device automatically detects devices which are ignored. Furthermore, certain
+ devices can also be excluded of the monitoring manually.
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+
valves
+ returns the actual valve positions
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+
interval
+ modifies the interval of reading the actual valve positions. The unit is minutes.
+
+
on
+ restarts the monitoring after shutdown by off switch.
+ HCS device starts up automatically upon FHEM start or after new device implementation!
+
+
off
+ shutdown of monitoring, can be restarted by using the on command.
+
+
valveThresholdOn
+ defines threshold upon which device is switched on (heating required).
+
+
valveThresholdOff
+ defines threshold upon which device is switched off (idle).
+
+
+
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+
device
+ optional; used to change the device. This is normally done in the define tag.
+
+
deviceCmdOn
+ command to activate the device, e.g. on.
+
+
deviceCmdOff
+ command to deactivate the device, e.g. off.
+
+
sensor
+ device name of the temp-sensor (optional).
+
+
sensorThresholdOn
+ threshold for temperature reading activating the defined device
+ Must be set if sensor has been defined
+
+
sensorThresholdOff
+ threshold for temperature reading deactivating the defined device.
+ Must be set if sensor has been defined
+
+
sensorReading
+ name which is used for saving the "reading" of the defined temp-sensor.
+
+
valvesExcluded
+ space separated list of devices (FHT or HM-CC-TC) for excluding
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/59_Twilight.pm b/FHEM/59_Twilight.pm
index 880b10f4e..31ec44194 100644
--- a/FHEM/59_Twilight.pm
+++ b/FHEM/59_Twilight.pm
@@ -317,3 +317,88 @@ Twilight_getWeatherHorizon($)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
Twilight
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> Twilight <latitude> <longitude> [<indoor_horizon> [<Weather_Position>]]
+
+ Defines a virtual device for Twilight calculations
+
+ A Twilight device periodically calculates the times of different twilight phases throughout the day.
+ It calculates a virtual "light" element, that gives an indicator about the amount of the current daylight.
+ Besides the location on earth it is influenced by a so called "indoor horizon" (e.g. if there are high buildings, mountains) as well as by weather conditions. Very bad weather conditions lead to a reduced daylight for nearly the whole day.
+ The light calculated spans between 0 and 6, where the values mean the following:
+ 0 - total night, sun is at least -18 degree below horizon
+ 1 - astronomical twilight, sun is between -12 and -18 degree below horizon
+ 2 - nautical twilight, sun is between -6 and -12 degree below horizon
+ 3 - civil twilight, sun is between 0 and -6 degree below horizon
+ 4 - indoor twilight, sun is between the indoor_horizon and 0 degree below horizon (not used if indoor_horizon=0)
+ 5 - weather twilight, sun is between indoor_horizon and a virtual weather horizon (the weather horizon depends on weather conditions (optional)
+ 6 - maximum daylight
+
+
+ The parameters latitude and longitude are decimal numbers which give the position on earth for which the twilight states shall be calculated.
+ The parameter indoor_horizon gives a virtual horizon higher than 0, that shall be used for calculation of indoor twilight (typical values are between 0 and 6)
+ The parameter Weather_Position is the yahoo weather id used for getting the weather condition. Go to http://weather.yahoo.com/ and enter a city or zip code. In the upcoming webpage, the id is a the end of the URL. Example: Munich, Germany -> 676757
+
+ Example:
+
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/59_Weather.pm b/FHEM/59_Weather.pm
index 9fc29b78b..a30705346 100755
--- a/FHEM/59_Weather.pm
+++ b/FHEM/59_Weather.pm
@@ -488,3 +488,103 @@ WeatherAsHtml($)
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
Weather
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> Weather <location> [<interval> [<language>]]
+
+ Defines a virtual device for weather forecasts.
+
+ A Weather device periodically gathers current and forecast weather conditions
+ from the Yahoo Weather API.
+
+ The parameter location is the WOEID (WHERE-ON-EARTH-ID), go to
+ http://weather.yahoo.com to find it out for your location.
+
+ The optional parameter interval is the time between subsequent updates
+ in seconds. It defaults to 3600 (1 hour).
+
+ The optional language parameter may be one of
+ de,
+ en,
+ nl,
+
+ It determines the natural language in which the forecast information appears.
+ It defaults to en. If you want to set the language you also have to set the interval.
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/60_EM.pm b/FHEM/60_EM.pm
index 8a3d51746..d2692082f 100755
--- a/FHEM/60_EM.pm
+++ b/FHEM/60_EM.pm
@@ -423,3 +423,63 @@ EmGetDevData($)
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
EM
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> EM <em1010pc-device>
+
+
+ Define a EM1010PC USB device. As the EM1010PC was not designed to be used
+ with a PC attached to it all the time, it won't transmit received signals
+ automatically, fhem has to poll it every 5 minutes.
+
+ Currently there is no way to read the internal log of the EM1010PC with
+ fhem, use the program em1010.pl in the contrib directory for this
+ purpose.
+
+ Examples:
+
+ define em EM /dev/elv_em1010pc
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set EM <value>
+
+ where value is either time or reset.
+ If time has arguments of the form YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS, then the specified
+ time will be set, else the time from the host.
+ Note: after reset you should set the time.
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/61_EMWZ.pm b/FHEM/61_EMWZ.pm
index 7983c0b90..50dde13c2 100755
--- a/FHEM/61_EMWZ.pm
+++ b/FHEM/61_EMWZ.pm
@@ -183,3 +183,74 @@ EMWZ_Define($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
EMWZ
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> EMWZ <device-number>
+
+
+ Define up to 4 EM1000WZ attached to the EM1010PC. The device number must
+ be between 1 and 4. Defining an EMWZ will schedule an internal task, which
+ reads the status of the device every 5 minutes, and triggers notify/filelog
+ commands.
+
+ Example:
+
+ define emwz EMWZ 1
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set EMWZdevice <param> <value>
+ where param is one of:
+
+
rperkw
+ Number of rotations for a KiloWatt of the EM1000WZ device (actually
+ of the device where the EM1000WZ is attached to). Without setting
+ this correctly, all other readings will be incorrect.
+
alarm
+ Alarm in WATT. if you forget to set it, the default value is
+ rediculously low (random), and if a value above this threshold is
+ received, the EM1010PC will start beeping once every minute. It can
+ be very annoying.
+
price
+ The price of one KW in EURO (use e.g. 0.20 for 20 Cents). It is used
+ only on the EM1010PC display, it is of no interest for FHEM.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get EMWZ status
+
+ This is the same command which is scheduled every 5 minutes internally.
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/62_EMEM.pm b/FHEM/62_EMEM.pm
index b33e4e3c6..eff136e4a 100755
--- a/FHEM/62_EMEM.pm
+++ b/FHEM/62_EMEM.pm
@@ -137,3 +137,57 @@ EMEM_Define($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
EMEM
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> EMEM <device-number>
+
+
+ Define up to 4 EM1000EM attached to the EM1010PC. The device number must
+ be between 5 and 8.
+ Defining an EMEM will schedule an internal task, which reads the
+ status of the device every 5 minutes, and triggers notify/filelog commands.
+ Note: Currently this device does not support a "set" function.
+
+
+ Example:
+
+ define emem EMEM 5
+
+
+
+
+ Set
N/A
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get EMEM status
+
+ This is the same command which is scheduled every 5 minutes internally.
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/63_EMGZ.pm b/FHEM/63_EMGZ.pm
index 2c0f33b6d..c56a31e0e 100644
--- a/FHEM/63_EMGZ.pm
+++ b/FHEM/63_EMGZ.pm
@@ -170,3 +170,63 @@ EMGZ_Define($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
EMGZ
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> EMGZ <device-number>
+
+
+ Define up to 4 EM1000GZ attached to the EM1010PC. The device number must
+ be between 9 and 12.
+ Defining an EMGZ will schedule an internal task, which reads the
+ status of the device every 5 minutes, and triggers notify/filelog commands.
+
+
+ Example:
+
+ define emgz EMGZ 9
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set EMGZdevice <param> <value>
+ where param is:
+
+
price
+ The price of one KW in EURO (use e.g. 0.20 for 20 Cents). It is used
+ only on the EM1010PC display, it is of no interest for FHEM.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get EMGZ status
+
+ This is the same command which is scheduled every 5 minutes internally.
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/66_ECMD.pm b/FHEM/66_ECMD.pm
index 9b40244e8..29fad51f5 100644
--- a/FHEM/66_ECMD.pm
+++ b/FHEM/66_ECMD.pm
@@ -631,3 +631,190 @@ ECMD_Write($$)
#####################################
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
ECMD
+
+ Any physical device with request/response-like communication capabilities
+ over a TCP connection can be defined as ECMD device. A practical example
+ of such a device is the AVR microcontroller board AVR-NET-IO from
+ Pollin with
+ ECMD-enabled
+ Ethersex firmware.
+
+ A physical ECMD device can host any number of logical ECMD devices. Logical
+ devices are defined as ECMDDevices in fhem.
+ ADC 0 to 3 and I/O port 0 to 3 of the above mentioned board
+ are examples of such logical devices. ADC 0 to 3 all belong to the same
+ device class ADC (analog/digital converter). I/O port 0 to 3 belong to the device
+ class I/O port. By means of extension boards you can make your physical
+ device drive as many logical devices as you can imagine, e.g. IR receivers,
+ LC displays, RF receivers/transmitters, 1-wire devices, etc.
+
+ Defining one fhem module for any device class would create an unmanageable
+ number of modules. Thus, an abstraction layer is used. You create a device class
+ on the fly and assign it to a logical ECMD device. The
+ class definition
+ names the parameters of the logical device, e.g. a placeholder for the number
+ of the ADC or port, as well as the get and set capabilities. Worked examples
+ are to be found in the documentation of the ECMDDevice device.
+
+
+ Note: this module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module
+ if the module is connected via serial Port or USB.
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> ECMD telnet <IPAddress:Port>
+ or
+ define <name> ECMD serial <SerialDevice>[<@BaudRate>]
+
+
+ Defines a physical ECMD device. The keywords telnet or
+ serial are fixed.
+
+ Examples:
+
+ define AVRNETIO ECMD telnet 192.168.0.91:2701
+ define AVRNETIO ECMD serial /dev/ttyS0
+ define AVRNETIO ECMD serial /sev/ttyUSB0@38400
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set <name> classdef <classname> <filename>
+
+ Creates a new device class <classname> for logical devices.
+ The class definition is in the file <filename>. You must
+ create the device class before you create a logical device that adheres to
+ that definition.
+
+ Closes and reopens the device. Could be handy if connection is lost and cannot be
+ reestablished automatically.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get <name> raw <command>
+
+ Sends the command <command> to the physical ECMD device
+ <name> and reads the response.
+
+
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+
+
classdefs A colon-separated list of <classname>=<filename>.
+ The list is automatically updated if a class definition is added. You can
+ directly set the attribute.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class definition
+
+
+
+ The class definition for a logical ECMD device class is contained in a text file.
+ The text file is made up of single lines. Empty lines and text beginning with #
+ (hash) are ignored. Therefore make sure not to use hashes in commands.
+
+ The following commands are recognized in the device class definition:
+ set <commandname> postproc { <perl command> }
+ get <commandname> postproc { <perl command> }
+
+ Declares a postprocessor for the command <commandname>.
+
+
+
+
+
+ set <commandname> params <parameter1> [<parameter2> [<parameter3> ... ]]
+ get <commandname> params <parameter1> [<parameter2> [<parameter3> ... ]]
+
+ Declares the names of the named parameters that must be present in the
+ set or get command <commandname>. Be careful not to use a parameter name that
+ is already used in the device definition (see params above).
+
+
+
+
+
+ The perl specials in the definitions of the set and get commands can
+ contain macros. Apart from the rules outlined in the documentation of perl specials in fhem, the following
+ rules apply:
+
+
The character @ will be replaced with the device
+ name. To use @ in the text itself, use the double mode (@@).
+
+
The macro %NAME will expand to the device name (same
+ as @).
+
+
The macro %<parameter> will expand to the
+ current value of the named parameter. This can be either a parameter
+ from the device definition or a parameter from the set or get
+ command.
+
+
The macro substitution occurs before perl evaluates the
+ expression. It is a plain text substitution.
+
+
If in doubt what happens, run the commands with loglevel 5 and
+ observe the log file.
+
+
+
+ The rules outlined in the documentation of perl specials
+ for the <perl command> in the postprocessor definitions apply.
+ Note: Beware of undesired side effects from e.g. doubling of semicolon!
+
+ The perl command acts on $_. The result of the perl command is the
+ final result of the get or set command.
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/67_ECMDDevice.pm b/FHEM/67_ECMDDevice.pm
index b8c26ae9c..5ad1f3a7a 100644
--- a/FHEM/67_ECMDDevice.pm
+++ b/FHEM/67_ECMDDevice.pm
@@ -259,3 +259,150 @@ ECMDDevice_Define($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
+ set <name> <commandname> [<parameter1> [<parameter2> [<parameter3> ... ]]]
+
+ The number of given parameters must match those given for the set command <commandname> definition in
+ the class definition.
+ If set <commandname> is invoked the perl special in curly brackets from the command definition
+ is evaluated and the result is sent to the physical ECMD device.
+
+ Example:
+
+ set myRelais1 on
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get <name> <commandname> [<parameter1> [<parameter2> [<parameter3> ... ]]]
+
+ The number of given parameters must match those given for the get command <commandname> definition in
+ the class definition.
+ If get <commandname> is invoked the perl special in curly brackets from the command definition
+ is evaluated and the result is sent to the physical ECMD device. The response from the physical ECMD device is returned
+ and the state of the logical ECMD device is updated accordingly.
+
+ The following example shows how to access the ADC of the AVR-NET-IO board from
+ Pollin with
+ ECMD-enabled
+ Ethersex firmware.
+
+ The class definition file /etc/fhem/ADC.classdef looks as follows:
+
+ get value cmd {"adc get %channel"}
+ get value params channel
+
+
+ In the fhem configuration file or on the fhem command line we do the following:
+
+ define AVRNETIO ECMD telnet 192.168.0.91:2701 # define the physical device
+ set AVRNETIO classdef ADC /etc/fhem/ADC.classdef # define the device class ADC
+ define myADC ECDMDevice ADC # define the logical device myADC with device class ADC
+ get myADC value 1 # retrieve the value of analog/digital converter number 1
+
+
+ The get command is evaluated as follows: get value has one named parameter
+ channel. In the example the literal 1 is given and thus %channel
+ is replaced by 1 to yield "adc get 1" after macro substitution. Perl
+ evaluates this to a literal string which is send as a plain ethersex command to the AVR-NET-IO. The
+ board returns something like 024 for the current value of analog/digital converter number 1.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Example 2
+
+
+ The following example shows how to switch a relais driven by pin 3 (bit mask 0x08) of I/O port 2 on for
+ one second and then off again.
+
+ The class definition file /etc/fhem/relais.classdef looks as follows:
+
+ params pinmask
+ set on cmd {"io set ddr 2 ff\nioset port 2 0%pinmask\nwait 1000\nio set port 2 00"}
+ set on postproc {s/^OK\nOK\nOK\nOK$/success/; "$_" eq "success" ? "ok" : "error"; }
+
+
+ In the fhem configuration file or on the fhem command line we do the following:
+
+ define AVRNETIO ECMD telnet 192.168.0.91:2701 # define the physical device
+ set AVRNETIO classdef relais /etc/fhem/relais.classdef # define the device class relais
+ define myRelais ECMDDevice 8 # define the logical device myRelais with pin mask 8
+ set myRelais on # execute the "on" command
+
+
+ The set command is evaluated as follows: %pinmask
+ is replaced by 8 to yield
+ "io set ddr 2 ff\nioset port 2 08\nwait 1000\nio set port 2 00" after macro substitution. Perl
+ evaluates this to a literal string which is send as a plain ethersex command to the AVR-NET-IO line by line.
+
+ For any of the four plain ethersex commands, the AVR-NET-IO returns the string OK. They are
+ concatenated and separated by line breaks (\n). The postprocessor takes the result from $_,
+ substitutes it by the string success if it is OK\nOK\nOK\nOK, and then either
+ returns the string ok or the string error.
+
+
+
+ Define a SCD series solar controler device. Details see here.
+ You probably need a Serial to USB controller like the PL2303.
+
+ Defining an SCIVT device will schedule an internal task, which reads the
+ status of the device every 5 minutes, and triggers notify/filelog commands.
+ Note: Currently this device does not support a "set" function, only
+ a single get function which reads the device status immediately.
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/70_SISPM.pm b/FHEM/70_SISPM.pm
index deb6dc65f..097290117 100644
--- a/FHEM/70_SISPM.pm
+++ b/FHEM/70_SISPM.pm
@@ -525,3 +525,119 @@ sub nonblockGetLinesSISPM {
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
SISPM
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> SISPM </path/to/sispmctl>
+
+
+
+
+ When using multiple SIS PMs on one host, sispmctl up to and including V 2.7 has a bug:
+
plug-2:# sispmctl -v -s -d 1 -g all -d 2 -g all
+
+SiS PM Control for Linux 2.7
+
+(C) 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 by Mondrian Nuessle, (C) 2005, 2006 by Andreas Neuper.
+This program is free software.
+[...]
+
+Gembird #0 is USB device 013.This device is a 4-socket SiS-PM.
+[...]
+
+Gembird #1 is USB device 015.This device is a 4-socket SiS-PM.
+[...]
+
+Accessing Gembird #1 USB device 015
+Status of outlet 1: on
+Status of outlet 2: on
+Status of outlet 3: on
+Status of outlet 4: on
+Error performing requested action
+Libusb error string: error sending control message: Invalid argument
+Terminating
+*** glibc detected *** sispmctl: double free or corruption (fasttop): 0x000251e0 ***
+[...]
+ Well, the fix is simple and will be sent upstream, but in case it's not incorporated
+ at the time you need it, here it is; it's easy to apply even by hand ;-)
+
+
+ Defines a path to the program "sispmctl", which is used to control (locally attached)
+ "Silver Shield Power Manager" devices. Usually these are connected to the local computer
+ via USB, more than one "sispm" device per computer is supported. (Please note that, due
+ to neglections in their USB driver, AVM's Fritz!Box 7170 (and derivates, like Deutsche
+ Telekom's Speedport W901V) is not able to talk to these devices ... The Fritz!Box
+ 72xx and 73xx should be fine.)
+
+ The communication between FHEM and the Power Manager device is done by using the open
+ source sispmctl program. Thus, for the
+ time being, THIS functionality is only available running FHEM on Linux (or any other platform
+ where you can get the sispmctl program compiled and running). On the bright side: by
+ interfacing via commandline, it is possible to define multiple SISPM devices, e. g. with
+ a wrapper that does execute sispmctl on a remote (Linux) system. And: sispmctl runs happily
+ on Marvells SheevaPlug ;) Please note: if you're not running FHEM as root, you most likely
+ have to make sispmctl setuid root (chmod 4755 /path/to/sispmctl) or fiddle with
+ udev so that the devices of the Power Manager are owned by the user running FHEM.
+
+ After defining a SISPM device, a first test is done, identifying attached PMs. If this
+ succeeds, an internal task is scheduled to read the status every 30 seconds. (Reason
+ being that someone else could have switched sockets externally to FHEM.)
+
+ To actually control any power sockets, you need to define a SIS_PMS
+ device ;) If autocreate is enabled, those should be autocreated for your convenience as
+ soon as the first scan took place (30 seconds after the define).
+
+ Implementation of SISPM.pm tries to be nice, that is it reads from the pipe only
+ non-blocking (== if there is data), so it should be safe even to use it via ssh or
+ a netcat-pipe over the Internet, but this, as well, has not been tested extensively yet.
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/70_SML.pm b/FHEM/70_SML.pm
index a0161c7e7..320e53374 100644
--- a/FHEM/70_SML.pm
+++ b/FHEM/70_SML.pm
@@ -335,3 +335,51 @@ energy_Undef($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
+
SML
+
+This module supports "Intelligenter Strom Zhler"(ENBW) and "Sparzhler" (Yellow Strom).
+The electricity meter will be polled in a defined interval for new values.
+
+ Set
+ set <name> <value> <nummber> where value is one of:
+
+
mute
+
volume
+
call
+
sms
+
date
+
+ Example:
+ set <name> mute
+ set <name> volume 20
+ set <name> call Peter 012345678 Phone 87654321
+
+ Get
+
N/A
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/70_TellStick.pm b/FHEM/70_TellStick.pm
index b902e693f..0beb98713 100644
--- a/FHEM/70_TellStick.pm
+++ b/FHEM/70_TellStick.pm
@@ -331,3 +331,72 @@ sub nonblockGetLinesTellStick {
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
TellStick
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> TellStick </path/to/tdtool>
+
+
+
+
+ Defines a path to the program "tdtool", which is used to control a (locally attached)
+ "Telldus TellStick [Duo]" USB device. A TellStick controls a wide range of 433 MHz
+ devices, like the widely available switchable power outlets from InterTechno.
+ To keep things simple, FHEM interfaces with the telldus-core suite (available
+ for Linux, Windows, Mac OSX) via the supplied tool, "tdtool". This FHEM module
+ will initially use "tdtool --list" to receive a list of configured devices, then let
+ autocreate (if enabled) create them as SIS_PMS devices.
+ Please make sure that the user running FHEM under ("fhem" in a standard setup on
+ Linux) has the r/w-right to access the stick's device ("/dev/tellstick"
+ in telldus-core version 2.0) — if the state of your devices do not change when
+ modified im FHEM, access rights problems are the most probable cause
+ (chmod o+rw /dev/tellstick should fix that; you may want to automate it
+ via udev or adding the fhem user to the proper group ;))
+ This module has only been tested with the 2.0 branch of teldus-core because of a known bug
+ in 2.1, preventing
+ version 2.1 working properly with some TellSticks and/or "tdtool" application; FTR, the
+ "Batch: 8" version a was granted usage of for writing this module was impacted by it ...
+
+ To actually control any power sockets, you need to define a SIS_PMS
+ device — TellStick.pm uses SIS_PMS devices ("socket" is te:ll:st:ck:01, "socketnr"
+ is the ID of the device in "tdtool"), as as of now only on/off switching is supported and
+ this was the easiest implementation path. SIS_PMS is supported by andFHEM, the Android
+ frontend, so this make some sense. (Furthermore, I don't own dimmable devices and they are
+ actually not really cheap; >15 EUR/socket compared to the 15 EUR for 5 switch-only, non-self
+ learning socket adapters from Intertechno at your local home improvement store.)
+
+ The USBWX module interprets the messages received by the ELV USB-WDE1
+ weather receiver. This receiver is compaptible with the following ELV sensors:
+ KS200/KS300, S300IA, S300TH, ASH2200, PS50. It also known to work with Conrad
+ weather sensors KS555, S555TH and ASH555. This module was tested with ELV
+ S300TH, ELV ASH2200, ELV KS300, Conrad S555TH and Conrad KS555. Readings
+ and STATE of temperature/humidity sensors are compatible with the CUL_WS
+ module. For KS300/KS555 sensors STATE is compatible with the KS300 module. The
+ module is integrated into autocreate to generate the appropriate filelogs and
+ weblinks automatically.
+
+ Note: this module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module
+ if the devices is connected via USB or a serial port.
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> USBWX <serial device>
+
+ Defines USB-WDE1 attached via usb.
+
+ define <name> USBWX <code> [corr1...corr4]
+
+ <code> is the code which must be set on the sensor. Valid values
+ are 1 through 8. 9 is used as the sensor id of the ks300 sensor.
+ corr1..corr4 are up to 4 numerical correction factors, which will be added
+ to the respective value to calibrate the device. Note: rain-values will be
+ multiplied and not added to the correction factor.
+
+
+ Example:
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/70_WS3600.pm b/FHEM/70_WS3600.pm
index a30f5c399..d50769f0a 100644
--- a/FHEM/70_WS3600.pm
+++ b/FHEM/70_WS3600.pm
@@ -443,3 +443,170 @@ sub nonblockGetLines {
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
WS3600
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> WS3600 </path/to/fetch3600>
+
+
+ Define a WS3600 series weather station (Europe Supplies, technotrade, etc; refer to
+ Wetterstationen.info
+ (german) for details on this model); the station is queried by means of an external program,
+ fetch3600. It talks to the attached weather station (several WS do supply an RS323 interface
+ but seem to use some kind of "morse code" on the RTS, CTS wires instead of using propper
+ serial communication (RX, TX); it's no use to recode that crap into FHEM when there is a
+ stable package of tools to talk to the station available: open3600)
+ and delivers the current readings line by line as reading-value-pairs. These are read in
+ and translated into more readable names for FHEM by the module WS3600.pm.
+ As the WS3600 is rather similar to the WS2300
+ and open3600 basically is a modified offspring of open2300, by exchanging the /path/to/fetch3600 with /path/to/fetch2300 this module
+ should be able to handle the WS2300 was well.
+ Currently, it is expected that the WS is attached to the local computer and fetch3600 is run
+ locally. Basically the executable called needs to supply on stdout an output similar to what
+ fetch3600 returns; how to implement a "networked setup" is left as an excercise to the reader.
+
+ For the records, this is an output of fetch3600:
+
+ There is no expectation on the readings received from the fetch3600 binary; so, in
+ essence, if you have a similar setup (unsupported, attached weather station and a
+ means to get it's reading into an output similar to above's), you should be able
+ to use WS3600.pm with a custom written script to interface FHEM with your station
+ as well. WS3600.pm only recognizes the above readings (and translates these
+ into, e. g., Temp-inside for Ti for use within FHEM), other
+ lines are silently dropped on the floor.
+
+ fetch3600 is available as binary for the Windows OS as well, but I haven't tested operation
+ under that OS, use it at your own risk and you mileage may vary ...
+ Note: Currently this device does not support a "set" function nor anything to "get". The
+ later would be possible to implement if neccessary, though.
+
+
+ Implementation of WS3600.pm tries to be nice, that is it reads from the pipe only
+ non-blocking (== if there is data), so it should be safe even to use it via ssh or
+ a netcat-pipe over the Internet, but this, as well, has not been tested yet.
+
+
+ Attributes:
+
+
model: WS3600 or WS2300 (not used for anything, yet)
+
+ This module controls AV receiver from Yamaha via network connection. You are able
+ to power your AV reveiver on and off, query it's power state,
+ select the input (HDMI, AV, AirPlay, internet radio, Tuner, ...), select the volume
+ or mute/unmute the volume.
+ Defining a YAMAHA_AVR device will schedule an internal task (interval can be set
+ with optional parameter <status_interval> in seconds, if not set, the value is 60 seconds), which periodically reads
+ the status of the AV receiver (power state, selected input, volume and mute status)
+ and triggers notify/filelog commands.
+
+ Example:
+
+ define AV_Receiver YAMAHA_AVR 192.168.0.10
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set <name> <command> [<parameter>]
+
+ Currently, the following commands are defined; the available inputs are depending on the used receiver.
+ The module only offers the real available inputs. The following input commands are just an example and can differ.
+
+
on
+off
+input hdmi1
+input hdmi2
+input hdmi3
+input hdmi4
+input av1
+input av2
+input av3
+input av3
+input av4
+input av5
+input av6
+input usb
+input airplay
+input tuner
+input v-aux
+input audio
+input server
+volume -80..16 (volume between -80 and +16 dB)
+mute on
+mute off
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get <name> <what>
+
+ Currently, the following commands are defined and return the current state of the receiver.
+
+ Optional attribute to define the time window for the volume smoothing in seconds.
+ For example the value 2 means the smooth process in general should take 2 seconds.
+ The value 0 means "as fast as possible". Default value is 0.
+
+
+ Implementator's note
+
+ The module is only usable if you activate "Network Standby" on your receiver.
+ Technically there are many more commands and readings possible, but I think
+ these are the main usecases within FHEM.
+
+ The FB_CALLMONITOR module connects to a AVM FritzBox Fon and listens for telephone
+ events (Receiving incoming call, Making a call)
+
+ In order to use this module with fhem you must enable the CallMonitor feature via
+ telephone shortcode.
+
+ #96*5* - for activating #96*4* - for deactivating
+
+
+
+ Just dial the shortcode for activating on one of your phones, after 3 seconds just hang up. The feature is now activated.
+
+ After activating the CallMonitor-Support in your FritzBox, this module is able to
+ generate an event for each call.
+
+ This module work with any FritzBox Fon model.
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> FB_CALLMONITOR <ip-address>[:port]
+
+ port is 1012 by default.
+
+
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/75_MSG.pm b/FHEM/75_MSG.pm
index b742f1345..a4f829965 100644
--- a/FHEM/75_MSG.pm
+++ b/FHEM/75_MSG.pm
@@ -196,3 +196,61 @@ MSG_Define($$)
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
MSG
+
+ The MSG device is the backend device for all the message handling (I/O-engine).
+ Under normal conditions only one MSG device is needed to serve multiple frontend
+ message devices like file or email.
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> MSG
+ Specifies the MSG device. A single MSG device could serve multiple MSG frontends.
+ But, for special conditions there could be defined more than one MSG device.
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set <name> send|write <devicename>
+
+ Notes:
+
+ To send the data, both send or write could be used.
+ The devicename is the name of a frontenddevice previously
+ defined. Based on the type of the frontend device, the MSG device
+ will send out the lines of data.
+
+ Frontend devices are available for:
+
+ For details about this devices, please review the device-definitions.
+ After sending/writing the data, the data stills exists with the
+ frontend device, MSG do not delete/purge any data, this must be done
+ by the frontend device.
+
+ The MSGFile device is a frontend device for message handling.
+ With a MSGFile device data is written to disk (or other media).
+ Multiple MSGFile devices could be defined.
+ To write the data to disk, a MSG device is necessary.
+ A MSGFile device needs the operating systems rights to write to the filesystem.
+ To set the rights for a directory, please use OS related commands.
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> MSGFile <filename>
+ Specifies the MSGFile device. At definition the message counter is set to 0.
+ A filename must be specified at definition.
+
+
+ Examples:
+
+ define myFile MSGFile
+
+
+
+ Set
+
set <name> add|clear|list [text]
+ Set is used to manipulate the message buffer of the device. The message
+ buffer is an array of lines of data, stored serial based on the incoming
+ time into the buffer. Lines of data inside the buffer could not be deleted
+ anymore, except of flashing the whole buffer.
+
add to add lines of data to the message buffer. All data behind
+ "add" will be interpreted as text message. To add a carriage return to the data,
+ please use the CR attribute.
+
+
clear to flash the message buffer and set the line counter to 0.
+ All the lines of data are deleted and the buffer is flushed.
+
list to list the message buffer.
+
+ Examples:
+
+ set myFile add Dies ist Textzeile 1
+ set myFile add Dies ist Textzeile 2
+ set myFile clear
+ Full working example to write two lines of data to a file:
+ define myMsg MSG
+ define myFile MSGFile /tmp/fhemtest.txt
+ attr myFile filemode append
+ set myFile add Textzeile 1
+ set myFile add Textzeile 2
+ set myMsg write myFile
+ set myFile clear
+
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+
filename
+ sets the filename, must be a fully qualified filename.
+ FHEM must have the rights to write this file to the directory
+
filemode
+ sets the filemode, valid are "new" or "append"
+ new creates a new, empty file and writes the data to this file. Existing files are cleared, the data is lost!
+ append uses, if available, an existing file and writes the
+ buffer data to the end of the file. If the file do not exist, it will
+ be created
+
CR
+ set the option to write a carriage return at the end of the line.
+ CR could be set to 0 or 1, 1 enables this feature
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/76_MSGMail.pm b/FHEM/76_MSGMail.pm
index 32c9d2c20..f8d7dde5b 100644
--- a/FHEM/76_MSGMail.pm
+++ b/FHEM/76_MSGMail.pm
@@ -156,3 +156,109 @@ MSGMail_Undef($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
MSGMail
+
+ The MSGMail device is a frontend device for mail message handling.
+ With a MSGMaildevice data is fowarded to a mail provider and send to a recipent.
+ Multiple MSGMail devices could be defined.
+ MSGMail supports by the moment only mail provider, which uses SSL secured connection
+ like Googlemail, GMX, Yahoo or 1und1 for example.
+ To send an email, a MSG device is necessary.
+ MAIL::Lite and Net::SMTP::SSL from CPAN is needed to use MSGMail!!
+
+ Specifies the MSGMail device. At definition the message counter is set to 0.
+ From, To, SMTPHost and the authfile (see attributes below) need to be defined
+ at definition time.
+
set <name> add|clear|list [text]
+ Set is used to manipulate the message buffer of the device. The message
+ buffer is an array of lines of data, stored serial based on the incoming
+ time into the buffer. Lines of data inside the buffer could not be deleted
+ anymore, except of flashing the whole buffer.
+
add to add lines of data to the message buffer. All data behind
+ "add" will be interpreted as text message. To add a carriage return to the data,
+ please use the CR attribute.
+
+
clear to flash the message buffer and set the line counter to 0.
+ All the lines of data are deleted and the buffer is flushed.
+
list to list the message buffer.
+
+ Examples:
+
+ set myMail add Dies ist Textzeile 1
+ set myMail add Dies ist Textzeile 2
+ set myMail clear
+ Full working example to send two lines of data to a recipent:
+ define myMsg MSG
+ define myMail MSGMail donald.duck@entenhausen.com dagobert.duck@duck-banking.com smtp.entenhausen.net /etc/fhem/msgmailauth
+ attr myMail smtpport 9999
+ attr myMail subject i need more money
+ attr myMail CR 0
+ set myMail add Please send me
+ set myMail add 1.000.000 Taler
+ set myMsg send myMail
+ set myMail clear
+
+
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+ Almost all of these attributes are not optional, most of them could set at definition.
+
smtphost
+ sets the name of the smtphost, for example for GMX
+ you could use mail.gmx.net or for Googlemail the smtphost is
+ smtp.googlemail.com
+
smtpport (optional)
+ sets the port of the smtphost, for example for GMX
+ or for Googlemail the smtport is 465, which is also
+ the default and do not need to be set
+
subject (optional)
+ sets the subject of this email. Per default the subject is set to "FHEM"
+
+
authfile
+ sets the authfile for the SSL connection to the SMTP host
+ the authfile is a simple textfile with the userid in line 1 and
+ the password in line 2.
+ Example:
+ 123user45
+ strenggeheim
+ It is a good behaviour to protect this data and put the file, for
+ example into the /etc directory and set the rights to 440
+ (chmod 440 /etc/msgmailauthfile), so that not everyone could see the contents
+ of the file. FHEM must have access to this file to read the userid and password.
+
+
+
CR
+ set the option to write a carriage return at the end of the line.
+ CR could be set to 0 or 1, 1 enables this feature.
+ Per default this attribute is enabled
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/80_M232.pm b/FHEM/80_M232.pm
index a387cb29f..a01adaa81 100644
--- a/FHEM/80_M232.pm
+++ b/FHEM/80_M232.pm
@@ -345,3 +345,91 @@ DONE:
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
M232
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> M232 <m232-device>
+
+
+ Define a M232 device. You can attach as many M232 devices as you like. A
+ M232 device provides 6 analog inputs (voltage 0..5V with 10 bit resolution)
+ and 8 bidirectional digital ports. The eighth digital port can be used as a
+ 16 bit counter (maximum frequency 3kHz). The M232 device needs to be
+ connected to a 25pin sub-d RS232 serial port. A USB-to-serial converter
+ works fine if no serial port is available.
+
+ Examples:
+
+ define m232 M232 /dev/ttyUSB2
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set <name> stop
+
+ Stops the counter.
+
+ set <name> start
+
+ Resets the counter to zero and starts it.
+
+ set <name> octet
+
+ Sets the state of all digital ports at once, value is 0..255.
+
+ set <name> io0..io7 0|1
+
+ Turns digital port 0..7 off or on.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get <name> [an0..an5]
+
+ Gets the reading of analog input 0..5 in volts.
+
+ get <name> [io0..io7]
+
+ Gets the state of digital ports 0..7, result is 0 or 1.
+
+ get <name> octet
+
+ Gets the state of all digital ports at once, result is 0..255.
+
+ get <name> counter
+
+ Gets the number of ticks of the counter since the last reset. The counter
+ wraps around from 65,535 to 0 and then stops.
+ See M232Counter for how we care about this.
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/80_xxLG7000.pm b/FHEM/80_xxLG7000.pm
index 1157b4bfb..05d021eb5 100644
--- a/FHEM/80_xxLG7000.pm
+++ b/FHEM/80_xxLG7000.pm
@@ -303,3 +303,64 @@ xxLG7000GetData($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
xxLG7000
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> xxLG7000 <serial-device>
+
+
+ Defines a serial link to a TV set of LG's xxLG70yy (e. g. 47LG7000) series
+ and similar TV sets from LG. As of January 2010, the following TV sets should
+ be compatible:
+
+
xxLG7000, e. g. 47LG7000 (tested)
+
xxPG7000, e. g. 50PG7000 (same Manual as 47LG7000 ;))
+
PS3000/6000/7000/8000 series (according to LG brochure; no liabilities assumed)
+
PQ3000/6000 series (see PS3000)
+
LU4000/5000 series (not LU7000; see PS3000)
+
LH2000/3000/4000/5000 series (see PS3000)
+
SL9500/9000/8000 series (see PS3000)
+
+ These TV sets feature a serial connector which can officially be used to control
+ the TV set (see your Onwer's Manual, there's an Appendix labelled "External Control
+ Device setup", referening to cabling and command set). The xxLG7000 module is
+ the FHEM module to actually utilize this. (BTW, those TVs run Linux internally ;))
+ To exercise control over your TV set, use the LGTV module and
+ bind it ("attr <LGTV-name> IODev <xxLG7000-name>") to xxLG7000.
+
+ Define at most one M232Counter for a M232 device. Defining a M232Counter
+ will schedule an internal task, which periodically reads the status of the
+ counter, and triggers notify/filelog commands. unit is the unit
+ name, factor is used to calculate the reading of the counter
+ from the number of ticks. deltaunit is the unit name of the counter
+ differential per second, deltafactor is used to calculate the
+ counter differential per second from the number of ticks per second.
+ Default values:
+
+
unit: ticks
+
factor: 1.0
+
deltaunit: ticks per second
+
deltafactor: 1.0
+
+ Note: the parameters in square brackets are optional. If you wish to
+ specify an optional parameter, all preceding parameters must be specified
+ as well.
+
+
+ Do not forget to start the counter (with set .. start for
+ M232) or to start the counter and set the reading to a specified value
+ (with set ... value for M232Counter).
+ To avoid issues with the tick count reaching the end point, the device's
+ internal counter is automatically reset to 0 when the tick count is 64,000
+ or above and the reading basis is adjusted accordingly.
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set <name> value <value>
+
+ Sets the reading of the counter to the given value. The counter is reset
+ and started and the offset is adjusted to value/unit.
+
+ set <name> interval <interval>
+
+ Sets the status polling interval in seconds to the given value. The default
+ is 60 seconds.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get <name> status
+
+ Gets the reading of the counter multiplied by the factor from the
+ define statement. Wraparounds of the counter are accounted for
+ by an offset (see reading basis in the output of the
+ list statement for the device).
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/82_LGTV.pm b/FHEM/82_LGTV.pm
index 04e5b9bbd..3b0838878 100644
--- a/FHEM/82_LGTV.pm
+++ b/FHEM/82_LGTV.pm
@@ -243,3 +243,94 @@ LGTV_Define($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
LGTV
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> LGTV
+
+
+ This module is expected to work with xxLG7000 as it's
+ IODev. With LGTV and a compatible hardware module (currently, there's only
+ xxLG7000), you are able to power your TV set on and off, query it's power state,
+ select the input (AV, RGB, Composites, analogue TV, DVB-T, HDMI) or mute/unmute
+ the volume.
+ Defining a LGTV device will schedule an internal task, which periodically reads
+ the status of the TV set (power state; if power is on, query the selected input)
+ and triggers notify/filelog commands.
+ Currently, the following commands are defined; not all may be available on a
+ given TV set. An error messages should be recorded if e. g. the input in question
+ is not usable.
+
+
power on
+power off
+input AV1
+input AV2
+input AV3
+input AV3
+input Component
+input RGB
+input HDMI1
+input HDMI2
+input HDMI3
+input HDMI4
+input DVBT
+input PAL
+audio mute
+audio normal
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get <name> <what>
+
+ Currently, the following commands are defined; not all may be available on a
+ given TV set. An error messages should be recorded if e. g. the input in question
+ is not usable.
+
+ The commands listed above are send 1:1 to the underlying IODev (e. g. xxLG7000); that IODev
+ is responsible for translation into whatever means to invoke the function on the TV.
+ It is my hope that other's will adopt this idea and write compatible low level drivers for other
+ TV sets, to make this module (even ;)) more useful.
+
+
+ Define as many M232Voltages as you like for a M232 device. Defining a
+ M232Voltage will schedule an internal task, which reads the status of the
+ analog input every minute, and triggers notify/filelog commands.
+ unit is the unit name, factor is used to
+ calibrate the reading of the analog input.
+
+ Note: the unit defaults to the string "volts", but it must be specified
+ if you wish to set the factor, which defaults to 1.0.
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/87_WS2000.pm b/FHEM/87_WS2000.pm
index 900c5c13c..f768a072d 100644
--- a/FHEM/87_WS2000.pm
+++ b/FHEM/87_WS2000.pm
@@ -539,3 +539,80 @@ WS2000_List($$)
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
WS2000
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> WS2000 <device_to_connect>
+
+
+ Define a WS2000 series raw receiver device sold by ELV. Details see here.
+ Unlike 86_FS10.pm it will handle the complete device communication itself
+ and doesnt require an external program. For this reason you can now use
+ this also on windows.
+
+ This Device will be usually connect to a serial port, but you can also
+ define a raw network redirector like lantronix XPORT(TM).
+ Note: Currently this device does not support a "set" function
+
+
+ Attributes:
+
+
rain: factor for calculating amount of rain in ml/count
+
altitude: height in meters to calculate pressure for NN (not used yet)
+
+
+ Example:
+
+ define WS2000 WS2000 /dev/ttyS0
+
+
+ define WS2000 WS2000 xport:10001
+
+
+ attr WS2000 rain 366 : use factor 366 ml/count for rain sensor S2000R
+
+
+
+
+ Set
N/A
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get <name> list
+
+ Gets the last reading of all received sensord
+
+ get <name> [TH0..TH7, T0..T7, I0..I7, R0..R7, W0..W7, L0..L7, P0..P7,LAST,RAW]
+ get the last reading for the name sensor,
+ LAST: Last received Sensor
+
+ Defines a temperature sensor connected on an Allnet 4000 device via its ip address and port. Use the delay argument to define the delay between polls.
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/88_IPWE.pm b/FHEM/88_IPWE.pm
index 4fe803441..9181e9b21 100644
--- a/FHEM/88_IPWE.pm
+++ b/FHEM/88_IPWE.pm
@@ -148,3 +148,75 @@ IPWE_GetStatus($)
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
IPWE
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> IPWE <hostname> [<delay>]
+
+
+ Define a IPWE network attached weather data receiver device sold by ELV. Details see here.
+ It's intended to receive the same sensors as WS300 (8 T/H-Sensors and one kombi sensor),
+ but can be accessed via http and telnet.
+
+ For unknown reason, my try to use the telnet interface was not working neither with raw sockets
+ nor with Net::Telnet module. Therefore i choosed here the "easy" way
+ to simple readout the http page and extract all data from the offered table. For this reason this module doesnt
+ contain any option to configure this device.
+
Note: You should give your sensors a name within the web interface, once they a received the first time.
+ To extract a single sensor simply match for this name or sensor id
+
+
+ Attributes:
+
+
delay: seconds between read accesses(default 300s)
+
+
+
+ Example:
+
+ define ipwe IPWE ipwe1 120
+
+
+ attr ipwe delay 600 : 10min between readouts
+
+
+
+
+ Set
N/A
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get <name> status
+
+ Gets actual data from device for sensors with data
+
+ get <name> <sensorname>
+
+ will grep output from device for this sensorname
+
+ The optional + indicates that the specification is
+ relative(i.e. it will be added to the current time).
+ The optional * indicates that the command should be
+ executed repeatedly.
+ The optional {N} after the * indicates,that the command
+ should be repeated N-times only.
+ <timedet> is either HH:MM, HH:MM:SS or {perlfunc()}, where perlfunc
+ must return a HH:MM or HH:MM:SS date.
+
+
+
+ Examples:
+
+ # absolute ones:
+ define a1 at 17:00:00 set lamp on # fhem command
+ define a2 at 17:00:00 { Log 1, "Teatime" } # Perl command
+ define a3 at 17:00:00 "/bin/echo "Teatime" > /dev/console" # shell command
+ define a4 at *17:00:00 set lamp on # every day
+
+ # relative ones
+ define a5 at +00:00:10 set lamp on # switch on in 10 seconds
+ define a6 at +00:00:02 set lamp on-for-timer 1 # Blink once in 2 seconds
+ define a7 at +*{3}00:00:02 set lamp on-for-timer 1 # Blink 3 times
+
+ # Blink 3 times if the piri sends a command
+ define n1 notify piri:on.* define a8 at +*{3}00:00:02 set lamp on-for-timer 1
+
+ # Switch the lamp on from sunset to 11 PM
+ define a9 at +*{sunset_rel()} set lamp on
+ define a10 at *23:00:00 set lamp off
+
+ # More elegant version, works for sunset > 23:00 too
+ define a11 at +*{sunset_rel()} set lamp on-till 23:00
+
+ # Only do this on weekend
+ define a12 at +*{sunset_rel()} { fhem("set lamp on-till 23:00") if($we) }
+
+ # Switch lamp1 and lamp2 on from 7:00 till 10 minutes after sunrise
+ define a13 at *07:00 set lamp1,lamp2 on-till {sunrise(+600)}
+
+ # Switch the lamp off 2 minutes after sunrise each day
+ define a14 at +{sunrise(+120)} set lamp on
+
+ # Switch lamp1 on at sunset, not before 18:00 and not after 21:00
+ define a15 at *{sunset(0,"18:00","21:00")} set lamp1 on
+
+
+
+ Notes:
+
+
if no * is specified, then a command will be executed
+ only once, and then the at entry will be deleted. In
+ this case the command will be saved to the statefile (as it
+ considered volatile, i.e. entered by cronjob) and not to the
+ configfile (see the save command.)
+
+
+
if the current time is greater than the time specified, then the
+ command will be executed tomorrow.
+
+
For even more complex date handling you either have to call fhem from
+ cron or filter the date in a perl expression, see the last example and
+ the section Perl special.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
N/A
+
+
+ Get
N/A
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+
+
disable
+ Can be applied to at/watchdog/notify/FileLog devices.
+ Disables the corresponding at/notify or FileLog device. Note:
+ If applied to an at, the command will not be executed,
+ but the next time will be computed.
+
+
+
skip_next
+ Used for at commands: skip the execution of the command the next
+ time.
+
+
+
alignTime
+ Applies only to relative at definitions: adjust the time of the next
+ command execution so, that it will also be executed at the desired
+ alignTime. The argument is a timespec, see above for the
+ definition.
+ Example:
+
+ # Make sure that it chimes when the new hour begins
+ define at2 at +*01:00 set Chime on-for-timer 1
+ attr atr2 alignTime 00:00
+
+ Execute a command when received an event for the definition<pattern>. If
+ <command> is enclosed in {}, then it is a perl expression, if it is
+ enclosed in "", then it is a shell command, else it is a "plain" fhem.pl
+ command (chain). See the trigger command for
+ testing it.
+
+ Examples:
+
The character % will be replaced with the received event,
+ e.g. with on or off or measured-temp: 21.7
+ (Celsius) It is advisable to put the % into double
+ quotes, else the shell may get a syntax error.
+
+
The character @ will be replaced with the device
+ name.
+
+
To use % or @ in the text itself, use the double mode (%% or @@).
+
+
Instead of % and @, the parameters
+ %EVENT (same as %), %NAME (same as
+ @) and %TYPE (contains the device type, e.g.
+ FHT) can be used. The space separated event "parts" are
+ available as %EVTPART0, %EVTPART1, etc. A single % looses
+ its special meaning if any of these parameters appears in the
+ definition.
+
+
<pattern> may also be a compound of
+ definition:event to filter for events.
+
+
<pattern> must completely (!)
+ match either the device name, or the compound of the device name and the
+ event. The event is either the string you see in the list output in paranthesis after the device name, or the
+ string you see when you do a detailed list of the device.
+
+
To use database logging, copy the file contrib/91_DbLog.pm into your
+ modules directory, and change the $dbconn parameter in the file.
+
+
Following special events will be generated for the device "global"
+
+
INITIALIZED after initialization is finished.
+
DEFINED <devname> after a device is defined.
+
DELETED <devname> after a device was deleted.
+
RENAMED <old> <new> after a device was renamed.
+
UNDEFINED <defspec> upon reception of a message for an
+ undefined device.
+
+
+
Notify can be used to store macros for manual execution. Use the trigger command to execute the macro.
+ E.g.
+ fhem> define MyMacro notify MyMacro { Log 1, "Hello"}
+ fhem> trigger MyMacro
+
+
+
forwardReturnValue
+ Forward the return value of the executed command to the caller,
+ default is disabled (0). If enabled (1), then e.g. a set command which
+ triggers this notify will also return this value. This can cause e.g
+ FHEMWEB to display this value, when clicking "on" or "off", which is
+ often not intended.
+
+
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/91_sequence.pm b/FHEM/91_sequence.pm
index 68431c824..776453e46 100755
--- a/FHEM/91_sequence.pm
+++ b/FHEM/91_sequence.pm
@@ -116,3 +116,50 @@ sequence_Undef($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
+
+ A sequence is used to allow to trigger events for a certain combination of
+ button presses on a remote. E.g. to switch on a lamp when pressing the
+ Btn1:on, then Btn2:off and at last Btn1:on one after the other you could
+ define the following:
+
+
+
+ define lampseq sequence Btn1:on 0.5 Btn2:off 0.5 Btn1:on
+ define lampon notify lampseq:trigger set lamp on
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/91_watchdog.pm b/FHEM/91_watchdog.pm
index 1fae5c824..dbc171259 100755
--- a/FHEM/91_watchdog.pm
+++ b/FHEM/91_watchdog.pm
@@ -146,3 +146,87 @@ watchdog_Undef($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
watchdog
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> watchdog <regexp1> <timespec> <regexp2> <command>
+
+ Start an arbitrary fhem.pl command if after <timespec> receiving an
+ event matching <regexp1> no event matching <regexp2> is
+ received.
+ The syntax for <regexp1> and <regexp2> is the same as the
+ regexp for notify.
+ <timespec> is HH:MM[:SS]
+ <command> is a usual fhem command like used int the at or notify
+
+
+ Examples:
+
+ # Request data from the FHT80 _once_ if we do not receive any message for
+ # 15 Minutes.
+ define w watchdog FHT80 00:15:00 SAME set FHT80 date
+
+ # Request data from the FHT80 _each_ time we do not receive any message for
+ # 15 Minutes, i.e. reactivate the watchdog after it triggered. Might be
+ # dangerous, as it can trigger in a loop.
+ define w watchdog FHT80 00:15:00 SAME set FHT80 date;; trigger w .
+
+ # Shout once if the HMS100-FIT is not alive
+ define w watchdog HMS100-FIT 01:00:00 SAME "alarm-fit.sh"
+
+ # Send mail if the window is left open
+ define w watchdog contact1:open 00:15 contact1:closed "mail_me close window1"
+ attr w regexp1WontReactivate
+
+
+ Notes:
+
+
if <regexp1> is . (dot), then activate the watchdog at
+ definition time. Else it will be activated when the first matching
+ event is received.
+
<regexp1> resets the timer of a running watchdog, to avoid it
+ use the regexp1WontReactivate attribute.
+
if <regexp2> is SAME, then it will be the same as the first
+ regexp, and it will be reactivated, when it is received.
+
+
trigger <watchdogname> . will activate the trigger if its state
+ is defined, and set it into state defined if its state is
+ triggered. You always have to reactivate the watchdog with this
+ command once it has triggered (unless you restart fhem)
+
a generic watchdog (one watchdog responsible for more devices) is
+ currently not possible.
regexp1WontReactivate
+ When a watchdog is active, a second event matching regexp1 will
+ normally reset the timeout. Set this attribute to prevents this.
+
+ The regexp will be checked against the device name
+ devicename:event or timestamp:devicename:event combination.
+ The regexp must match the complete string, not just a part of it.
+
+ <filename> may contain %-wildcards of the
+ POSIX strftime function of the underlying OS (see your strftime manual).
+ Common used wildcards are:
+
+
%d day of month (01..31)
+
%m month (01..12)
+
%Y year (1970...)
+
%w day of week (0..6); 0 represents Sunday
+
%j day of year (001..366)
+
%U week number of year with Sunday as first day of week (00..53)
+
%W week number of year with Monday as first day of week (00..53)
+
+ FHEM also replaces %L by the value of the global logdir attribute.
+ Before using %V for ISO 8601 week numbers check if it is
+ correctly supported by your system (%V may not be replaced, replaced by an
+ empty string or by an incorrect ISO-8601 week number, especially
+ at the beginning of the year)
+ If you use %V you will also have to use %G
+ instead of %Y for the year!
+ Examples:
+
+ define lamplog FileLog %L/lamp.log lamp
+ define wzlog FileLog /var/tmp/wz-%Y-%U.log
+ wz:(measured-temp|actuator).*
+ With ISO 8601 week numbers, if supported:
+ define wzlog FileLog /var/tmp/wz-%G-%V.log
+ wz:(measured-temp|actuator).*
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set <name> reopen
+
+ Used to reopen a FileLog after making some manual changes to the logfile.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get <name> <infile> <outfile> <from>
+ <to> <column_spec>
+
+ Read data from the logfile, used by frontends to plot data without direct
+ access to the file.
+
+
+
<infile>
+ Name of the logfile to grep. "-" is the current logfile, or you can
+ specify an older file (or a file from the archive).
+
<outfile>
+ If it is "-", you get the data back on the current connection, else it
+ is the prefix for the output file. If more than one file is specified,
+ the data is separated by a comment line for "-", else it is written in
+ separate files, numerated from 0.
+
+
<from> <to>
+ Used to grep the data. The elements should correspond to the
+ timeformat or be an initial substring of it.
+
<column_spec>
+ For each column_spec return a set of data in a separate file or
+ separated by a comment line on the current connection.
+ Syntax: <col>:<regexp>:<default>:<fn>
+
+
<col>
+ The column number to return, starting at 1 with the date.
+ If the column is enclosed in double quotes, then it is a fix text,
+ not a column nuber.
+
<regexp>
+ If present, return only lines containing the regexp. Case sensitive.
+
+
<default>
+ If no values were found and the default value is set, then return
+ one line containing the from value and this default. We need this
+ feature as gnuplot aborts if a dataset has no value at all.
+
+
<fn>
+ One of the following:
+
+
int
+ Extract the integer at the beginning og the string. Used e.g.
+ for constructs like 10%
+
delta-h or delta-d
+ Return the delta of the values for a given hour or a given day.
+ Used if the column contains a counter, as is the case for the
+ KS300 rain column.
+
everything else
+ The string is evaluated as a perl expression. @fld is the
+ current line splitted by spaces. Note: The string/perl
+ expression cannot contain spaces, as the part after the space
+ will be considered as the next column_spec.
+
+
+
+
+ Example:
+
get outlog out-2008.log - 2008-01-01 2008-01-08 4:IR:int: 9:IR::
+
+
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+
+
+
+
archivecmd / archivedir / nrarchive
+ When a new FileLog file is opened, the FileLog archiver wil be called.
+ This happens only, if the name of the logfile has changed (due to
+ time-specific wildcards, see the FileLog
+ section), and there is a new entry to be written into the file.
+
+
+ If the attribute archivecmd is specified, then it will be started as a
+ shell command (no enclosing " is needed), and each % in the command
+ will be replaced with the name of the old logfile.
+
+ If this attribute is not set, but nrarchive and/or archivecmd are set,
+ then nrarchive old logfiles are kept along the current one while older
+ ones are moved to archivedir (or deleted if archivedir is not set).
+
logtype
+ Used by the pgm2 webfrontend to offer gnuplot/SVG images made from the
+ logs. The string is made up of tokens separated by comma (,), each
+ token specifies a different gnuplot program. The token may contain a
+ colon (:), the part before the colon defines the name of the program,
+ the part after is the string displayed in the web frontend. Currently
+ following types of gnuplot programs are implemented:
+
+
fs20
+ Plots on as 1 and off as 0. The corresponding filelog definition
+ for the device fs20dev is:
+ define fslog FileLog log/fs20dev-%Y-%U.log fs20dev
+
+
fht
+ Plots the measured-temp/desired-temp/actuator lines. The
+ corresponding filelog definitions (for the FHT device named
+ fht1) looks like:
+ define fhtlog1 FileLog log/fht1-%Y-%U.log fht1:.*(temp|actuator).*
+
+
+
temp4rain10
+ Plots the temperature and rain (per hour and per day) of a
+ ks300. The corresponding filelog definitions (for the KS300
+ device named ks300) looks like:
+ define ks300log FileLog log/fht1-%Y-%U.log ks300:.*H:.*
+
+
hum6wind8
+ Plots the humidity and wind values of a
+ ks300. The corresponding filelog definition is the same as
+ above, both programs evaluate the same log.
+
+
text
+ Shows the logfile as it is (plain text). Not gnuplot definition
+ is needed.
+
+ FHEM2FHEM is a helper module to connect separate fhem installations.
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> FHEM2FHEM <host>[:<portnr>][:SSL] [LOG:regexp|RAW:devicename] {portpassword}
+
+
+
+ Connect to the remote fhem on <host>. <portnr> is a telnet
+ port on the remote fhem, defaults to 7072. The optional :SSL suffix is
+ needed, if the remote fhem configured SSL for this telnet port. In this case
+ the IO::Socket::SSL perl module must be installed for the local host too.
+
+ Note: if the remote fhem is on a separate host, the telnet port on the remote
+ fhem musst be specified with the global option.
+
+ The next parameter specifies the connection
+ type:
+
+
LOG
+ Using this type you will receive all events generated by the remote fhem,
+ just like when using the inform on command, and you
+ can use these events just like any local event for FileLog or notify.
+ The regexp will prefilter the events distributed locally, for the syntax
+ see the notify definition.
+ Drawbacks: the remote devices wont be created locally, so list wont
+ show them and it is not possible to manipulate them from the local
+ fhem. It is possible to create a device with the same name on both fhem
+ instances, but if both of them receive the same event (e.g. because both
+ of them have a CUL attached), then all associated FileLogs/notifys will be
+ triggered twice.
+
+
RAW
+ By using this type the local fhem will receive raw events from the remote
+ fhem device devicename, just like if it would be attached to the
+ local fhem.
+ Drawback: only devices using the Dispatch function (CUL, FHZ, CM11,
+ SISPM, RFXCOM, TCM, TRX, TUL) generate raw messages, and you must create a
+ FHEM2FHEM instance for each remote device.
+ devicename must exist on the local
+ fhem server too with the same name and same type as the remote device, but
+ with the device-node "none", so it is only a dummy device.
+ All necessary attributes (e.g. rfmode if the remote
+ CUL is in HomeMatic mode) must also be set for the local device.
+ Do not reuse a real local device, else duplicate filtering (see dupTimeout)
+ won't work correctly.
+
+
+ The last parameter specifies an optional portpassword, if the remote server
+ activated portpassword.
+
+ Examples:
+
+ define ds1 FHEM2FHEM 192.168.178.22:7072 LOG:.*
+
+ define RpiCUL CUL none 0000
+ define ds2 FHEM2FHEM 192.168.178.22:7072 RAW:RpiCUL
+ and on the RPi (192.168.178.22):
+ rename CUL_0 RpiCUL
+
+ Implements an additional entry "Floorplans" to your fhem menu, leading to a userinterface without fhem-menu, rooms or devicelists.
+ Devices can be displayed at a defined coordinate on the screen, usually with a clickable icon allowing to switch
+ the device on or off by clicking on it. A background-picture can be used - use e.g. a floorplan of your house, or any picture.
+ Use floorplanstyle.css to adapt the representation.
+ Step-by-step setup guides are available in
+ english and
+ german.
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> FLOORPLAN
+
+
+ Hint: Store fp_<name>.png in your image folder (www/images/default , www/pgm2 or FHEM) to use it as background picture.
+ A userattr fp_<name> will be created automatically if it does not exist yet.
+
+
top = screen-position, pixels from top of screen
+
left = screen-position, pixels from left of screen
+
style =
+
+
0 icon/state only
+
1 devicename and icon/state
+
2 devicename, icon/state and commands
+
3 device-reading and optional description
+
4 S300TH-specific, displays temperature above humidity
+
5 icon/state and commands
+
6 device-reading, reading-timestamp and optional description
+
+
description will be displayed instead of the original devicename
+
+ Examples:
+
+
+
attr lamp1 fp_Groundfloor 100,100
#display lamp1 with icon only at screenposition 100,100
+
attr lamp2 fp_Groundfloor 100,140,1,Art-Deco
#display lamp2 with description 'Art-Deco-Light' at 100,140
+
attr lamp2 fp_FirstFloor 130,100,1
#display the same device at different positions on other floorplans
+
attr myFHT fp_Groundfloor 300,20,10,Temperature
#display given Text + FHT-temperature
+
+
+ Hint: no blanks between parameters
+
+
+
fp_arrange
+ Activates the "arrange mode" which shows an additional menu on the screen,
+ allowing to place devices easily on the screen.
+ Example:
+
+ attr Groundfloor fp_arrange 1
+ attr Groundfloor fp_arrange detail #displays the devices with infos room, type, alias
+ attr Groundfloor fp_arrange WEB #activates arrange mode for frontend-device WEB only
+
+
+
stylesheet
+ Explicitely sets your personal stylesheet for the floorplan. This overrides the standard stylesheet.
+ The standard stylesheet for floorplans is floorplanstyle.css. If the stylesheetPrefix is set for the corresponding FHEMWEB instance, this same
+ stylesheetPrefix is also prepended to the stylesheet for floorplans.
+ All stylesheets must be stored in the stylesheet subfolder of the fhem filesystem hierarchy. Store your personal
+ stylesheet along with floorplanstyle.css in the same folder.
+ Example:
+
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/95_PachLog.pm b/FHEM/95_PachLog.pm
index 4186b5d76..89e1a235a 100644
--- a/FHEM/95_PachLog.pm
+++ b/FHEM/95_PachLog.pm
@@ -285,3 +285,69 @@ sub ReadingToNumber($$)
return $in
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
PachLog
+
+ The PachLog-Module Logs SensorData like (temperature and humidity) to www.pachube.com.
+
+ Note: this module needs the HTTP::Request and LWP::UserAgent perl modules.
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> PachLog <Pachube-API-Key>
+
+ <Pachube-API-Key>:
+ The Pachube-API-Key however is what you need in your code to authenticate your application's access the Pachube service.
+ Don't share this with anyone: it's just like any other password.
+ www.pachube.com
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+
+ Add a new Device for Logging to www.pachube.com
+ set <NAME> ADD <FHEM-DEVICENAME> FEED-NR:ID:READING:ID:READING
+ Example: KS300-Weather-Data
+ READINGS: temperature humidity wind rain
+ 1. Generate Input-Feed on www.pachube.com => Yout get your FEED-NR: 1234
+ 2. Add Datastreams to the Feed:
+
+
+
ID
0
temperature
+
ID
1
humidity
+
ID
2
wind
+
ID
3
rain
+
+ 3. Add the KS300 to your PachLog-Device
+ set <NAME> ADD <My-KS300> 1234:0temperature:1:humidity:2:wind:3:rain
+ Define a set of holidays. The module will try to open the file
+ <name>.holiday in the modpath/FHEM directory.
+ If entries in the holiday file match the current day, then the STATE of
+ this holiday instance displayed in the list command
+ will be set to the corresponding values, else the state is set to the text
+ none. Most probably you'll want to query this value in some perl script:
+ see Value() in the perl section or the global attribute
+ holiday2we. The file will be reread once
+ every night, to compute the value for the current day, and by each get
+ command (see below).
+
+
+ Holiday file definition:
+ The file may contain comments (beginning with #) or empty lines.
+ Significant lines begin with a number (type) and contain some space
+ separated words, depending on the type. The different types are:
+
5
+ Date relative, weekday fixed holiday. Arguments: <nth>
+ <weekday> <month> <day> < holiday-name>
+ Note that while +0 or -0 as offsets are not forbidden, their behaviour
+ is undefined in the sense that it might change without notice.
+ Examples:
+
+ 5 -1 Wed 11 23 Buss und Bettag (first Wednesday before Nov, 23rd)
+ 5 1 Mon 01 31 First Monday after Jan, 31st (1st Monday in February)
+
+
+
+ See also he.holiday in the contrib directory for official holidays in the
+ german country of Hessen, and by.holiday for the Bavarian definition.
+
+
+
+
+ Set
N/A
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get <name> <MM-DD>
+ get <name> yesterday
+ get <name> today
+ get <name> tomorrow
+
+ Return the holiday name of the specified date or the text none.
+
+ CULflash <CUL-Name> <CUL-Version>
+
+ Download the CUL firmware from a nightly SVN chekout and flash the
+ hardware. Currently only the CUL is supported with its versions:
+ CUL_V2, CUL_V2_HM, CUL_V3, CUL_V4.
+ Note: dfu-programmer has to be installed in the path, this is
+ already the case with the Fritz!Box 7390 image from fhem.de
+
+ If the CUL is not yet flashed, then specify "none" as CUL-Name.
+ Example:
+
+ CULflash CUL CUL_V3
+ CULflash none CUL_V3
+
+ Note: the message "dfu-programmer: failed to release interface 0." is
+ normal on the FB7390.
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/98_JsonList.pm b/FHEM/98_JsonList.pm
index cd38aa2fa..f918c420c 100644
--- a/FHEM/98_JsonList.pm
+++ b/FHEM/98_JsonList.pm
@@ -393,3 +393,159 @@ CommandJsonList($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
jsonlist
+
+ jsonlist [<devspec>|<typespec>|ROOMS]
+
+ Returns an JSON tree of all definitions, all notify settings and all at
+ entries if no parameter is given. Can also be called via HTTP by
+ http://fhemhost:8083/fhem?cmd=jsonlist&XHR=1
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/98_PID.pm b/FHEM/98_PID.pm
index b8b94f35e..75ead8840 100644
--- a/FHEM/98_PID.pm
+++ b/FHEM/98_PID.pm
@@ -232,3 +232,84 @@ PID_setValue($)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
PID
+
+ The PID device is a loop controller, used to set the value e.g of a heating
+ valve dependent of the current and desired temperature.
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> PID sensor[:reading:regexp] actor[:cmd:min:max] [p i d]
+
+
+ sensor[:reading:regexp] specifies the sensor, which is an
+ already defined fhem device, e.g. a S300TH temperature sensor. The reading
+ and regexp fields are necessary only for unknown devices (currently CUL_WS and HMS devices are "known").
+ Reading specifies the READINGS field of the sensor, and the regexp extracts
+ the number from this field. E.g. for the complete definition for a CUL_WS
+ device is: s300th_dev:temperature:([\d\.]*)
+
+
+ actor[:cmd:min:max] specifies the actor, which is an
+ already defined fhem device, e.g. an FHT8V valve. The cmd, min and max
+ fields are necessary only for unknown devices (currently FHT8V is "known"). cmd specifies the command name for the
+ actor, min the minimum value and max the maximum value. The complete
+ definition for an FHT8V device is:fht8v_dev:valve:0:100
+
+
+ p, i and d are the parameters use to controlling, see also the this wikipedia entry.
+ The default values are around 25.5, 3 and 5.88, you probably need to tune
+ these values. They can be also changed later.
+
+
+ Examples:
+
+ define wz_pid PID wz_th wz_fht8v
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+
set <name> factors p i d
+ Set the p, i and d factors, as described above.
+
+
set <name> desired <value>
+ Set the desired value (e.g. temperature). Note: until this value is not
+ set, no command is issued.
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/98_autocreate.pm b/FHEM/98_autocreate.pm
index 00b244f2e..170554a63 100644
--- a/FHEM/98_autocreate.pm
+++ b/FHEM/98_autocreate.pm
@@ -485,3 +485,141 @@ autocreate_Attr(@)
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
autocreate
+
+
+ Automatically create not yet defined fhem devices upon reception of a message
+ generated by this device. Note: devices which are polled (like the EMEM/EMWZ
+ accessed through the EM1010PC) will NOT be automatically created.
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> autocreate
+
+
+ It makes no sense to create more than one instance of this module.
+ By defining an instance, the global attribute autoload_undefined_devices
+ is set, so that modules for unknnown devices are automatically loaded.
+ The autocreate module intercepts the UNDEFINED event generated by each
+ module, creates a device and optionally also FileLog and weblink
+ entries.
+ Note 1: devices will be created with a unique name, which contains
+ the type and a unique id for this type. When renaming
+ the device, the automatically created filelog and weblink devices
+ will also be renamed.
+ Note 2: you can disable the automatic creation by setting the
+ disable attribute, in this case only the rename
+ hook is active, and you can use the createlog
+ command to add FileLog and weblink to an already defined device.
+
autosave
+ After creating a device, automatically save the config file with the
+ command save command. Default is 1 (i.e. on), set
+ it to 0 to switch it off.
+
+
+
device_room
+ "Put" the newly created device in this room. The name can contain the
+ wildcards %TYPE and %NAME, see the example above.
+
+
+
filelog
+ Create a filelog associated with the device. The filename can contain
+ the wildcards %TYPE and %NAME, see the example above. The filelog will
+ be "put" in the same room as the device.
+
+
+
weblink
+ Create a weblink associated with the device/filelog.
+
+
+
weblink_room
+ "Put" the newly weblink in this room. The name can contain the
+ wildcards %TYPE and %NAME, see the example above.
ignoreTypes
+ This is a regexp, to ignore certain devices, e.g. you neighbours FHT.
+ You can specify more than one, with usual regexp syntax, e.g.
+ attr autocreate ignoreTypes CUL_HOERMANN.*|FHT_1234|CUL_WS_7
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ createlog
+
+ Use this command to manually add a FileLog and a weblink to an existing
+ device. E.g. if a HomeMatic device is created automatically by something
+ else then a pairing message, the model is unknown, so no plots will be
+ generated. You can set the model/subtype attribute manually, and then call
+ createlog to add the corresponding logs.
+ This command is part of the autocreate module.
+
+
+
+
+ usb
+
+ Usage:
+
+ usb scan
+ usb create
+
+ This command will scan the /dev directory for attached USB devices, and
+ will try to identify them. With the argument scan you'll get back a list
+ of fhem commands to execute, with the argument create there will be no
+ feedback, and the devices will be created instead.
+
+ Note that switching a CUL to HomeMatic mode is still has to be done
+ manually.
+
+ On Linux it will also check with the lsusb command, if unflashed CULs are
+ attached. If this is the case, it will call CULflash with the appropriate
+ parameters (or display the CULflash command if scan is specified). Only
+ one device to flash is displayed at a time.
+
+ This command is part of the autocreate module.
+
+
+ Compute additional average, minimum and maximum values for current day and
+ month.
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> average <regexp>
+
+
+ The syntax for <regexp> is the same as the
+ regexp for notify.
+ If it matches, and the event is of the form "eventname number", then this
+ module computes the daily and monthly average, maximum and minimum values
+ and generates events of the form
+
+
+ at the beginning of the next day or month respectively.
+ The current average, minimum, maximum and the cumulated values are stored
+ in the device readings.
+
+
+
+ Example:
+ # Compute the average, minimum and maximum for the temperature events of
+ # the ws1 device
+ define avg_temp_ws1 average ws1:temperature.*
+
+ # Compute the average, minimum and maximum for each temperature event
+ define avg_temp_ws1 average .*:temperature.*
+
+ # Compute the average, minimum and maximum for all temperature and humidity events
+ # Events:
+ # ws1 temperature: 22.3
+ # ws1 humidity: 67.4
+ define avg_temp_ws1 average .*:(temperature|humidity).*
+
+ # Hunt only for the humidity: take the value from the first
+ # parenthesis ($1 in perl regexp) if it is a number
+ # Event: ws1 T: 52.3 H: 67.4
+ define avg_temp_ws1 average ws1:.*H:.([-\d\.]+)
+
+ backup
+
+ The complete FHEM directory (containing the modules), the WebInterface
+ pgm2 (if installed) and the config-file will be saved into a .tar.gz
+ file by default. The file is stored with a timestamp in the
+ modpath/backup directory or to a directory
+ specified by the global attribute backupdir.
+ Note: tar and gzip must be installed to use this feature.
+
+
+ If you need to call tar with support for symlinks, you could set the
+ global attribute backupsymlink to everything
+ else as "no".
+
+
+ You could pass the backup to your own command / script by using the
+ global attribute backupcmd.
+
+
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/98_dewpoint.pm b/FHEM/98_dewpoint.pm
index 9dc51bcc5..d87e9fe74 100644
--- a/FHEM/98_dewpoint.pm
+++ b/FHEM/98_dewpoint.pm
@@ -375,3 +375,139 @@ dewpoint_dewpoint($$)
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
dewpoint
+
+ Dewpoint calculations. Offers three different ways to use dewpoint:
+
+
dewpoint
+ Compute additional event dewpoint from a sensor offering temperature and humidity.
+
fan
+ Generate a event to turn a fan on if the outside air has less water than the inside.
+
alarm
+ Generate a mold alarm if a reference temperature is lower that the current dewpoint.
+ Calculates dewpoint for device <devicename-regex> from temperature and humidity
+ and write it to a new reading named dewpoint.
+ If optional <temp_name>, <hum_name> and <new_name> is specified
+ then read temperature from reading <temp_name>, humidity from reading <hum_name>
+ and write the calculated dewpoint to reading <new_name>.
+ If <temp_name> is T then use temperature from state T: H:, add <new_name> to the state.
+
+
+
+ Example:
+ # Compute the dewpoint for the temperature/humidity
+ # events of the temp1 device and generate reading dewpoint.
+ define dew_temp1 dewpoint dewpoint temp1
+ define dew_temp1 dewpoint dewpoint temp1 temperature humidity dewpoint
+
+ # Compute the dewpoint for the temperature/humidity
+ # events of all devices offering temperature and humidity
+ # and generate reading dewpoint.
+ define dew_all dewpoint dewpoint .*
+ define dew_all dewpoint dewpoint .* temperature humidity dewpoint
+
+ # Compute the dewpoint for the temperature/humidity
+ # events of the device Aussen_1 offering temperature and humidity
+ # and insert is into STATE.
+ define dew_state dewpoint dewpoint Aussen_1 T H D
+
+ # Compute the dewpoint for the temperature/humidity
+ # events of all devices offering temperature and humidity
+ # and insert the result into the STATE.
+ # Example STATE: "T: 10 H: 62.5" will change to
+ # "T: 10 H: 62.5 D: 3.2"
+ define dew_state dewpoint dewpoint .* T H D
+
+
+ May be used to turn an fan on or off if the outside air has less water.
+
+
+ Generate event "fan: on" if (dewpoint of <devicename-outside>) + <diff_temp> is lower
+ than dewpoint of <devicename> and temperature of <devicename-outside> is >= min-temp
+ and reading "fan" was not already "on". The event will be generated for <devicename>. Parameter <diff-temp> is optional
+
Generate event "fan: off": else and if reading "fan" was not already "off".
+
+
+
+
+ Example:
+ # Generate event "fan: on" when dewpoint of Aussen_1 is first
+ # time lower than basement_tempsensor and outside temperature is >= 0
+ # and change it to "fan: off" is this condition changes.
+ # Set a switch on/off (fan_switch) depending on the state.
+ define dew_fan1 dewpoint fan basement_tempsensor Aussen_1 0
+ define dew_fan1_on notify basement_tempsensor.*fan:.*on set fan_switch on
+ define dew_fan1_off notify basement_tempsensor.*fan:.*off set fan_switch off
+
+
+ Generate a mold alarm if a reference temperature is lower that the current dewpoint.
+
+
+ Generate reading/event "alarm: on" if temperature of <devicename-reference> - <diff-temp> is lower
+ than dewpoint of <devicename> and reading "alarm" was not already "on". The event will be generated for <devicename>.
+
Generate reading/event "alarm: off" if temperature of <devicename-reference> - <diff-temp> is higher than dewpoint of <devicename> and reading "alarm" was not already "off".
+
+
+
+
+ Example:
+ # Using a wall temperature sensor (wallsensor) and a temp/hum sensor
+ # (roomsensor) to alarm if the temperature of the wall is lower than
+ # the dewpoint of the air. In this case the water of the air will
+ # condense on the wall because the wall is cold.
+ # Set a switch on (alarm_siren) if alarm is on using notify.
+ define dew_alarm1 dewpoint alarm roomsensor wallsensor 0
+ define roomsensor_alarm_on notify roomsensor.*fan:.*on set alarm_siren on
+ define roomsensor_alarm_off notify roomsensor.*fan:.*off set alarm_siren off
+
+ # If you do not have a temperature sensor in/on the wall, you may also
+ # compare the rooms dewpoint to the temperature of the same or another
+ # inside sensor. Alarm is temperature is 5 degrees colder than the
+ # inside dewpointinside.
+ define dev_alarm2 dewpoint alarm roomsensor roomsensor 5
+
+
setList
+ Space separated list of commands, which will be returned upon "set name ?",
+ so the FHEMWEB frontend can construct a dropdown and offer on/off
+ switches. Example: attr dummyName setList on off
+
+
+
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/98_structure.pm b/FHEM/98_structure.pm
index e37669000..898a40ca4 100755
--- a/FHEM/98_structure.pm
+++ b/FHEM/98_structure.pm
@@ -370,3 +370,101 @@ structure_Attr($@)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
+ The structure device is used to organize/structure devices in order to
+ set groups of them at once (e.g. switching everything off in a house).
+
+ The list of attached devices can be modified through the addstruct /
+ delstruct commands. Each attached device will get the attribute
+ <struct_type>=<name> when it is added to the list, and the
+ attribute will be deleted if the device is deleted from the structure.
+
+ The structure devices can also be added to a structure, e.g. you can have
+ a building consisting of levels which consists of rooms of devices.
+
+
+ Example:
+
+
define kitchen structure room lamp1 lamp2
+
addstruct kitchen TYPE=FS20
+
delstruct kitchen lamp1
+
define house structure building kitchen living
+
set house off
+
+
+
+ The backward propagated status change from the devices to this structure
+ works in two different ways.
+ Attribute clientstate_behavior
+
absolute
+
+ The structure status will changed to the common device status of all defined devices
+ to this structure if all devices are identical. Otherwise the structure status is "undefined".
+
+
relative
+
+ You have to set the attribute "clientstate_priority" with all states of
+ the defined devices to this structure in descending order. Each group are
+ delemited by space. Each entry of one group are delimited by "pipe"
+
attr house clientstate_priority Any_On|An All_Off|Aus
+
+
+ To group more devices from different types of devices you can define
+ a clientstate redefining on each device. For example the Reading "A" of device door
+ is "open" or "closed" and the state of device lamp1 should redefine from
+ "on" to "An" and "off" to "Aus"
+ Example:
+
+
define door OWSWITCH <ROMID>
+
define lamp1 dummy
+
attr lamp1 cmdlist on off
+
define kitchen structure struct_kitchen lamp1 door
+ Every set command is propagated to the attached devices. Exception: if an
+ attached devices has an attribute structexcluse, and the attribute value
+ matches (as a regexp) the name of the current structure.
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get is not supported through a structure device.
+
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+
structexclude
+ exclude the device from set operations, see the set command above.
+
+
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/FHEM/98_telnet.pm b/FHEM/98_telnet.pm
index 0b0bad45c..14857cad8 100644
--- a/FHEM/98_telnet.pm
+++ b/FHEM/98_telnet.pm
@@ -200,3 +200,101 @@ telnet_Undef($$)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
telnet
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> telnet <portNumber> [global]
+
+
+ Listen on the TCP/IP port <portNumber> for incoming
+ connections. If the second parameter global is not specified,
+ the server will only listen to localhost connections.
+
+
+ To use IPV6, specify the portNumber as IPV6:<number>, in this
+ case the perl module IO::Socket:INET6 will be requested.
+ On Linux you may have to install it with cpan -i IO::Socket::INET6 or
+ apt-get libio-socket-inet6-perl; OSX and the FritzBox-7390 perl already has
+ this module.
+
+
+ Note: The old global attribute port is automatically converted to a
+ telnet instance with the name telnetPort. The global allowfrom attibute is
+ lost in this conversion.
+
password
+ Specify a password, which has to be entered as the very first string
+ after the connection is established. If the argument is enclosed in {},
+ then it will be evaluated, and the $password variable will be set to
+ the password entered. If the return value is true, then the password
+ will be accepted. If thies parameter is specified, fhem sends telnet
+ IAC requests to supress echo while entering the password.
+ Also all returned lines are terminated with \r\n.
+ Example:
+
+ attr tPort password secret
+ attr tPort password {use FritzBoxUtils;;FB_checkPw("localhost","$password") }
+
+
+
+
+
globalpassword
+ Just like the attribute password, but a password will only required for
+ non-local connections.
+
+
+
+
SSL
+ Enable SSL encryption of the connection, see the description here on generating the needed SSL certificates. To
+ connect to such a port use one of the following commands:
+
+ update [development|stable] [<file>|check|fhem|full] [force]
+
+ The installed fhem distribution and its installed extensions (just like the
+ webGUI PGM2) are updated via this command from the online repository. The
+ locally installed files will be checked against the online repository and
+ will be updated in case the files online are in a newer version. Modules
+ which are used while the update is in progress will be restarted in the new
+ version after the update has finished.
+
+
+ The new update function will process more advanced distribution information
+ as well as control commands for updating, removing or renaming existing files.
+ New file structures can also be set up by the new control command files.
+ The new update process will exclusively work with the file path which is
+ given by the global attribute "modpath" except for the fhem.pl file. The user
+ decides whether to use a stable, a developer- or a experimental-rated version
+ of fhem (experimental is not yet implemented).
+
+
+ Furthermore, the use of packages is supported just like in a manual installation
+ of fhem. On the moment this only refers to FHEM including PGM2 (FHEMWEB), others
+ may follow up. By using the update in this way, only files which are acutally
+ used will be updated.
+
+
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+ This is a placeholder used with webpgm2 to be able to integrate links
+ into it, and to be able to put more than one gnuplot/SVG picture on one
+ page. It has no set or get methods.
+
+ Examples:
+
Normally you won't have to define fileplot weblinks manually, as
+ FHEMWEB makes it easy for you, just plot a logfile (see
+ logtype) and convert it to weblink. Now you
+ can group these weblinks by putting them into rooms. If you convert
+ the current logfile to a weblink, it will always refer to the current
+ file, even if its name changes regularly (and not the one you
+ originally specified).
+
+
+
+
+ Set
N/A
+
+
+ Get
N/A
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+
+
htmlattr
+ HTML attributes to be used for link, image and iframe type of links. E.g.:
+
+
+ define yw weblink wl_im1 iframe http://weather.yahooapis.com/forecastrss?w=650272&u=c
+ attr yw weblink htmlattr width="480" height="560"
+
+
label
+ Double-Colon separated list of values. The values will be used to replace
+ <L#> type of strings in the .gplot file, with # beginning at 1
+ (<L1>, <L2>, etc.). Each value will be evaluated as a perl
+ expression, so you have access e.g. to the Value functions.
+
+ If the plotmode is gnuplot-scroll or SVG, you can also use the min, max,
+ avg, cnt, sum, currval (last value) and currdate (last date) values of the
+ individual curves, by accessing the corresponding values from the data
+ hash, see the example below:
+
+
+ perl functions, to be used in at or FS20 on-till commands.
+ First you should set the longitude and latitude global attributes to the
+ exact longitude and latitude values (see e.g. maps.google.com for the exact
+ values, which should be in the form of a floating point value). The default
+ value is Frankfurt am Main, Germany.
+
+ The default altitude ($defaultaltit in SUNRISE_EL.pm) defines the sunrise/sunset
+ for Civil twilight (i.e. one can no longer read outside without artificial
+ illumination), which differs from sunrise/sunset times found on different
+ websites. See perldoc "DateTime::Event::Sunrise" for alternatives.
+
+
+ sunrise()/sunset() returns the absolute time of the next sunrise/sunset,
+ adding 24 hours if the next event is tomorrow, to use it in the timespec of
+ an at device or for the on-till command for FS20 devices.
+
+ sunrise_rel()/sunset_rel() returns the relative time to the next
+ sunrise/sunset.
+ sunrise_abs()/sunset_abs() return the absolute time of the corresponding
+ event today (no 24 hours added).
+ All functions take up to three arguments:
+
+
The first specifies an offset (in seconds), which will be added to the
+ event.
+
The second and third specify min and max values (format: "HH:MM").
+
+
+ isday() can be used in some notify or at commands to check if the sun is up or
+ down.
+
+ Optionally, for all functions you can set first argument which defines a horizon value
+ which then is used instead of the $defaultaltit in SUNRISE_EL.pm.
+ Possible values are: "REAL", "CIVIL", "NAUTIC", "ASTRONOMIC" or a
+ positive or negative number preceded by "HORIZON="
+ REAL is 0, CIVIL is -6, NATUIC is -12, ASTRONOMIC is -18 degrees above horizon.
+ Example:
+
+
+ # When sun is 6 degrees below horizon - same as sunrise();
+ sunrise("CIVIL");
+
+ # When sun is 3 degrees below (-3 above) horizon (Between real and civil sunset)
+ sunset("HORIZON=-3");
+
+ # When sun is 1 degree above horizon
+ sunset("HORIZON=1");
+
+ # Switch lamp1 on at real sunset, not before 18:00 and not after 21:00
+ define a15 at *{sunset("REAL",0,"18:00","21:00")} set lamp1 on
+
+
+
+ Define
N/A
+
+ Set
N/A
+
+ Get
N/A
+
+ Attributes
+
+
latitude
+ If set, this latitude is used to calculate sunset/sunrise
+ Notation need to be in decimal format (for example Berlin = 52.666)
+ As default Frankfurt/Main, Germany (50.112) is used.
+
+
+
longitude
+ If set, this longitude is used to calculate sunset/sunrise
+ Notation need to be in decimal format (for example Berlin = 13.400)
+ As default Frankfurt/Main, Germany (8.686) is used.
+
+ Note: these are global attributes, e.g.
+
+ attr global latitude 50.112
+ attr global longitude 8.686
+
+ Luxtronik 2.0 is a heating controller used in Alpha Innotec and Siemens Novelan Heatpumps.
+ It can be directly integrated into a local area network (Ethernet port).
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/contrib/91_DbLog.pm b/contrib/91_DbLog.pm
index 9d4b32ac9..738f46d66 100755
--- a/contrib/91_DbLog.pm
+++ b/contrib/91_DbLog.pm
@@ -95,3 +95,79 @@ DbDo($)
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
DbLog
+
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> DbLog <configfilename> <regexp>
+
+
+ Log events to a database. The database connection is defined in
+ <configfilename> (see sample configuration file
+ db.conf). The configuration is stored in a separate file
+ to avoid storing the password in the main configuration file and to have it
+ visible in the output of the list command.
+
+
+ You must have 93_DbLog.pm in the FHEM subdirectory
+ to make this work. Additionally, the modules DBI and
+ DBD::<dbtype> need to be installed (use
+ cpan -i <module> if your distribution does not have it).
+
+ Sample code to create a MySQL database is in fhemdb_create.sql.
+ The database contains two tables: current and
+ history. The latter contains all events whereas the former only
+ contains the last event for any given reading and device.
+ The columns have the following meaning:
+
+
TIMESTAMP: timestamp of event, e.g. 2007-12-30 21:45:22
+
DEVICE: device name, e.g. Wetterstation
+
TYPE: device type, e.g. KS300
+
EVENT: event specification as full string,
+ e.g. humidity: 71 (%)
+
READING: name of reading extracted from event,
+ e.g. humidity
+
VALUE: actual reading extracted from event,
+ e.g. 71
+
UNIT: unit extracted from event, e.g. %
+
+ The content of VALUE is optimized for automated post-processing, e.g.
+ yes is translated to 1.
+
+ The current values can be retrieved by means of the perl script
+ fhemdb_get.pl. Its output is adapted to what a
+ Cacti data input method expects.
+ Call fhemdb_get.pl without parameters to see the usage
+ information.
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/contrib/98_HOL.pm b/contrib/98_HOL.pm
index 4395a7b28..7e5898b6e 100644
--- a/contrib/98_HOL.pm
+++ b/contrib/98_HOL.pm
@@ -134,3 +134,42 @@ sub HOL_getHolidaySwitchDeviceNames() {
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
HOL
+
+
The HOL module attempts to simulate your presence using your FHEM devices.
+ Device support: All devices that are able to handle on-for-timer and on commands.
+ Currently the device can be found within the contrib/ folder.
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> HOL
+
+ To make the module find the devices you want to switch in holiday mode,
+ you have to specify a global user attribute (attr global userattr holidaySwitchTime).
+ The attribute tells the HOL module how long each device should be switched on.
+ If you want to switch a device in your FHEM configuration, just add this attribute as device attribute
+ with your defined duration.
+ When being switched to on, the module chooses a random defined device
+ having the holidaySwitchTime attribute and trigger it to on-for-timer.
+ After the on-timespan, this device is switched to off and another random one triggered to on-for-timer.
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+
on
+
off
+
+
+
+
+=end html
+=cut
diff --git a/contrib/99_dumpdef.pm b/contrib/99_dumpdef.pm
index d95bf0d3f..c21d4b01f 100644
--- a/contrib/99_dumpdef.pm
+++ b/contrib/99_dumpdef.pm
@@ -93,3 +93,49 @@ sub Commanddumpdef($)
return $r;
}
1;
+
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
-Fhem is mainly used for home automation, but it is suitable for other tasks
-too, where notification, timers and logging plays an important role.
-
-
-It supports different hardware devices to interface with certain protocols
-(e.g. FHZ1000 to interface FS20 and HMS, CM11 to access X10), and logical
-devices like FS20 or FHT to digest the messages for a certain device type using
-this protocol.
-
-
-Fhem is modular. The different devices are represented through modules which
-implement certain functions (e.g. define, get, set). Even seemingly integral
-parts of fhem like triggers (notify) and timers (at) are implemented this way, giving the possibility to
-replace/extend this functionality.
-
-Fhem is controlled through readable / ascii commands, which are specified in
-files (e.g. the configuration file), or issued over a TCP/IP connection, either
-directly in a telnet session, with a fhem.pl in client mode or from one of the
-web frontends.
-
-When starting the server you have to specify a configuration file:
-
- fhem.pl ~/.fhem
-
-
-
-A minimal configuration file:
- attr global logfile /tmp/fhem.log
- attr global statefile /tmp/fhem.save
- attr global verbose 3
- attr global port 7072
- attr global modpath /usr/share/fhem
- define FHZ FHZ /dev/tts/USB0
-
- define lamp FS20 8765 01
-
- For other configuration files see the examples subdirectory.
-
-
-TCP/IP communication with fhem can either happen in a "session" (via
-telnet) or single client command (via fhem.pl). Example:
-
-There are three types of commands: "fhem" commands (described in this
-document), shell commands (they must be enclosed in double quotes ") and perl
-expressions (enclosed in curly brackets {}). shell commands or perl expressions
-are needed for complex at or notify
-arguments, but can also issued as a "normal" command.
-
-E.g. the following three commands all do the same when issued from a telnet
-prompt:
-
- set lamp off
- "fhem.pl 7072 "set lamp off""
- {fhem("set lamp off")}
-
-
-
-Shell commands will be executed in the background, perl expressions and
-fhem commands will be executed in the main "thread". In order to make perl
-expressions easier to write, some special functions and variables are
-available. See the section Perl special for a description.
-To trigger fhem commands from a shell script (this is the "other way round"),
-use the client form of fhem.pl (described above).
-
-
-Multiple fhem commands are separated by semicolon (;). In order to use semicolon
-in perl code or shell programs, they have to be escaped by the double semicolon
-(;;). See the Notes section of the notify
-chapter on command parameters and escape rules.
-
-E.g. the following first command switches Lamp1 off at 07:00 and Lamp2
-immediately (at the point of definition), the second one switches both lamps
-off at 07:00.
-
- define lampoff at 07:00 set Lamp1 off; set Lamp2 off
- define lampoff at 07:00 set Lamp1 off;; set Lamp2 off
-
-
-
-
-Commands can be either typed in plain, or read from a file (e.g. the
-configuration file at startup). The commands are either executed directly, or
-later if they are arguments to the at and notify fhem commands.
-
-
-A line ending with \ will be concatenated with the next one, so long lines
-(e.g. multiple perl commands) can be split in multiple lines. Some web fronteds
-(e.g. webpgm2) make editing of multiline commands transparent for you (i.e. there is no need for \) .
-
-
-
-
-
-
Device specification (devspec)
-
- The commands
- attr,
- deleteattr,
- delete,
- get,
- list,
- set,
- setstate,
- trigger
- can take a more complex device specification as argument, which will be
- expanded to a list of devices. A device specification (short devspec) can be:
-
-
a single device name. This is the most common case.
-
a list of devices, separated by comma (,)
-
a range of devices, separated by dash (-)
-
a regular expression, if the the spec contains on e of the following
- characters: ^*[]$
-
an attribute of the device, followed by an equal sign (=) and then a
- regexp for this attribute. As attribute you can specify either attributes
- set with the attr command or one of the "internal" attributes DEF, STATE
- and TYPE.
-
- Example:
-
- set lamp1 on
- set lamp1,lamp2,lamp3 on
- set lamp[1-3] on
- set lamp.* on
- set lamp1-lamp3 on
- set lamp1-lamp3,lamp3 on
- set room=kitchen off
- list disabled=
- list TYPE=FS20
-
- Notes:
-
-
first the spec is separated by komma, then the range or the regular
- expression operations are executed.
-
if there is a device which exactly corresponds to the spec, then
- no special processing is done.
-
the returned list can contain the same device more than once, so
- "set lamp1-lamp3,lamp3 on" switches lamp3 twice.
-
for more complex structuring demands see the
- structure device.
-
-
-
-
-
?, help
-
- ?
- help
-
- Get a list of all commands and short description for each one
-
-
-
-
attr
-
- attr <devspec> <attrname> [<value>]
-
- Set an attribute for a device defined by define.
- You can define your own attributes too to use them in other applications.
-
- Use "attr <name> ?" to get a list of possible attributes.
- See the Device specification section for details on
- <devspec>.
-
-
- Attributes used by all devices:
-
-
-
comment
- Add an arbitrary comment.
-
-
alias
- Used by FHEMWEB to display a device with another name e.g. when using
- special characters/spaces not accepted by device definition.
-
-
room
- Filter/group devices. Recognized by web-pgm2 and web-pgm3. A device
- can appear in more than one room, in this case the rooms have to be
- specified comma-separated.
- Devices in the room hidden will not appear in the web output, or set
- the FHEMWEB attribute to selectively disable
- rooms for certain FHEMWEB instances.
-
-
-
-
group
- Group devices. Recognized by web-pgm2 (module FHEMWEB), it makes
- devices in the same group appear in the same box).
- This is used to further group
- devices together. A device can appear in more than one group, in this
- case the groups have to be specified comma-separated.
- If this attribute is not set then the device type is used as the
- grouping attribute.
-
-
-
-
showtime
- Used in the webfrontend pgm2 to show the time of last activity
- instead of the state in the summary view. Useful e.g. for FS20 PIRI
- devices.
-
-
-
The following attributes are honored by the modules that make use
- of the standardized readings updating mechanism in fhem.pl. Check the modules
- Attributes list if you want to know if it is supporting it.
-
-
-
-
event-on-update-reading
- If not set, every update of any reading creates an event, which e.g. is handled
- by notify or FileLog. The attribute takes
- a comma-separated list of readings. If set, only updates of the listed readings create
- events.
-
-
-
-
event-on-change-reading
- The attribute takes a comma-separated list of readings. If set, only changes of the listed readings create events. In other words, if a reading listed here is updated with the new value
- identical to the old value, no event is created.
-
-
- The precedence of event-on-update-reading and event-on-change-reading is as follows:
-
-
If both attributes are not set, any update of any reading of the device creates an event.
-
If any of the attributes is set, no events occur for updates or changes of readings
- not listed in any of the attributes.
-
If a reading is listed in event-on-update-reading, an update of the reading creates an
- event no matter whether the reading is also listed in event-on-change-reading.
-
-
-
-
-
- Device specific attributes are documented in the corresponding device section.
-
-
- Examples:
-
- setdefaultattr [<attrname> [<value>]]
-
- Add a default attribute. Each device defined from now on will receive
- this attribute. If no attrname is specified, then the default attribute
- list will be deleted.
-
-
- Example to set the attribute "room kitchen" and "loglevel 4" to
- each of the lamps:
-
There is no way to delete a single default-attribute from the list
-
-
-
-
-
-
backup
-
- backup
-
- The complete FHEM directory (containing the modules), the WebInterface
- pgm2 (if installed) and the config-file will be saved into a .tar.gz
- file by default. The file is stored with a timestamp in the
- modpath/backup directory or to a directory
- specified by the global attribute backupdir.
- Note: tar and gzip must be installed to use this feature.
-
-
- If you need to call tar with support for symlinks, you could set the
- global attribute backupsymlink to everything
- else as "no".
-
-
- You could pass the backup to your own command / script by using the
- global attribute backupcmd.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
define
-
- define <name> <type> <type-specific>
-
- Define a device. You need devices if you want to manipulate them (e.g.
- set on/off), and the logfile is also more readable if it contains e.g.
- "lamp off" instead of "Device 5673, Button 00, Code 00 (off)".
- Use "define <name> ?" to get a list of possible types.
- After definition, the global event "DEFINED" will be generated, see the
- notify section for details.
-
-
- Each device takes different additional arguments at definition, see the
- corresponding device section for details.
-
-
-
-
-
-
deleteattr
-
- deleteattr <devspec> [<attrname>]
-
- Delete either a single attribute (see the attr command)
- or all attributes for a device (if no <attrname> is defined).
- See the Device specification section for details on
- <devspec>.
-
-
- Examples:
-
- delete <devspec>
-
- Delete something created with the define command.
- See the Device specification section for details on
- <devspec>.
- After deletion, the global event "DELETED" will be generated, see the notify
- section for details.
- Examples:
-
- delete lamp
-
-
-
-
-
-
get
-
- get <devspec> <type-specific>
-
- Ask a value directly from the device, and wait for an answer. In general, you
- can get a list of possible parameters by
-
- get <device> ?
-
- See the Device specification section for details on
- <devspec>.
-
- Each device has different get parameters, see the corresponding device
- section for details.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
getstate
-
- getstate <devspec>
-
- Output a short space seperated status for <devspec>. It is useful for
- monitoring the device in e.g. Cacti.
- Examples:
-
- Note: to use this command copy the file contrib/getstate/99_getstate.pm into
- your FHEM directory.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
include
-
- include <filename>
-
- Read in the file, and process every line as a fhem command. Makes
- configuration files more modular and enables to reread them.
-
-
-
-
-
inform
-
- inform {on|off|timer|raw} [regexp]
-
- If set to on, and a device state changes, send a notification to the current
- client. This command can be used by other programs/modules to receive a
- notification.
- The option timer prepends a timerstamp to the line. Note: this command is
- a nice way to check which events are generated, to help you when creating
- notify or FileLog entries.
-
-
-
-
-
-
jsonlist
-
- jsonlist [<devspec>|<typespec>|ROOMS]
-
- Returns an JSON tree of all definitions, all notify settings and all at
- entries if no parameter is given. Can also be called via HTTP by
- http://fhemhost:8083/fhem?cmd=jsonlist&XHR=1
-
- update [development|stable] [<file>|check|fhem|full] [force]
-
- The installed fhem distribution and its installed extensions (just like the
- webGUI PGM2) are updated via this command from the online repository. The
- locally installed files will be checked against the online repository and
- will be updated in case the files online are in a newer version. Modules
- which are used while the update is in progress will be restarted in the new
- version after the update has finished.
-
-
- The new update function will process more advanced distribution information
- as well as control commands for updating, removing or renaming existing files.
- New file structures can also be set up by the new control command files.
- The new update process will exclusively work with the file path which is
- given by the global attribute "modpath" except for the fhem.pl file. The user
- decides whether to use a stable, a developer- or a experimental-rated version
- of fhem (experimental is not yet implemented).
-
-
- Furthermore, the use of packages is supported just like in a manual installation
- of fhem. On the moment this only refers to FHEM including PGM2 (FHEMWEB), others
- may follow up. By using the update in this way, only files which are acutally
- used will be updated.
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
- CULflash <CUL-Name> <CUL-Version>
-
- Download the CUL firmware from a nightly SVN chekout and flash the
- hardware. Currently only the CUL is supported with its versions:
- CUL_V2, CUL_V2_HM, CUL_V3, CUL_V4.
- Note: dfu-programmer has to be installed in the path, this is
- already the case with the Fritz!Box 7390 image from fhem.de
-
- If the CUL is not yet flashed, then specify "none" as CUL-Name.
- Example:
-
- CULflash CUL CUL_V3
- CULflash none CUL_V3
-
- Note: the message "dfu-programmer: failed to release interface 0." is
- normal on the FB7390.
-
-
-
-
-
list
-
- list [devspec] [value]
-
- Output a list of all definitions, all notify settings and all at
- entries. This is one of the few commands which return a string in a
- normal case.
- See the Device specification section for details on
- <devspec>.
-
- If value is specified, then output this property (like DEF, TYPE, etc) or
- reading (actuator, measured-temp) for all devices from the devspec.
-
- If specifying name, then a detailed status for name
- will be displayed, e.g.:
-
fhem> list fl
-
- Internals:
- CODE 5102
- DEF 5102
- NAME fl
- NR 15
- STATE measured-temp: 21.1 (Celsius)
- TYPE FHT
- IODev FHZ
- Attributes:
- room Heizung
- Readings:
- 2006-11-02 09:45:56 actuator 19%
- [...]
-
-
-
-
-
-
modify
-
- modify <name> <type-dependent-options>
-
-
- Used to modify some definitions. Useful for changing some at or notify definitions. If specifying
- one argument to an at type definition, only the time part will be changed. In
- case of a notify type definition, only the regex part will be changed. All
- other values (state, attributes, etc) will remain intact.
-
- Example:
-
- define lampon at 19:00 set lamp on
- modify lampon *19:00
- modify lampon 19:00 set lamp on-for-timer 16
-
-
-
-
-
quit
-
- quit
-
- If used in a TCP/IP session, terminate the client session.
- If used in a script, terminate the parsing of the current script.
-
- Example:
-
- quit
-
-
-
-
-
-
reload
-
- reload <module>
-
- Reload the given module from the module directory. It is a convenient way to
- test modules whithout restarting the program.
-
- Example:
-
- reload 99_PRIV
-
-
-
-
-
rename
-
- rename <oldname> <newname>
-
- Rename a device from the <oldname> to <newname>, together with
- its attributes. The global event RENAMED will be generated, see the notify
- section for details.
-
- Example:
-
- rename FHT_1234 fht.kitchen
-
-
-
-
-
-
rereadcfg
-
- rereadcfg [fhem-config-file]
-
- Re-read the active configuration file, or the optionally specified file.
- The sequence: the statefile will be saved first,
- then all devices will be deleted, then the currently active config file (or
- the specified file) will be read and at last the statefile will be
- reloaded.
- Upon completion it triggers the global:REREADCFG event. All existing
- connections up to the one issuing the rereadcfg will be closed.
-
-
- Example:
-
- rereadcfg
-
-
-
-
-
save
-
- save [<configfile>]
-
- Save first the statefile, then the
- configfile information. If a parameter is specified,
- it will be used instead the global configfile attribute.
- Notes:
-
-
save only writes out definitions and attributes, but no (set/get)
- commands which were previously part of the config file. If you need such
- commands after the initialization (e.g. FHTcode), you
- should trigger them via notify, when receiving the
- INITIALIZED event.
-
-
save tries to preserve comments (lines starting with #) and include
- structures, but it won't work correctly if some of these files are not
- writeable.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
set
-
- set <devspec> <type-specific>
-
- Set parameters of a device / send signals to a device. You can
- get a list of possible parameters by
-
- set <name> ?
-
- See the Device specification section for details on
- <devspec>. The set command returns only a value on error.
-
- Each device has different set parameters, see the corresponding device
- section for details.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
setstate
-
- setstate <devspec> <value>
-
- Set the "STATE" for <name> as shown in paranthesis in the
- list command
- to <value> without sending any signals to the device
- itself. This command is also used in the statefile.
- See the Device specification section for details on
- <devspec>.
-
- Examples:
-
- setstate lamp on
-
- Note:
-
-
The statefile uses another version of this command, don't be surprised.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
shutdown
-
- shutdown [restart]
-
- Shut down the server (after saving the state information
- ). It triggers the global:SHUTDOWN event. If the optional restart
- parameter is specified, fhem tries to restart itself.
-
- The global device is used to set different global attributes. It will be
- automatically defined, it cannot be deleted or renamed and has no set or get
- parameters
-
-
- Define
autoload_undefined_devices
- If set, automatically load the corresponding module when a message
- of this type is received. This is used by the
- autocreate device, to automatically create a fhem device upon
- receiving a corresponding message.
-
-
-
-
-
backup_before_update
- If this attribute is set to 0, an update skip always backing up your
- installation via the backup command. The default
- is to backup always before updates.
- Note: Set this attribute only if you know what you do!
- This Attribute is used by the update command.
- Example:
-
- attr global backup_before_update 0
-
-
-
-
-
backupcmd
- You could pass the backup to your own command / script by using this attribute.
- If this attribute is specified, then it will be started as a shell command and
- passes a space separated list of files / directories as one
- argument to the command, like e.g.:
-
-
- Note: Your command / script has to return the string "backup done" or
- everything else to report errors, to work properly with updatefhem!
- This Attribute is used by the backup command.
- Example:
-
- attr global backupcmd /usr/local/bin/myBackupScript.sh
-
-
-
-
-
backupdir
- A folder to store the compressed backup file.
- This Attribute is used by the backup command.
- Example:
-
- attr global backupdir /Volumes/BigHD
-
-
-
-
-
backupsymlink
- If this attribute is set to everything else as "no", the archive command tar
- will support symlinks in your backup. Otherwise, if this attribute is set to
- "no" symlinks are ignored by tar.
- This Attribute is used by the backup command.
- Example:
-
- attr global backupsymlinks yes
-
-
-
-
-
configfile
- Contains the name of the fhem configuration file. If save is called without argument, then the output will
- be written to this file.
-
-
-
-
exclude_from_update
- Contains a space separated list of file which will be excluded by an update.
- This Attribute is used by the update command.
- Example:
-
- attr global exclude_from_update 21_OWTEMP.pm temp4hum4.gplot FS20.on.png FS20.off.png
-
-
-
-
-
holiday2we
- If this attribute is set, then the $we variable
- will be true, if the value of the holiday
- variable referenced by this attribute is not none.
- Example:
-
- attr global holiday2we hessen
-
-
-
-
-
lastinclude
- If this attribute is set, then the last command of the generated
- configfile (see the save command) will be
- include <lastinclude-value>
- This attribute is DEPRECATED, use notify, with
- the INITIALIZED event to execute commands after initialization.
-
-
-
-
logfile
- Specify the logfile to write. You can use "-" for
- stdout, in this case the server won't background itself.
- The logfile name can also take wildcards for easier logfile rotation,
- see the FileLog section. Just apply the
- archivecmd / archivedir / nrarchive attributes to the
- global device as you would do for a FileLog device.
- You can access the current name of the logfile with
- { $currlogfile }.
-
-
-
-
modpath
- Specify the path to the modules directory FHEM. The path
- does not contain the directory FHEM. Upon setting the
- attribute, the directory will be scanned for filenames of the form
- NN_<NAME>.pm, and make them available for device definition under
- <NAME>. If the first device of type <NAME> is defined, the
- module will be loaded, and its function with the name
- <NAME>_Initialize will be called. Exception to this rule are
- modules with NN=99, these are considered to be utility modules
- containing only perl helper functions, they are loaded at startup (i.e.
- modpath attribute definition time).
-
-
-
-
motd
- Message Of The Day. Displayed on the homescreen of the FHEMWEB package,
- or directly after the telnet logon, before displaying the fhem> prompt.
- SecurityCheck is setting motd if it is not defined upon startup, to
- avoid this set the motd value to none
-
-
-
-
mseclog
- If set, the timestamp in the logfile will contain a millisecond part.
-
-
-
-
nofork
- If set and the logfile is not "-", do not try to background. Needed
- on some Fritzbox installations.
-
-
-
-
pidfilename
- Write the process id of the perl process to the specified file. The
- server runs as a daemon, and some distributions would like to check by
- the pid if we are still running. The file will be deleted upon
- shutdown.
-
-
-
-
-
statefile
- Set the filename where the state and certain at
- information will be saved before shutdown. If it is not specified, then
- no information will be saved.
-
-
-
-
title
- Used by the web frontend fhemweb.pl (webpgm2) as a Page title.
-
-
-
-
updatebranch
- The update branch will be set by the file FhemUtils/release.pm contained
- in the modpath. For example, if a stable version (version 5.3 upwards) of
- fhem is installed via a direct download connection of the archieve on the
- fhem-website, then the branch of the update is automatically on "stable".
- In this branch, only updates fixing confirmed errors, relevant security
- fixes or new stable versions are provided.
- By using the command "update development <filename>", particular files
- or packages can always be installed directly from the development branch
- (e.g. "update development <package>").
- If you want to update from the development branch in stable verion in
- general, you can force this behaviour by using the attribute "updatebranch DEVELOPMENT".
- In case the installation of fhem should generally using the development
- branch, this attribute would not have to be set. Instead, use "update development force"
- to update all files including release.pm (containing the release-information)
- to the newest version.
-
-
-
-
userattr
- A space separated list which contains the names of additional
- attributes. Without specifying them you will not be able to set them
- (in order to prevent typos).
-
-
-
-
verbose
- Set the verbosity level. Possible values:
-
-
0 - server start/stop
-
1 - error messages or unknown packets
-
2 - major events/alarms.
-
3 - commands sent out will be logged.
-
4 - you'll see whats received by the different devices.
-
5 - debugging.
-
- Recommended level is 3 for normal use.
-
-
-
-
dupTimeout
- Define the timeout for which 2 identical events from two different
- receiver are considered a duplicate. Default is 0.5 seconds.
-
-
- A calendar device periodically gathers calendar events from the source calendar at the given URL. The file at the given URL
- must be in ICal format.
-
- If the URL
- starts with https://, the perl module IO::Socket::SSL must be installed
- (use cpan -i IO::Socket::SSL).
-
- Note for users of Google Calendar: You can literally use the private ICal URL from your Google Calendar.
- Google App accounts do not work since requests to the URL
- get redirected first and the fhem mechanism for retrieving data via http/https cannot handle this. If your Google Calendar
- URL starts with https:// and the perl module IO::Socket::SSL is not installed on your system, you can
- replace it by http://.
-
- The optional parameter interval is the time between subsequent updates
- in seconds. It defaults to 3600 (1 hour).
-
- Forces the retrieval of the calendar from the URL. The next automatic retrieval is scheduled to occur
- interval seconds later.
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
- get <name> full|text|summary|location|alarm|start|end <reading>|<uid>
-
- Returns, line by line, the full state or a textual representation or the summary (subject, title) or the
- location or the alarm time or the start time or the end time
- of the calendar event(s) listed in the
- reading <reading> or identified by the UID <uid>.
-
- get <name> find <regexp>
-
- Returns, line by line, the UIDs of all calendar events whose summary matches the regular expression
- <regexp>.
-
- A calendar is a set of calendar events. A calendar event has a summary (usually the title shown in a visual
- representation of the source calendar), a start time, an end time, and zero, one or more alarm times. The calendar events are
- fetched from the source calendar at the given URL. In case of multiple alarm times for a calendar event, only the
- earliest alarm time is kept. Recurring calendar events are currently not supported.
-
- A calendar event is identified by its UID. The UID is taken from the source calendar. All non-alphanumerical characters
- are stripped off the UID to make your life easier.
-
- A calendar event can be in one of the following states:
-
-
new
The calendar event was first seen at the most recent update. Either this was your first retrieval of
- the calendar or you newly added the calendar event to the source calendar.
-
known
The calendar event was already there before the most recent update.
-
updated
The calendar event was already there before the most recent update but it has changed since it
- was last retrieved.
-
deleted
The calendar event was there before the most recent update but is no longer. You removed it from the source calendar. The calendar event will be removed from all lists at the next update.
-
- Calendar events that lie completely in the past (current time on wall clock is later than the calendar event's end time)
- are not retrieved and are thus not accessible through the calendar.
-
-
- A calendar event can be in one of the following modes:
-
-
upcoming
Neither the alarm time nor the start time of the calendar event is reached.
-
alarm
The alarm time has passed but the start time of the calendar event is not yet reached.
-
start
The start time has passed but the end time of the calendar event is not yet reached.
-
end
The end time of the calendar event has passed.
-
- A calendar event transitions from one mode to another immediately when the time for the change has come. This is done by waiting
- for the earliest future time among all alarm, start or end times of all calendar events.
-
-
- A calendar device has several readings. Except for calname, each reading is a semicolon-separated list of UIDs of
- calendar events that satisfy certain conditions:
-
-
calname
name of the calendar
-
all
all events
-
modeAlarm
events in alarm mode
-
modeAlarmOrStart
events in alarm or start mode
-
modeAlarmed
events that have just transitioned from upcoming to alarm mode
-
modeChanged
events that have just changed their mode somehow
-
modeEnd
events in end mode
-
modeEnded
events that have just transitioned from start to end mode
-
modeStart
events in start mode
-
modeStarted
events that have just transitioned to start mode
-
modeUpcoming
events in upcoming mode
-
stateChanged
events that have just changed their state somehow
-
stateDeleted
events in state deleted
-
stateNew
events in state new
-
stateUpdated
events in state updated
-
-
-
-
- When a calendar event has changed, an event is created in the form
- changed: UID mode with mode being the current mode the calendar event is in after the change.
-
-
-
- Usage scenarios
-
- Show all calendar events with details
-
-
- get MyCalendar full all
- 2767324dsfretfvds7dsfn3e4dsa234r234sdfds6bh874googlecom known alarm 31.05.2012 17:00:00 07.06.2012 16:30:00-07.06.2012 18:00:00 Erna for coffee
- 992hydf4y44awer5466lhfdsrgl7tin6b6mckf8glmhui4googlecom known upcoming 08.06.2012 00:00:00-09.06.2012 00:00:00 Vacation
-
-
-
- Show calendar events in your photo frame
-
- Put a line in the layout description to show calendar events in alarm or start mode:
- text 20 60 { fhem("get MyCalendar text modeAlarmOrStart") }
- Think about a calendar with calendar events whose summaries (subjects, titles) are the names of devices in your fhem installation.
- You want the respective devices to switch on when the calendar event starts and to switch off when the calendar event ends.
-
- define SwitchActorOn notify MyCalendar:modeStarted.* { my $uid= "%EVTPART1";; my $actor= fhem("get MyCalendar summary $uid");; fhem("set $actor on") }
- define SwitchActorOff notify MyCalendar:modeEnded.* { my $uid= "%EVTPART1";; my $actor= fhem("get MyCalendar summary $uid");; fhem("set $actor off") }
-
- You can also do some logging:
-
- define LogActors notify MyCalendar:mode(Started|Ended).* { my $reading= "%EVTPART0";; my $uid= "%EVTPART1";; my $actor= fhem("get MyCalendar summary $uid");; Log 1, "Actor: $actor, Reading $reading" }
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
FHZ
-
- Note: this module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module
- if the devices is connected via USB or a serial port.
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> FHZ <serial-device>
-
- Specifies the serial port to communicate with the FHZ1000PC or FHZ1300PC.
- The name(s) of the serial-device(s) depends on your distribution.
-
- If the serial-device is called none, then no device will be opened, so you
- can experiment without hardware attached.
-
- The program can service multiple devices, FS20 and FHT device commands will
- be sent out through the last FHZ device defined before the definition of
- the FS20/FHT device. To change the association, use the IODev attribute.
-
-
- For GNU/Linux you may want to read our hints for
- GNU/Linux about multiple USB
- devices.
-
- Note:The firmware of the FHZ1x00 will drop commands if the airtime
- for the last hour would exceed 1% (which corresponds roughly to 163
- commands). For this purpose there is a command counter for the last hour
- (see list FHZDEVICE), which triggers with "TRANSMIT LIMIT EXCEEDED" if
- there were more than 163 commands in the last hour.
-
- If you experience problems (for verbose 4 you get a lot of "Bad CRC
- message" in the log), then try to define your device as define
- <name> FHZ <serial-device> strangetty
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set FHZ <variable> [<value>]
-
- where value is one of:
-
- FHTcode
- initFS20
- initHMS
- stopHMS
- initfull
- raw
- open
- reopen
- close
- time
-
- Notes:
-
-
raw is used to send out "raw" FS20/FHT messages ("setters" only - no query messages!).
- See message byte streams in FHEM/00_FHZ.pm and the doc directory for some examples.
-
In order to set the time of your FHT's, schedule this command every
- minute:
- define fhz_timer at +*00:01:00 set FHZ time
- See the loglevel to prevent logging of
- this command.
-
-
FHTcode is a two digit hex number (from 00 to 63?) and sets the
- central FHT code, which is used by the FHT devices. After changing
- it, you must reprogram each FHT80b with: PROG (until Sond
- appears), then select CEnt, Prog, Select nA.
-
If the FHT ceases to work for FHT devices whereas other devices
- (e.g. HMS, KS300) continue to work, a
- set FHZ initfull
command could help. Try
- set FHZ reopen
if the FHZ
- ceases to work completely. If all else fails, shutdown fhem, unplug
- and replug the FHZ device. Problems with FHZ may also be related to
- long USB cables or insufficient power on the USB - use a powered hub
- to improve this particular part of such issues.
- See our USB page
- for detailed USB / electromag. interference troubleshooting.
-
initfull issues the initialization sequence for the FHZ
- device:
-
- get FHZ init2
- get FHZ serial
- set FHZ initHMS
- set FHZ initFS20
- set FHZ time
- set FHZ raw 04 01010100010000
-
reopen closes and reopens the serial device port. This
- implicitly initializes the FHZ and issues the
- initfull command sequence.
-
stopHMS probably is the inverse of initHMS
- (I don't have authoritative info on what exactly it does).
-
close closes and frees the serial device port until you open
- it again with open, e.g. useful if you need to temporarily
- unload the ftdi_sio kernel module to use the bit-bang mode.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
- get FHZ <value>
-
- where value is one of:
-
- init1
- init2
- init3
- serial
- fhtbuf
-
- Notes:
-
-
The mentioned codes are needed for initializing the FHZ1X00
-
The answer for a command is also displayed by list FHZ
-
-
- The FHZ1x00PC has a message buffer for the FHT (see the FHT entry in
- the set section). If the buffer is full, then newly
- issued commands will be dropped, if the attribute fhtsoftbuffer is not set.
- fhtbuf returns the free memory in this buffer (in hex),
- an empty buffer in the FHZ1000 is 2c (42 bytes), in the FHZ1300 is 4a
- (74 bytes). A message occupies 3 + 2x(number of FHT commands) bytes,
- this is the second reason why sending multiple FHT commands with one
- set is a good idea. The first reason is, that
- these FHT commands are sent at once to the FHT.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
-
do_not_notify
- Disable FileLog/notify/inform notification for a device. This affects
- the received signal, the set and trigger commands.
loglevel
- Set the device loglevel to e.g. 6 if you do not wish messages from a
- given device to appear in the global logfile (FHZ/FS20/FHT). E.g. to
- set the FHT time, you should schedule "set FHZ time" every minute, but
- this in turn makes your logfile unreadable. These messages will not be
- generated if the FHZ attribute loglevel is set to 6.
- On the other hand, if you have to debug a given device, setting its
- loglevel to a smaller value than the value of the global verbose attribute,
- it will output its messages normally seen only with higher global verbose
- levels.
-
fhtsoftbuffer
- As the FHZ command buffer for FHT devices is limited (see fhtbuf),
- and commands are only sent to the FHT device every 120 seconds,
- the hardware buffer may overflow and FHT commands get lost.
- Setting this attribute implements an "unlimited" software buffer.
- Default is disabled (i.e. not set or set to 0).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
FS20
-
- The FS20 protocol is used by a wide range of devices, which are either of
- the sender/sensor category or the receiver/actuator category. The radio
- (868.35 MHz) messages are either received through an FHZ
- or an CUL device, so this must be defined first.
-
-
-
- The values of housecode, button, fg, lm, and gm can be either defined as
- hexadecimal value or as ELV-like "quad-decimal" value with digits 1-4. We
- will reference this ELV-like notation as ELV4 later in this document. You
- may even mix both hexadecimal and ELV4 notations, because FHEM can detect
- the used notation automatically by counting the digits.
-
-
-
<housecode> is a 4 digit hex or 8 digit ELV4 number,
- corresponding to the housecode address.
-
<button> is a 2 digit hex or 4 digit ELV4 number,
- corresponding to a button of the transmitter.
-
The optional <fgaddr> specifies the function group.
- It is a 2 digit hex or 4 digit ELV address. The first digit of the hex
- address must be F or the first 2 digits of the ELV4 address must be
- 44.
-
The optional <lmaddr> specifies the local
- master. It is a 2 digit hex or 4 digit ELV address. The last digit of the
- hex address must be F or the last 2 digits of the ELV4 address must be
- 44.
-
The optional gm specifies the global master, the address must be FF if
- defined as hex value or 4444 if defined as ELV4 value.
- dim06% dim12% dim18% dim25% dim31% dim37% dim43% dim50%
- dim56% dim62% dim68% dim75% dim81% dim87% dim93% dim100%
- dimdown
- dimup
- dimupdown
- off
- off-for-timer
- on # dimmer: set to value before switching it off
- on-for-timer # see the note
- on-old-for-timer # set to previous (before switching it on)
- ramp-on-time # time to reach the desired dim value on dimmers
- ramp-off-time # time to reach the off state on dimmers
- reset
- sendstate
- timer
- toggle # between off and previous dim val
- on-till # Special, see the note
-
- Examples:
-
- set lamp on
- set lamp1,lamp2,lamp3 on
- set lamp1-lamp3 on
- set lamp on-for-timer 12
-
-
- Notes:
-
-
Use reset with care: the device forgets even the housecode.
-
-
As the FS20 protocol needs about 0.22 seconds to transmit a
- sequence, a pause of 0.22 seconds is inserted after each command.
-
-
The FS20ST switches on for dim*%, dimup. It does not respond to
- sendstate.
-
If the timer is set (i.e. it is not 0) then on, dim*,
- and *-for-timer will take it into account (at least by the FS20ST).
-
-
The time argument ranges from 0.25sec to 4 hours and
- 16 minutes.
- As the time is encoded in one byte there are only 112 distinct
- values, the resolution gets coarse with larger values. The program
- will report the used timeout if the specified one cannot be set
- exactly. The resolution is 0.25 sec from 0 to 4 sec, 0.5 sec from 4
- to 8 sec, 1 sec from 8 to 16 sec and so on. If you need better
- precision for large values, use at which has a 1
- sec resolution.
-
on-till requires an absolute time in the "at" format (HH:MM:SS, HH:MM
- or { <perl code> }, where the perl-code returns a time
- specification).
- If the current time is greater than the specified time, then the
- command is ignored, else an "on" command is generated, and for the
- given "till-time" an off command is scheduleld via the at command.
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
N/A
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
-
IODev
- Set the IO or physical device which should be used for sending signals
- for this "logical" device. An example for the physical device is an FHZ
- or a CUL. Note: Upon startup fhem assigns each logical device
- (FS20/HMS/KS300/etc) the last physical device which can receive data
- for this type of device. The attribute IODev needs to be used only if
- you attached more than one physical device capable of receiving signals
- for this logical device.
-
-
-
eventMap
- Replace event names and set arguments. The value of this attribute
- consists of a list of space separated values, each value is a colon
- separated pair. The first part specifies the "old" value, the second
- the new/desired value. If the first character is slash(/) or komma(,)
- then split not by space but by this character, enabling to embed spaces.
- Examples:
- attr store eventMap on:open off:closed
- attr store eventMap /on-for-timer 10:open/off:closed/
- set store open
-
dummy
- Set the device attribute dummy to define devices which should not
- output any radio signals. Associated notifys will be executed if
- the signal is received. Used e.g. to react to a code from a sender, but
- it will not emit radio signal if triggered in the web frontend.
-
-
-
-
follow-on-for-timer
- schedule a "setstate off;trigger off" for the time specified as argument to
- the on-for-timer command. Or the same with on, if the command is
- off-for-timer.
-
-
-
-
follow-on-timer
- Like with follow-on-for-timer schedule a "setstate off;trigger off", but
- this time for the time specified as argument in seconds to this attribute.
- This is used to follow the pre-programmed timer, which was set previously
- with the timer command or manually by pressing the button on the device,
- see your manual for details.
-
model
- The model attribute denotes the model type of the device.
- The attributes will (currently) not be used by the fhem.pl directly.
- It can be used by e.g. external programs or web interfaces to
- distinguish classes of devices and send the appropriate commands
- (e.g. "on" or "off" to a fs20st, "dim..%" to fs20du etc.).
- The spelling of the model names are as quoted on the printed
- documentation which comes which each device. This name is used
- without blanks in all lower-case letters. Valid characters should be
- a-z 0-9 and - (dash),
- other characters should be ommited. Here is a list of "official"
- devices:
ignore
- Ignore this device, e.g. if it belongs to your neighbour. The device
- won't trigger any FileLogs/notifys, issued commands will silently
- ignored (no RF signal will be sent out, just like for the dummy attribute). The device won't appear in the
- list command (only if it is explicitely asked for it), nor will it
- appear in commands which use some wildcard/attribute as name specifiers
- (see devspec). You still get them with the
- "ignored=1" special devspec.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Generated events:
-
- From an FS20 device you can receive one of the following events.
-
on
-
off
-
toggle
-
dimdown
-
dimup
-
dimupdown
-
on-for-timer
- Which event is sent is device dependent and can sometimes configured on
- the device.
-
-
-
-
-
FB_CALLMONITOR
-
-
- The FB_CALLMONITOR module connects to a AVM FritzBox Fon and listens for telephone
- events (Receiving incoming call, Making a call)
-
- In order to use this module with fhem you must enable the CallMonitor feature via
- telephone shortcode.
-
- #96*5* - for activating #96*4* - for deactivating
-
-
-
- Just dial the shortcode for activating on one of your phones, after 3 seconds just hang up. The feature is now activated.
-
- After activating the CallMonitor-Support in your FritzBox, this module is able to
- generate an event for each call.
-
- This module work with any FritzBox Fon model.
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> FB_CALLMONITOR <ip-address>[:port]
-
- port is 1012 by default.
-
-
- desired-temp
- day-temp night-temp
- report1 report2
- refreshvalues
- mode
- holiday1 holiday2 # see mode holiday_short or holiday
- manu-temp # No clue what it does.
- year month day hour minute
- time date
- lowtemp-offset # Alarm-Temp.-Differenz
- windowopen-temp
- mon-from1 mon-to1 mon-from2 mon-to2
- tue-from1 tue-to1 tue-from2 tue-to2
- wed-from1 wed-to1 wed-from2 wed-to2
- thu-from1 thu-to1 thu-from2 thu-to2
- fri-from1 fri-to1 fri-from2 fri-to2
- sat-from1 sat-to1 sat-from2 sat-to2
- sun-from1 sun-to1 sun-from2 sun-to2
-
-
- Examples:
-
- set wz desired-temp 22.5
- set fl desired-temp 20.5 day-temp 19.0 night-temp 16.0
-
-
-
- Notes:
-
-
Following events are reported (more or less regularly) by each FHT
- device: measured-temp actuator actuator1...actuator8
- warnings
- You can use these strings for notify or
- FileLog definitions.
-
-
warnings can contain following strings:
- none, Battery low,Temperature too low, Window open,
- Fault on window sensor
-
-
actuator (without a suffix) stands for all actuators.
-
actuator or actuator1..8 can take following values:
-
-
<value>%
- This is the normal case, the actuator is instructed to
- open to this value.
-
offset <value>%
- The actuator is running with this offset.
-
lime-protection
- The actuator was instructed to execute the lime-protection
- procedure.
-
synctime
- If you select Sond/Sync on the FHT80B, you'll see a count
- down.
-
test
- The actuator was instructed by the FHT80b to emit a beep.
-
pair
- The the FHT80b sent a "you-belong-to-me" to this actuator.
-
-
-
-
-
The FHT is very economical (or lazy), it accepts one message from the
- FHZ1x00 every 115+x seconds, where x depends on the housecode. Don't
- be surprised if your command is only accepted 10 minutes later by the
- device. FHT commands are buffered in the FHZ1x00/CUL till they are
- sent to the FHT, see the related fhtbuf entry in the
- get section. You can send up to 8
- commands in one message at once to the FHT if you specify them all as
- arguments to the same set command, see the example above.
-
-
time sets hour and minute to local time
-
-
date sets year, month and date to local time
-
-
refreshvalues is an alias for report1 255 report2 255
-
-
All *-temp values need a temperature
- as argument, which will be rounded to 0.5 Celsius.
- Temperature values must between 5.5 and 30.5 Celsius. Value 5.5 sets
- the actuator to OFF, value 30.5 set the actuator to ON
-
-
mode is one of auto, manual, holiday or
- holiday_short.
- If the mode is holiday, then the mode switches back to either auto or
- manual at 00:00 of the day specified by the following:
-
-
holiday1 sets the end-day of the holiday
-
holiday2 sets the end-month of the holiday
-
- For holiday_short (party mode)
-
-
holiday1 sets the absolute hour to switch back from this
- mode (in 10-minute steps, max 144)
-
holiday2 sets the day of month to switch back from this mode
- (can only be today or tomorrow, since holiday1 accepts only 24 hours).
- Example:
-
-
current date is 29 Jan, time is 18:05
-
you want to switch to party mode until tomorrow 1:00
-
set holiday1 to 6 (6 x 10min = 1hour) and holiday2 to 30
-
-
- The temperature for the holiday period is set by the desired-temperature
- parameter. Note that you cannot set holiday mode for days earlier than the
- day after tomorrow, for this you must use holiday_short.
- Note also, you cannot set parameters seperately, you must set them in one command.
- Example:
-
- set FHT1 mode holiday holiday1 24 holiday2 12 desired-temp 14
-
-
-
-
The *-from1/*-from2/*-to1/*-to2 valuetypes need a time
- spec as argument in the HH:MM format. They define the periods, where
- the day-temp is valid. The minute (MM) will be rounded to 10, and
- 24:00 means off.
-
-
-
To synchronize the FHT time and to "wake" muted FHTs it is adviseable
- to schedule following command:
- define fht_sync at +*3:30 set TYPE=FHT time
-
-
-
report1 with parameter 255 requests all settings for
- monday till sunday to be sent. The argument is a bitfield, to request
- unique values add up the following:
-
-
1: monday
-
2: tuesday
-
4: thursday
-
8: wednesday
-
16: friday
-
32: saturday
-
64: sunday
-
- measured-temp and actuator is sent along if it is considered
- appropriate
- by the FHT.
-
- Note: This command generates a lot of RF traffic, which can
- lead to further problems, especially if the reception is not clear.
-
-
-
report2 with parameter 255 requests the following
- settings to be reported: day-temp night-temp windowopen-temp
- lowtemp-offset desired-temp measured-temp mode warnings.
- The argument is (more or less) a bitfield, to request unique values
- add up the following:
-
-
1: warnings
-
2: mode
-
4: day-temp, night-temp, windowopen-temp
-
64: lowtemp-offset
-
- measured-temp and actuator is sent along if it is considered
- appropriate
-
- by the FHT.
-
-
-
lowtemp-offset needs a temperature as argument, valid
- values must be between 1.0 and 5.0 Celsius. It will trigger a
- warning if desired-temp - measured-temp >
- lowtemp-offset in a room for at least 1.5 hours after the last
- desired-temp change.
-
-
FHEM optionally has an internal software buffer for FHT devices.
- This buffer should prevent transmission errors. If there is no
- confirmation for a given period, FHEM resends the command. You can
- see the queued commands with list
- <fht-device>.
- See the fhtsoftbuffer,
- retrycount and
- minfhtbuffer attributes for details.
-
-
-
If a buffer is still in the softbuffer, it will be sent in the
- following order: desired-temp,mode,report1,report2,
- holiday1,holiday2,day-temp,night-temp, [all other commands]
-
dummy
- Note:It makes sense to define an FHT device even for an FHT8b,
- else you will receive "unknown FHT device, please define one" message
- for each FHT8b as the CUL is reporting the 8b valve messages. But you
- should set the dummy attribute for these devices, else the internal FHT
- buffer of the CUL will be filled with data for the 8b's which is never
- consumed. If the buffer is full, you'll get "EOB" messages from the CUL,
- and you cannot transmit any data to the 80b's
retrycount
- If the fhtsoftbuffer attribute is set, then
- resend commands retrycount times if after 240 seconds
- no confirmation message is received from the corresponding FHT
- device.
- Default is 3.
-
-
-
minfhtbuffer
- FHEM won't send commands to the FHZ if its fhtbuffer is below
- this value, default is 0. If this value is low, then the ordering of
- fht commands (see the note in the FHT section of set)
- has little effect, as only commands in the softbuffer can be
- prioritized. The maximum value should be 7 below the hardware maximum
- (see fhtbuf).
-
-
-
-
lazy
- If the lazy attribute is set, FHEM won't send commands to the FHT if
- the current reading and the value to be set are already identical. This
- may help avoiding conflicts with the max-1%-time-on-air rule in large
- installations. Not set per default.
-
-
-
-
tmpcorr
- Correct the temperature reported by the FHT by the value specified.
- Note: only the measured-temp value reported by fhem (used for logging)
- will be modified.
-
-
-
-
-
- Generated events:
-
-
actuator
-
actuator1 actuator2 actuator3 actuator4
- actuator5 actuator6 actuator7 actuator8
- (sent if you configured an offset for the associated valve)
-
ack can-xmit can-rcv ack2 start-xmit end-xmit
- (only if the CUL is configured to transmit FHT protocol data)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
FHT8V
-
- Fhem can directly control FHT8V type valves via a CUL
- device without an intermediate FHT. This paragraph documents one of the
- building blocks, the other is the PID device.
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> FHT <housecode> [IODev]
-
-
- <housecode> is a four digit hex number,
- and must have the following relation to the housecode of the corresponding CUL
- device:
-
given the CUL housecode as AABB, then this housecode must be
- of the form CCBB, where CC is greater or equal to AA, but less then AA+8.
-
- This form is chosen so that the CUL can update all FHT8V valve states
- within 2 minutes.
-
-
- <IODev> must be specified if the last defined CUL device
- is not the one to use. Usually this is done voa the IODev attribute, but as the address checked is performed
- at the definition, we must use an exception here.
-
-
- Examples:
-
- define wz FHT8V 3232
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
-
set <name> valve <value;>
- Set the valve to the given value (in percent, from 0 to 100).
-
-
set <name> pair
- Pair the valve with the CUL.
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
-
get <name> valve
- Read back the valve position from the CUL FHT buffer, and convert it to percent (from 0 to 100).
-
- The PID device is a loop controller, used to set the value e.g of a heating
- valve dependent of the current and desired temperature.
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> PID sensor[:reading:regexp] actor[:cmd:min:max] [p i d]
-
-
- sensor[:reading:regexp] specifies the sensor, which is an
- already defined fhem device, e.g. a S300TH temperature sensor. The reading
- and regexp fields are necessary only for unknown devices (currently CUL_WS and HMS devices are "known").
- Reading specifies the READINGS field of the sensor, and the regexp extracts
- the number from this field. E.g. for the complete definition for a CUL_WS
- device is: s300th_dev:temperature:([\d\.]*)
-
-
- actor[:cmd:min:max] specifies the actor, which is an
- already defined fhem device, e.g. an FHT8V valve. The cmd, min and max
- fields are necessary only for unknown devices (currently FHT8V is "known"). cmd specifies the command name for the
- actor, min the minimum value and max the maximum value. The complete
- definition for an FHT8V device is:fht8v_dev:valve:0:100
-
-
- p, i and d are the parameters use to controlling, see also the this wikipedia entry.
- The default values are around 25.5, 3 and 5.88, you probably need to tune
- these values. They can be also changed later.
-
-
- Examples:
-
- define wz_pid PID wz_th wz_fht8v
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
-
set <name> factors p i d
- Set the p, i and d factors, as described above.
-
-
set <name> desired <value>
- Set the desired value (e.g. temperature). Note: until this value is not
- set, no command is issued.
-
- This module handles messages from the FHT80 TF "Fenster-Tür-Kontakt" (Window-Door-Contact)
- which are normally only acted upon by the FHT80B. With this module,
- FHT80 TFs are in a limited way (see Wiki
- for detailed explanation of TF's mode of operation) usable similar to HMS100 TFK. The name
- of the module was chosen as a) only CUL will spill out the datagrams and b) "TF" designates
- usually temperature+humidity sensors (no clue, why ELV didn't label this one "TFK" like with
- FS20 and HMS).
- As said before, FHEM can receive FHT80 TF radio (868.35 MHz) messages only through an
- CUL device, so this must be defined first.
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> CUL_FHTTK <devicecode>
-
-
- <devicecode> is a six digit hex number, given to the FHT80 TF during
- production, i. e. it is not changeable. (Yes, it keeps this code after changing batteries
- as well.)
-
- Examples:
-
<device> the name of a predefined device to switch.
-
<interval> is a digit number. The unit is minutes.
-
<valveThresholdOn> is a digit number. Threshold upon which device is switched on (heating required).
-
<valveThresholdOff> is a digit number. Threshold upon which device is switched off (idle).
-
-
-
- The HCS (heating control system) device monitors the state of all detected
- valves in a free definable interval (by default: 10 min).
-
-
- Regulation for heating requirement or suppression of the request can be controlled by
- valve position using also free definable thresholds.
-
-
- In doing so, the HCS device also includes the hysteresis between two states.
-
-
- Example:
- Threshold valve position for heating requirement: 40% (default)
- Threshold valve position for idle: 35% (default)
-
-
- Heating is required when the "open" position of a valve is more than 40%. HCS
- then activates the defined device until the "open" position of the valve has
- lowered to 35% or less (threshold for idle).
-
-
- In addition, the HCS device supports an optional temp-sensor. The valve-position oriented
- regulation can be overriden by the reading of the temp-sensor.
-
-
- Example:
- Threshold temperature reading for heating requirement: 10° Celsius
- Threshold temperature reading for idle: 18° Celsius
-
-
- Is a valve reaching or exceeding the threshold for heating requirement (>=40%), but the
- temperature reading is more than 18° Celcius, the selected device will stay deactivated.
- The valve-position oriented regulation has been overridden by the temperature reading in this example.
-
-
- The HCS device automatically detects devices which are ignored. Furthermore, certain
- devices can also be excluded of the monitoring manually.
-
-
-
- Get
-
-
valves
- returns the actual valve positions
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
-
interval
- modifies the interval of reading the actual valve positions. The unit is minutes.
-
-
on
- restarts the monitoring after shutdown by off switch.
- HCS device starts up automatically upon FHEM start or after new device implementation!
-
-
off
- shutdown of monitoring, can be restarted by using the on command.
-
-
valveThresholdOn
- defines threshold upon which device is switched on (heating required).
-
-
valveThresholdOff
- defines threshold upon which device is switched off (idle).
-
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
device
- optional; used to change the device. This is normally done in the define tag.
-
-
deviceCmdOn
- command to activate the device, e.g. on.
-
-
deviceCmdOff
- command to deactivate the device, e.g. off.
-
-
sensor
- device name of the temp-sensor (optional).
-
-
sensorThresholdOn
- threshold for temperature reading activating the defined device
- Must be set if sensor has been defined
-
-
sensorThresholdOff
- threshold for temperature reading deactivating the defined device.
- Must be set if sensor has been defined
-
-
sensorReading
- name which is used for saving the "reading" of the defined temp-sensor.
-
-
valvesExcluded
- space separated list of devices (FHT or HM-CC-TC) for excluding
-
-
- <housecode> is a four digit hex number,
- corresponding to the address of the HMS device.
-
-
- Examples:
-
- define temp HMS 1234
-
- Notes:
-
-
There is _NO_ guarantee that the code will work as expected in all
- circumstances, the authors are not liable for any damage occuring as a
- result of incomplete or buggy code
-
-
Currently supported devices are the HMS100-T HMS100-TF HMS100-WD
- HMS100-MG HMS100-TFK HMS100-CO HMS100-FIT RM100-2 RM100-3
-
-
The housecode of the HMS devices may change if the battery is renewed.
- In order to make life easier, you can define a "wildcard" device for each
- type of HMS device. First the real device-id will be checked, then the
- wildcard device id. The wildcards are:
-
-
1000 for the HMS100-TF
-
1001 for the HMS100-T
-
1002 for the HMS100-WD
-
1003 for the RM100-2
-
1004 for the HMS100-TFK/li>
-
1006 for the HMS100-MG
-
1008 for the HMS100-CO
-
100e for the HMS100-FIT
-
-
-
-
Some battery low notifications are not yet implemented (RM100,
- HMS100WD).
-
Please test your installation before relying on the
- functionality.
model (hms100-t hms100-tf hms100-wd hms100-mg
- hms100-co hms100-tfk hms100-fit rm100-2)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
HMLAN
-
-
- The HMLAN is the fhem module for the eQ-3 HomeMatic LAN Configurator.
-
- The fhem module will emulate a CUL device, so the CUL_HM
- module can be used to define HomeMatic devices.
-
- In order to use it with fhem you must disable the encryption first
- with the "HomeMatic Lan Interface Configurator" (which is part of the
- supplied Windows software), by selecting the device, "Change IP Settings",
- and deselect "AES Encrypt Lan Communication".
- This device can be used in parallel with a CCU and (readonly) with fhem. To do this:
-
-
start the fhem/contrib/tcptee.pl program
-
redirect the CCU to the local host
-
disable the LAN-Encryption on the CCU for the Lan configurator
-
set the dummy attribute for the HMLAN device in fhem
-
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> HMLAN <ip-address>[:port]
-
- port is 1000 by default.
- If the ip-address is called none, then no device will be opened, so you
- can experiment without hardware attached.
-
The HOL module attempts to simulate your presence using your FHEM devices.
- Device support: All devices that are able to handle on-for-timer and on commands.
- Currently the device can be found within the contrib/ folder.
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> HOL
-
- To make the module find the devices you want to switch in holiday mode,
- you have to specify a global user attribute (attr global userattr holidaySwitchTime).
- The attribute tells the HOL module how long each device should be switched on.
- If you want to switch a device in your FHEM configuration, just add this attribute as device attribute
- with your defined duration.
- When being switched to on, the module chooses a random defined device
- having the holidaySwitchTime attribute and trigger it to on-for-timer.
- After the on-timespan, this device is switched to off and another random one triggered to on-for-timer.
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
-
on
-
off
-
-
-
-
-
-
CUL
-
-
-
-
- The CUL/CUR/CUN is a family of RF devices sold by busware.de.
-
- With the opensource firmware (see this link) they are capable
- to receive and send different 868MHz protocols (FS20/FHT/S300/EM/HMS).
- It is even possible to use these devices as range extenders/routers, see the
- CUL_RFR module for details.
-
-
- Some protocols (FS20, FHT and KS300) are converted by this module so that
- the same logical device can be used, irrespective if the radio telegram is
- received by a CUL or an FHZ device. Other protocols (S300/EM) need their
- own modules. E.g. S300 devices are processed by the CUL_WS module if the
- signals are received by the CUL, similarly EMWZ/EMGZ/EMEM is handled by the
- CUL_EM module.
-
- It is possible to attach more than one device in order to get better
- reception, fhem will filter out duplicate messages.
-
- Note: this module may require the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort
- module if you attach the device via USB and the OS sets strange default
- parameters for serial devices.
-
-
-
- <device> specifies the serial port to communicate with the CUL or
- CUR. The name of the serial-device depends on your distribution, under
- linux the cdc_acm kernel module is responsible, and usually a
- /dev/ttyACM0 device will be created. If your distribution does not have a
- cdc_acm module, you can force usbserial to handle the CUL by the
- following command:
modprobe usbserial vendor=0x03eb
- product=0x204b
In this case the device is most probably
- /dev/ttyUSB0.
-
- You can also specify a baudrate if the device name contains the @
- character, e.g.: /dev/ttyACM0@38400
-
- If the baudrate is "directio" (e.g.: /dev/ttyACM0@directio), then the
- perl module Device::SerialPort is not needed, and fhem opens the device
- with simple file io. This might work if the operating system uses sane
- defaults for the serial parameters, e.g. some Linux distributions and
- OSX.
-
-
- Network-connected devices (CUN):
- <device> specifies the host:port of the device. E.g.
- 192.168.0.244:2323
-
-
- If the device is called none, then no device will be opened, so you
- can experiment without hardware attached.
-
- The FHTID is a 4 digit hex number, and it is used when the CUL/CUR talks to
- FHT devices or when CUR requests data. Set it to 0000 to avoid answering
- any FHT80b request by the CUL.
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
-
raw
- Issue a CUL firmware command. See the this document
- for details on CUL commands.
-
-
-
freq / bWidth / rAmpl / sens
- SlowRF mode only.
- Set the CUL frequency / bandwidth / receiver-amplitude / sensitivity
-
- Use it with care, it may destroy your hardware and it even may be
- illegal to do so. Note: the parameters used for RFR transmission are
- not affected.
-
-
freq sets both the reception and transmission frequency. Note:
- although the CC1101 can be set to frequencies between 315 and 915
- MHz, the antenna interface and the antenna of the CUL is tuned for
- exactly one frequency. Default is 868.3MHz (or 433MHz)
-
bWidth can be set to values between 58kHz and 812kHz. Large values
- are susceptible to interference, but make possible to receive
- inaccurate or multiple transmitters. It affects tranmission too.
- Default is 325kHz.
-
rAmpl is receiver amplification, with values between 24 and 42 dB.
- Bigger values allow reception of weak signals. Default is 42.
-
sens is the decision boundery between the on and off values, and it
- is 4, 8, 12 or 16 dB. Smaller values allow reception of less clear
- signals. Default is 4dB.
-
-
-
-
hmPairForSec
- HomeMatic mode only.
- Set the CUL in Pairing-Mode for the given seconds. Any device set into
- pairing mode in this time will be paired with fhem.
-
-
-
hmPairSerial
- HomeMatic mode only.
- Try to pair with the given device. The argument is a 10 character
- string, usually starting with letters and ending with digits, printed on
- the backside of the device. It is not necessary to put the given device
- in learning mode if it is a receiver.
-
-
led
- Set the CUL led off (00), on (01) or blinking (02).
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
-
version
- return the CUL firmware version
-
-
uptime
- return the CUL uptime (time since CUL reset).
-
-
raw
- Issue a CUL firmware command, and wait for one line of data returned by
- the CUL. See the CUL firmware README document for details on CUL
- commands.
-
-
fhtbuf
- CUL has a message buffer for the FHT. If the buffer is full, then newly
- issued commands will be dropped, and an "EOB" message is issued to the
- fhem log.
- fhtbuf returns the free memory in this buffer (in hex),
- an empty buffer in the CUL-V2 is 74 bytes, in CUL-V3/CUN 200 Bytes.
- A message occupies 3 + 2x(number of FHT commands) bytes,
- this is the second reason why sending multiple FHT commands with one
- set is a good idea. The first reason is, that
- these FHT commands are sent at once to the FHT.
-
-
-
ccconf
- Read some CUL radio-chip (cc1101) registers (frequency, bandwidth, etc),
- and display them in human readable form.
-
-
-
cmds
- Depending on the firmware installed, CULs have a different set of
- possible commands. Please refer to the README of the firmware of your
- CUL to interpret the response of this command. See also the raw-
- command.
-
sendpool
- If using more than one CUL/CUN for covering a large area, sending
- different events by the different CUL's might disturb each other. This
- phenomenon is also known as the Palm-Beach-Resort effect.
- Putting them in a common sendpool will serialize sending the events.
- E.g. if you have three CUN's, you have to specify following
- attributes:
- attr CUN1 sendpool CUN1,CUN2,CUN3
- attr CUN2 sendpool CUN1,CUN2,CUN3
- attr CUN3 sendpool CUN1,CUN2,CUN3
-
-
addvaltrigger
- Create triggers for additional device values. Right now these are RSSI
- and RAWMSG for the CUL family and RAWMSG for the FHZ.
-
-
rfmode
- Configure the RF Transceiver of the CUL (the CC1101). Available
- arguments are:
-
-
SlowRF
- To communicate with FS20/FHT/HMS/EM1010/S300/Hoermann devices @1kHz
- datarate. This is the default.
-
-
HomeMatic
- To communicate with HomeMatic type of devices @20kHz datarate
-
-
MAX
- To communicate with MAX! type of devices @20kHz datarate
-
-
-
-
hmId
- Set the HomeMatic ID of this device. If this attribute is absent, the
- ID will be F1<FHTID>. Note 1: after setting or changing this
- attribute you have to relearn all your HomeMatic devices. Note 2: the
- value _must_ be a 6 digit hex number, and 000000 is not valid. fhem
- wont complain if it is not correct, but the communication won't work.
-
-
-
hmProtocolEvents
- Generate events for HomeMatic protocol messages. These are normally
- used for debugging, by activating "inform timer" in a telnet session,
- or looking at the "Event Monitor" window in the FHEMWEB frontend.
- Example:
-
- The CUL_WS module interprets S300 type of messages received by the CUL.
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> CUL_WS <code> [corr1...corr4]
-
- <code> is the code which must be set on the S300 device. Valid values
- are 1 through 8.
- corr1..corr4 are up to 4 numerical correction factors, which will be added
- to the respective value to calibrate the device. Note: rain-values will be
- multiplied and not added to the correction factor.
-
- The CUL_TX module interprets TX2/TX3 type of messages received by the CUL,
- see also http://www.f6fbb.org/domo/sensors/tx3_th.php.
- This protocol is used by the La Crosse TX3-TH thermo/hygro sensor and other
- wireless themperature sensors. Please report the manufacturer/model of other
- working devices.
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> CUL_TX <code> [corr] [minsecs]
-
-
- <code> is the code of the autogenerated address of the TX device (0
- to 127)
- corr is a correction factor, which will be added to the value received from
- the device.
- minsecs are the minimum seconds between two log entries or notifications
- from this device. E.g. if set to 300, logs of the same type will occure
- with a minimum rate of one per 5 minutes even if the device sends a message
- every minute. (Reduces the log file size and reduces the time to display
- the plots)
-
- The CUL_EM module interprets EM type of messages received by the CUL, notably
- from EMEM, EMWZ or EMGZ devices.
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> CUL_EM <code> [corr1 corr2
- CostPerUnit BasicFeePerMonth]
-
- <code> is the code which must be set on the EM device. Valid values
- are 1 through 12. 1-4 denotes EMWZ, 5-8 EMEM and 9-12 EMGZ devices.
-
- corr1 is used to correct the current number, corr2
- for the total number.
-
-
for EMWZ devices you should specify the rotation speed (R/kW)
- of your watt-meter (e.g. 150) for corr1 and 12 times this value for
- corr2
-
for EMEM devices the corr1 value is 0.01, and the corr2 value is
- 0.001
-
-
-
- CostPerUnit and BasicFeePerMonth are used to compute your
- daily and mothly fees. Your COST will appear in the log, generated once
- daiy (without the basic fee) or month (with the bassic fee included). Your
- definition should look like E.g.:
-
-
- Tipp: You can configure your EMWZ device to show in the CUM column of the
- STATE reading the current reading of your meter. For this purpose: multiply
- the current reading (from the real device) with the corr1 value (RperKW),
- and substract the RAW CUM value from it. Now set the basis reading of your
- EMWZ device (named emwz) to this value.
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- The CUL_IR module interprets Infrared messages received by the CUN/CUNO/CUNOv2/TuxRadio.
- Those devices can receive Infrared Signals from basically any Remote controller and will transform
- that information in a so called Button-Code
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> CUL_IR <IODev>
-
- <IODev> is the devicename of the IR-receivung device, e.g. CUNO1.
-
- Your definition should look like E.g.:
-
- define IR-Dev CUL_IR CUNO1
-
-
-
- Set
-
-
-
irLearnForSec
- Sets the CUL_IR device in an IR-Code Learning mode for the given seconds. Any received IR-Code will
- be stored as a Button attribute for this devices. The name of these attributes is dependent on the two
- attributes learncount and learnprefix.
- Attention: Before learning IR-Codes the CUL_IR device needs to be set in IR-Receiving mode
- by modifying the irReceive attribute.
-
-
-
irSend
- Sends out IR-commands via the connected IODev. The IR-command can be specified as buttonname according
- to Button.* or as IR-Code directly. If a buttonname is specified, the
- corresponding IR-Code will be sent out.
- Example:
-
set IR-Dev irSend ButtonA001
- If defining an IR-Code directly the following Code-Syntax needs to be followed:
-
IRCode: <PP><AAAA><CCCC><FF>
- with P = Protocol; A = Address; C = Command; F = Flags
- With the Flags you can modify IR-Repetition. Flags between 00-0E will produce
- 0-15 IR-Repetitions.
- You can type the IR-Code as plain as above, or with a heading "I" as learnt for the buttons.
- Example:
- set IR-Dev irSend 0A07070F0F02
- set IR-Dev irSend I0A07070F0F00
-
-
irReceive
- Configure the IR Transceiver of the <IODev> (the CUNO1). Available
- arguments are:
-
-
OFF
- Switching off the reception of IR signals. This is the default.
-
-
ON
- Switching on the reception of IR signals. This is WITHOUT filtering repetitions. This is
- not recommended as many remote controls do repeat their signals.
-
-
ON_NR
- Switching on the reception of IR signals with filtering of repetitions. This is
- the recommended modus operandi.
-
-
-
-
Button.*
- Button.* is the wildcard for all learnt IR-Codes. IR-Codes are learnt as Button-Attributes.
- The name for a learnt Button - IR-Code is compiled out of three elements:
-
- Button<learnprefix><learncount>
-
- When the CUL_IR device is set into learning mode it will generate a
- new button-attribute for each new IR-Code received.This is done according to the following syntax:
-
- <Button-Attribute-Name> <IR-Code>
- Examples of learnt button-attributes with EMPTY <learnprefix> and <learncount> starting from 1:
-
- To make sure that something happens when this IR-code is received later on one has to modify the attribute
- and to add commands as attribute values.
- Examples:
-
- Button001 I02029A000000 set WZ_Lamp on
- Button002 I02029A000001 set Switch on
Group.*
- Group.* is the wildcard for IR-Code groups. With these attributes one can define
- IR-Code parts, which may match to several Button-IR-Codes.
- This is done by defining group-attributes that contain only parts of the IR-Code.
- The syntax is:
-
- <Group-Attribute-Name> <IR-Code>
- Examples of a group-attribute is:
-
- Group001 I02029A
- With this all IR-Codes starting with I02029A will match the Group001.
-
-
learncount
- learncount is used to store the next button-code-number that needs to be learned.
- By manually modifying this attribute new button sequences can be arranged.
-
-
learnprefix
- learnprefix is a string which will be added to the button-attribute-name.
- A button-attribute-name is constructed by:
-
- Button<learnprefix><learncount>
- If learnprefix is empty the button-attribute-name only contains the term
- "Button" and the actual number of learncount.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ESA2000
-
- The ESA2000 module interprets ESA2000 type of messages received by the CUL,
- currently only for ESA2000 LED devices.
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> ESA2000 <code>
- [base1 base2]
-
- <code> is the 4 digit HEX code identifying the devices.
-
- base1/2 is added to the total kwh as a base (Hoch- und Niedertarifzählerstand).
-
- Correct device definition is the key for HM environment simple maintenance.
-
-
- Background to define entities:
- HM devices has a 3 byte (6 digit hex value) HMid - which is key for
- addressing. Each device hosts one or more channels. HMid for a channel is
- the device's HMid plus the channel number (1 byte, 2 digit) in hex.
- Channels should be defined for all multi-channel devices. Channel entities
- cannot be defined if the hosting device does not exist Note: FHEM
- mappes channel 1 to the device if it is not defined explicitely. Therefore
- it does not need to be defined for single channel devices.
-
- Note: if a device is deleted all assotiated channels will be removed as
- well. An example for a full definition of a 2 channel switch is given
- below:
-
-
-
- livingRoomSwitch is the device managing communication. This device is
- defined prior to channels to be able to setup references.
- LivingroomMainLight is channel 01 dealing with status of light, channel
- peers and channel assotiated register. If not defined channel 01 is covered
- by the device entity. LivingRoomBackLight is the second 'channel',
- channel 02. Its definition is mandatory to operate this function.
-
- Sender specials: HM threats each button of remotes, push buttons and
- similar as channels. It is possible (not necessary) to define a channel per
- button. If all channels are defined access to pairing informatin is
- possible as well as access to channel related register. Furthermore names
- make the traces better readable.
-
- define may also be invoked by the autocreate
- module, together with the necessary hmClass and subType attributes.
- Usually you issue a hmPairForSec and press the
- corresponding button on the device to be paired, or issue a hmPairSerial set command if the device is a receiver
- and you know its serial number. Autocreate will then create a fhem
- device and set all necessary attributes. Without pairing the device
- will not accept messages from fhem. fhem may create the device even if
- the pairing is not successful. Upon a successful pairing you'll see a
- CommandAccepted entry in the details section of the CUL_HM device.
-
- If you cannot use autocreate, then you have to specify:
-
-
the <6-digit-hex-code>or HMid+ch <8-digit-hex-code>
- It is the unique, hardcoded device-address and cannot be changed (no,
- you cannot choose it arbitrarily like for FS20 devices). You may
- detect it by inspecting the fhem log.
-
the hmClass attribute
- which is either sender or receiver
-
the subType attribute
- which is one of switch dimmer blindActuator remote sensor swi
- pushButton threeStateSensor motionDetector keyMatic winMatic
- smokeDetector
-
- Without these attributes fhem won't be able to decode device messages
- appropriately.
-
- Notes
-
-
If the interface is a CUL device, the rfmode
- attribute of the corresponding CUL/CUN device must be set to HomeMatic.
- Note: this mode is BidCos/Homematic only, you will not receive
- FS20/HMS/EM/S300 messages via this device. Previously defined FS20/HMS
- etc devices must be assigned to a different input device (CUL/FHZ/etc).
-
-
Currently supported device families: remote, switch, dimmer,
- blindActuator, motionDetector, smokeDetector, threeStateSensor,
- THSensor, winmatic. Special devices: KS550, HM-CC-TC and the KFM100.
-
-
Device messages can only be interpreted correctly if the device type is
- known. fhem will extract the device type from a "pairing request"
- message, even if it won't respond to it (see hmPairSerial and hmPairForSec to enable pairing).
- As an alternative, set the correct subType and model attributes, for a
- list of possible subType values see "attr hmdevice ?".
-
-
The so called "AES-Encryption" is in reality a signing request: if it is
- enabled, an actor device will only execute a received command, if a
- correct answer to a request generated by the actor is received. This
- means:
-
-
Reaction to commands is noticably slower, as 3 messages are sent
- instead of one before the action is processed by the actor.
-
Every command and its final ack from the device is sent in clear,
- so an outside observer will know the status of each device.
-
The firmware implementation is buggy: the "toggle" event is executed
- before the answer for the signing request is received, at
- least by some switches (HM-LC-Sw1-Pl and HM-LC-SW2-PB-FM).
-
The HMLAN configurator will answer signing
- requests by itself, and if it is configured with the 3-byte address
- of a foreign CCU which is still configurerd with the default
- password, it is able to answer signing requests correctly.
-
AES-Encryption is not useable with a CUL device as the interface,
- but it is supported with a HMLAN. Due to the issues above I do not
- recommend using Homematic encryption at all.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- Note: devices which are normally send-only (remote/sensor/etc) must be set
- into pairing/learning mode in order to receive the following commands.
-
-
-
- General commands (available to most hm devices):
-
-
actiondetect <[hhh:mm]|off>
- Supports 'alive' or better 'not alive' detection for devices. [hhh:mm] is the maxumin silent time for the device. Upon no message received in this period an event will be raised "<device> is dead". If the device sends again another notification is posted "<device> is alive".
- This actiondetect will be autocreated for each device with build in cyclic status report.
- Controlling entity is a pseudo device "ActionDetector" with HMId "000000".
- Due to performance considerations the report latency is set to 600sec (10min). It can be controlled by the attribute "actCycle" of "ActionDetector".
- Once entered to the supervision the HM device has 2 attributes:
-
- actStatus: activity status of the device
- actCycle: detection period [hhh.mm]
-
- Furthermore the overall function can be viewed checking out the "ActionDetector" entity. Here the status of all entities is present in the READING section.
- Note: This function can be enabled for devices with non-cyclic messages as well. It is up to the user to enter a reasonable cycletime.
-
-
getConfig
- Will read major configuration items stored in the HM device. Executed
- on a channel it will read pair Inforamtion, List0, List1 and List3 of
- the 1st internal peer. Furthermore the peerlist will be retrieved for
- teh given channel. If executed on a device the command will get the
- above info or all assotated channels. Not included will be the
- configuration for additional peers. The command is a shortcut
- for a selection of other commands.
-
-
getdevicepair
- will read the peers (see devicepair) that are assigned to a channel.
- This command needs to be executed per channel. Information will be
- stored in the field Peers of the channel (see devicepair for specials
- about single-channel deivces). For sender the same procedure as
- described in devicepair is necessary to get a reading. Also note that
- a proper diaplay will only be possible if define per channel (button)
- was done - see define.
-
-
getpair
- read pair information of the device. See also pair
-
-
getRegRaw [List0|List1|List2|List3|List4|List5|List6]
- <peerChannel>
-
- Read registerset in raw format. Description of the registers is beyond
- the scope of this documentation.
-
- Registers are structured in so called lists each containing a set of
- registers.
-
- List0: device-level settings e.g. CUL-pairing or dimmer thermal limit
- settings.
-
- List1: per channel settings e.g. time to drive the blind up and
- down.
-
- List3: per 'link' settings - means per peer-channel. This is a lot of
- data!. It controlls actions taken upon receive of a trigger from the
- peer.
-
- List4: settings for channel (button) of a remote
-
- <PeerChannel> paired HMid+ch, i.e. 4 byte (8 digit) value like
- '12345601'. It is mendatory for List 3 and 4 and can be left out for
- List 0 and 1.
-
- 'all' can be used to get data of each paired link of the channel.
-
- 'selfxx' can be used to address data for internal channels (associated
- with the build-in switches if any). xx is the number of the channel in
- decimal.
-
- Note1: execution depends on the entity. If List1 is requested on a
- device rather then a channel the command will retrieve List1 for all
- channels assotiated. List3 with peerChannel = all will get all link
- for all channel if executed on a device.
-
- Note2: for 'sender' see remote
-
- Note3: the information retrieval may take a while - especially for
- devices with a lot of channels and links. It may be necessary to
- refresh the web interface manually to view the results
-
- Note4: the direct buttons on a HM device are hidden by default.
- Nevertheless those are implemented as links as well. To get access to
- the 'internal links' it is necessary to issue 'set <name> setReg
- intKeyVisib 1' or 'set <name> setRegRaw List0 2 81'. Reset it
- by replacing '81' with '01' example:
-
-
- set mydimmer getRegRaw List1
- set mydimmer getRegRaw List3 all
-
-
-
pair
- Pair the device again with its known serialNumber (e.g. after a device
- reset) to the CUL. If paired, devices will report status information to
- the CUL. If not paired, the device wont respond to requests, and
- certain status information is also not reported. Paring is on device
- level and is common for all channels. See also getPair and unpair.
-
regRaw [List0|List1|List2|List3|List4] <addr> <data>
- <peerChannel>
- Will set register for device or channel. See also getRegRaw. <addr> and
- <data> are 1 byte values that need to be given in hex.
- Example:
-
- set mydimmer regRaw List1 0B 10 00000000
- set mydimmer regRaw List1 0C 00 00000000
-
- will set the max drive time up for a blind actor to 25,6sec
-
regSet <regName> <value> <peerChannel>
- For some major register a readable version is implemented supporting
- register names <regName> and value conversionsing. Only a subset
- of register can be supproted.
- <value> is the data in human readable manner that will be written
- to the register.
- <peerChannel> is required if this register is defined on a per
- 'devicepair' base. It can be set to '0' other wise.See getRegRaw for full description
- Supported register for a device can be explored using
-
set regSet ? 0 0
- Condensed register description will be printed
- using
-
set regSet <regname> ? 0
-
-
reset
- Factory reset the device. You need to pair it again to use it with
- fhem.
-
-
sign [on|off]
- Activate or deactivate signing (also called AES encryption, see the note above). Warning: if the device is attached via
- a CUL, you won't be able to switch it (or deactivate signing) from
- fhem before you reset the device directly.
-
-
statusRequest
- Update device status. For multichannel devices it should be issued on
- an per channel base
-
-
unpair
- "Unpair" the device, i.e. make it available to pair with other master
- devices. See pair for description.
-
virtual <number of buttons>
- configures a defined curcuit as virtual remote controll. Then number
- of button being added is 1 to 255. If the command is issued a second
- time for the same entity additional buttons will be added.
- Example for usage:
-
- define vRemote CUL_HM 100000 # the selected HMid must not be in use
- set vRemote virtual 20 # define 20 button remote controll
- set vRemote_Btn4 devicepair 0 <actorchannel> # pairs Button 4 and 5 to the given channel
- set vRemote_Btn4 press
- set vRemote_Btn5 press long
-
on-for-timer <sec> -
- set the switch on for the given seconds [0-85825945]. Note:
- off-for-timer like FS20 is not supported. It needs to be programmed
- on link level.
-
on-till <time> - set the switch on for the given end time.
-
set <name> on-till 20:32:10
- Currently a max of 24h is supported with endtime.
-
toggle - toggle the switch.
-
-
-
dimmer, blindActuator
-
-
0 - 100 [on-time] [ramp-time]
- set the actuator to the given value (in percent)
- with a resolution of 0.5.
- Optional for dimmer on-time and ramp time can be choosen, both in seconds with 0.1s granularity.
- On-time is analog "on-for-timer".
- Ramp-time default is 2.5s, 0 means instantanous
-
-
on set level to 100%
-
off set level to 0%
-
toggle - toggle between off and the last on-value
-
remotes, pushButton
- This class of devices does not react on requests unless they are put
- to learn mode. FHEM obeys this behavior by stacking all requests until
- learn mode is detected. Manual interaction of the user is necessary to
- activate learn mode. Whether commands are pending is reported on
- device level with parameter 'protCmdPend'.
-
-
devicepair <btn_no> <hmDevice> [single|dual]
- [set|unset] [actor|remote]
-
- Pair/unpair will establish a connection between a sender-channel and
- an actuator-channel called link in HM nomenclatur. Trigger from
- sender-channel, e.g. button press, will be processed by the
- actuator-channel without CCU interaction. Sender-channel waits for an
- acknowledge of each actuator paired to it. Positive indication will be
- given once all actuator responded.
-
- Sender must be set into learning mode after command execution. FHEM
- postpones the commands until then.
-
- devicepair can be repeated for an existing devicepair. This will cause
- parameter reset to HM defaults for this link.
-
- Even though the command is executed on a remote or push-button it will
- as well take effect on the actuator directly. Both sides' pairing is
- virtually independant and has different impact on sender and receiver
- side.
-
- Devicepairing of one actuator-channel to multiple sender-channel as
- well as one sender-channel to multiple Actuator-channel is
- possible.
-
- <hmDevice> is the actuator-channel to be paired.
-
- <btn_no> is the sender-channel (button) to be paired. If
- 'single' is choosen buttons are counted from 1. For 'dual' btn_no is
- the number of the Button-pair to be used. I.e. '3' in dual is the
- 3rd button pair correcponding to button 5 and 6 in single mode.
-
- If the command is executed on a channel the btn_no is ignored.
-
- [single|dual]: this mode impacts the default behavior of the
- Actuator upon using this button. E.g. a dimmer can be learned to a
- single button or to a button pair.
-
- 'dual' (default) Button pairs two buttons to one actuator. With a
- dimmer this means one button for dim-up and one for dim-down.
-
- 'single' uses only one button of the sender. It is useful for e.g. for
- simple switch actuator to toggle on/off. Nevertheless also dimmer can
- be learned to only one button.
-
- 'set' will setup pairing for the channels
-
- 'unset' will remove the pairing for the channels
-
- [actor|remote|both] limits the execution to only actor or only remote.
- This gives the user the option to redo the pairing on the remote
- channel while the settings in the actor will not be removed.
-
- Example:
- set myRemote devicepair 2 mySwActChn single set # pair second button to an actuator channel
- set myRmtBtn devicepair 0 mySwActChn single set #myRmtBtn is a button of the remote. '0' is not processed here
- set myRemote devicepair 2 mySwActChn dual set #pair button 3 and 4
- set myRemote devicepair 3 mySwActChn dual unset #remove pairing for button 5 and 6
- set myRemote devicepair 3 mySwActChn dual unset aktor #remove pairing for button 5 and 6 in actor only
- set myRemote devicepair 3 mySwActChn dual set remote #pair button 5 and 6 on remote only. Link settings il mySwActChn will be maintained
-
press [long|short]
- simulates a button press short (default) or long. Note that the current
- implementation will not specify the duration for long. Only one trigger
- will be sent of type "long".
-
-
-
-
smokeDetector
- Note: All these commands work right now only if you have more then one
- smoekDetector, and you paired them to form a group. For issuing the
- commands you have to use the master of this group, and currently you
- have to guess which of the detectors is the master.
-
-
test - execute a network test
-
alarmOn - initiate an alarm
-
alarmOff - switch off the alarm
-
-
-
-
4Dis (HM-PB-4DIS-WM)
-
-
text <btn_no> [on|off] <text1> <text2>
- Set the text on the display of the device. To this purpose issue
- this set command first (or a number of them), and then choose from
- the teach-in menu of the 4Dis the "Central" to transmit the data.
- Example:
-
- set 4Dis text 1 on On Lamp
- set 4Dis text 1 off Kitchen Off
-
-
-
-
-
Climate-Control (HM-CC-TC)
-
-
day-temp <tmp>
- night-temp <tmp>
- party-temp <tmp>
- desired-temp <tmp>
- Set different temperatures. Temp must be between 6 and 30
- Celsius, and precision is half a degree.
-
tempListSat HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
- tempListSun HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
- tempListMon HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
- tempListTue HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
- tempListThu HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
- tempListWed HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
- tempListFri HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
- Specify a list of temperature intervals. Up to 24 intervals can be
- specified for each week day, the resolution is 10 Minutes. The
- last time spec must always be 24:00.
- Example: set th tempListSat 06:00 19 23:00 22.5 24:00 19
- Meaning: until 6:00 temperature shall be 19, from then until 23:00 temperature shall be
- 22.5, thereafter until midnight, 19 degrees celsius is desired.
led [off|red|green|yellow]
- switches the LED of the channel to the color. If the command is
- executed on a device it will set all LEDs to the specified
- color.
- For Expert all LEDs can be set individual by providing a 8-digit hex number to the device.
-
ilum <brightness><duration>
- <brightness> [0-15] of backlight.
- <duration> [0-127] in sec. 0 is permanent 'on'.
-
-
-
-
OutputUnit (HM-OU-CFM-PL)
-
-
led <color>[,<color>..]
- Possible colors are [redL|greenL|yellowL|redS|greenS|yellowS]. A
- sequence of colors can be given separating the color entries by ','.
- White spaces must not be used in the list. 'S' indicates short and
- 'L' long ilumination.
-
playTone <MP3No>[,<MP3No>..]
- Play a series of tones. List is to be entered separated by ','. White
- spaces must not be used in the list.
-
-
-
HM-RC-19xxx
-
-
alarm <count>
- issue an alarm message to the remote
-
service <count>
- issue an service message to the remote
-
symbol <symbol> [set|unset]
- activate a symbol as available on the remote.
-
beep [off|1|2|3]
- activate tone
-
backlight [off|on|slow|fast]
- activate backlight
-
display <text> comma unit tone backlight <symbol(s)>
-
- control display of the remote
- <text> : up to 5 chars
- comma : 'comma' activates the comma, 'no' leaves it off
- [unit] : set the unit symbols.
- [off|Proz|Watt|x3|C|x5|x6|x7|F|x9|x10|x11|x12|x13|x14|x15]. Currently
- the x3..x15 display is not tested.
-
- tone : activate one of the 3 tones [off|1|2|3]
-
- backlight: activate backlight flash mode [off|on|slow|fast]
-
- <symbol(s)> activate symbol display. Multople symbols can be
- acticated at the same time, concatinating them comma separated. Don't
- use spaces here. Possiblesymbols are
-
- [bulb|switch|window|door|blind|scene|phone|bell|clock|arrowUp|arrowDown]
- Example:
-
- # "hello" in display, symb bulb on, backlight, beep
- set FB1 display Hello no off 1 on bulb
- # "1234,5" in display with unit 'W'. Symbols scene,phone,bell and
- # clock are active. Backlight flashing fast, Beep is second tone
- set FB1 display 12345 comma Watt 2 fast scene,phone,bell,clock
-
-
-
-
-
keyMatic
-
The Keymatic uses the AES signed communication. Therefore the control
- of the Keymatic is only together with the HM-LAN adapter possible. But
- the CUL can read and react on the status information of the
- Keymatic.
-
-
lock
- The lock bolt moves to the locking position
-
unlock [sec]
- The lock bolt moves to the unlocking position. [sec]: Sets the
- delay in seconds after the lock automatically locked again. 0 -
- 65535 seconds
-
open [sec]
- Unlocked the door so that the door can be opened.
- [sec]: Sets the delay in seconds after the lock automatically locked
- again. 0 - 65535 seconds
-
inhibit [on|off]
- Block / unblock all directly paired remotes and the hardware buttons of the
- keyMatic. If inhibit set on, the door lock drive can be controlled only by
- FHEM.
- Examples:
-
- # Lock the lock
- set keymatic lock
- # open the door and relock the lock after 60 seconds
- set keymatic unlock 60
-
-
-
-
-
- Debugging:
-
-
raw <data> ...
- Only needed for experimentation.
- send a list of "raw" commands. The first command will be
- immediately sent, the next one after the previous one is acked by
- the target. The length will be computed automatically, and the
- message counter will be incremented if the first two charcters are
- ++. Example (enable AES):
- set hm1 raw ++A001F100001234560105000000001\
- ++A001F10000123456010802010AF10B000C00\
- ++A001F1000012345601080801\
- ++A001F100001234560106
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
-
param <paramName>
- returns the content of the relevant parameter for the entity.
- Note: if this command is executed on a channel and 'model' is
- requested the content hosting device's 'model' will be returned.
-
-
reg <addr> <list> <peerID>
- returns the value of a register. The data is taken from the storage in
- FHEM. It is not read again. If registercontent is not present at this
- point in time please use getReg in advance.
-
- <addr> address in hex of the register. Registername can be used alternaly if available in FHEM.
- <list> list from which the register is taken. If rgistername is used list is ignored and can be set to 0.
- <peerID> identifies the registerbank in case of list3 and list4. It an be set to dummy if not used.
-
-
regList
- returns a list of register that are implemented in FHEM for this device.
-
hmClass,
- model,
- subType
- These attributes are set automatically after a successful pairing.
- They are not supposed to be set by hand, and are necessary in order to
- correctly interpret device messages or to be able to send them.
-
rawToReadable
- Used to convert raw KFM100 values to readable data, based on measured
- values. E.g. fill slowly your container, while monitoring the
- values reported with inform. You'll see:
-
- Apply these values with: "attr KFM100 rawToReadable 10:0 50:20 79:40 270:100".
- fhem will do a linear interpolation for values between the bounderies.
-
-
unit
- set the reported unit by the KFM100 if rawToReadable is active. E.g.
- attr KFM100 unit Liter
-
- The CUL_HOERMANN module registers the 868MHz Hoermann Garage-Door-Opener
- signals received by the CUL. Note: As the structure of this signal is
- not understood, no checksum is verified, so it is likely to receive bogus
- messages.
-
- The CUL_RFR module is used to "attach" a second CUL to your base CUL, and
- use it as a repeater / range extender. RFR is shorthand for RF_ROUTER.
- Transmission of the data uses the CC1101 packet capabilities with GFSK
- modulation at 250kBaud after pinging the base CUL at the usual 1kBaud. When
- configured, the RFR device can be used like another CUL connected directly to
- fhem.
-
-
-
- Before you can use this feature in fhem, you have to enable/configure RF
- ROUTING in both CUL's:
-
-
First give your base CUL (which remains connected to the PC) an RFR ID
- by issuing the fhem command "set MyCUL raw ui0100". With this command
- the base CUL will get the ID 01, and it will not relay messages to other
- CUL's (as the second number is 00).
-
Now replace the base CUL with the RFR CUL, and set its id by issuing
- the fhem command "set MyCUL raw ui0201". Now remove this CUL and attach the
- original, base CUL again. The RFR CUL got the id 02, and will relay every
- message to the base CUL with id 01.
-
Take the RFR CUL, and attach it to an USB power supply, as seen on
- the image. As the configured base id is not 00, it will activate RF
- reception on boot, and will start sending messages to the base CUL.
-
Now you have to define this RFR cul as a fhem device:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> CUL_RFR <own-id> <base-id>
-
- <own-id> is the id of the RFR CUL not connected to the PC,
- <base-id> is the id of the CUL connected to the PC. Both parameters
- have two characters, each representing a one byte hex number.
- Example:
-
- set MyCUL raw ui0100
- # Now replace the base CUL with the RFR CUL
- set MyCUL raw ui0201
- # Reattach the base CUL to the PC and attach the RFR CUL to a
- USB power supply
- define MyRFR CUL_RFR 02 01
-
- The rest of the attributes is the same as for the CUL.
-
-
-
-
-
EIB / KNX
-
- EIB/KNX is a standard for building automation / home automation.
- It is mainly based on a twisted pair wiring, but also other mediums (ip, wireless) are specified.
-
- While the module TUL represents the connection to the EIB network,
- the EIB modules represent individual EIB devices. This module provides a basic set of operations (on, off, on-till, etc.)
- to switch on/off EIB devices. Sophisticated setups can be achieved by combining a number of
- EIB module instances or by sending raw hex values to the network (set raw ).
-
- EIB/KNX defines a series of Datapoint Type as standard data types used
- to allow general interpretation of values of devices manufactured by diferent companies.
- This datatypes are used to interpret the status of a device, so the state in FHEM will then
- show the correct value.
-
-
-
- Define an EIB device, connected via a TUL. The
- <group> parameters are either a group name notation (0-15/0-15/0-255) or the hex representation of the value (0-f0-f0-ff).
- The <main group> is used for sending of commands to the EIB network.
- The state of the instance will be updated when a new state is received from the network for any of the given groups.
- This is usefull for example for toggle switches where a on command is send to one group and the real state (on or off) is
- responded back on a second group.
-
- For actors and sensors the
- autocreate module may help.
-
- Example:
-
model
- set the model according to the datapoint types defined by the (EIB / KNX specifications).
- The device state in FHEM is interpreted and shown according to the specification.
-
-
dpt5
-
percent
-
dpt7
-
length-mm
-
current-mA
-
brightness
-
timeperiod-ms
-
timeperiod-min
-
timeperiod-h
-
dpt9
-
tempsensor
-
lightsensor
-
dpt10
-
time
-
dpt11
-
date
-
dpt12
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
EnOcean
-
- Devices sold by numerous hardware verndors (e.g. Eltako, Peha, etc), using
- the RF Protocol provided by the EnOcean Alliance.
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> EnOcean <ID>
-
-
- Define an EnOcean device, connected via a TCM. The
- <ID> parameter is an 8 digit hex number. For remotes and sensors the
- autocreate module may help you.
-
- Example:
-
- define switch1 EnOcean ffc54500
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
-
MD15 commands. Note: The command is not sent until the MD15
- wakes up and sends a mesage, usually every 10 minutes.
-
-
actuator <value>
- Set the actuator to the specifed percent value (0-100)
-
desired-temp <value>
- Use the builtin PI regulator, and set the desired temperature to the
- specified degree. The actual value will be taken from the temperature
- reported by the MD15 or from the attribute actualTemp if it is set
-
unattended
- Do not regulate the MD15.
-
-
-
subType dimmCtrl, tested with ElTako Dimmer only
-
- where value is one of A0,AI,B0,BI,C0,CI,D0,DI, combinations of
- these and released, in fact we are trying to emulate a PTM100 type remote.
-
-
- If you define an eventMap attribute with on/off,
- then you'll be able to easily set the device from the WEB frontend.
- In order to control devices, you cannot reuse the ID's of other devices
- (like remotes), instead you have to create your own, which must be in the
- allowed ID-Range of the underlying IO device. For this first query the
- TCM with the "get <tcm> idbase" command. You can use
- up to 128 ID's starting with the base shown there. If you are using an
- ID outside of the allowed range, you'll see an ERR_ID_RANGE message in the
- fhem log.
-
- Example:
-
- set switch1 BI
- set switch1 B0,CI
- attr eventMap BI:on B0:off
- set switch1 on
-
actualTemp
- The value of the actual temperature, used when controlling MD15 devices.
- Should by filled via a notify from a distinct temperature sensor. If
- absent, the reported temperature from the MD15 is used.
-
-
-
-
-
- Generated events:
-
-
switch. Switches (remotes) with more than one (pair) of buttons
- are separate devices with separate address.
-
-
A0
-
AI
-
B0
-
BI
-
C0
-
CI
-
D0
-
DI
-
A0,BI
-
<BtnX,BtnY> where BtnX and BtnY is one of the above, e.g.
- A0,BI or D0,CI
-
buttons:released
-
buttons: released
-
-
-
FSB61/FSM61 (set model to FSB61 or FSM61 manually)
-
-
released
- The status of the device my become "released", this is not the case
- for a normal switch.
-
-
-
windowHandle (HOPPE SecuSignal). Set the subType attr to windowHandle.
-
-
closed
-
open
-
tilted
-
open from tilted
-
-
keycard. Set the subType attr to keycard. (untested)
-
-
keycard inserted
-
keycard removed
-
-
STM-250 Door and window contact.
-
-
closed
-
open
-
learnBtn: on
-
-
SR04* (Temp sensor + Presence button and desired temp dial).
- Set the
- model attribute to one of SR04 SR04P SR04PT SR04PST SR04PMS or the
- subType attribute to SR04.
-
MD15-FtL-HE (Heating/Valve-regulator)
- The subType attibute must be MD15. This is done if the device was created by
- autocreate.
-
-
$actuator %
-
currentValue: $actuator
-
serviceOn: [yes|no]
-
energyInput: [enabled|disabled]
-
energyStorage: [charged|empty]
-
battery: [ok|empty]
-
cover: [open|closed]
-
tempSensor: [failed|ok]
-
window: [open|closed]
-
actuator: [ok|obstructed]
-
temperature: $tmp
-
-
-
Ratio Presence Sensor Eagle PM101.
- Set the model attribute to PM101
-
-
brightness: $lux
-
channel1: [on|off]
-
channel2: [on|off]
-
-
-
FAH60,FAH63,FIH63 brigthness senor.
- Set subType to FAH or model to FAH60/FAH63/FIH63 manually.
-
-
brightness: $lux
-
state: $lux
-
-
-
FABH63,FBH55,FBH63,FIBH63 Motion/brightness sensor.
- Set subType to FBH or model to FABH63/FBH55/FBH63/FIBH63 manually.
-
-
brightness: $lux
-
motion:[yes|no]
-
state: [motion: yes|no]
-
-
FTF55 Temperature sensor.
- Set subType to FTF or model to FTF55 manually.
-
-
temperature: $temp
-
state: $temp
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
EM
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> EM <em1010pc-device>
-
-
- Define a EM1010PC USB device. As the EM1010PC was not designed to be used
- with a PC attached to it all the time, it won't transmit received signals
- automatically, fhem has to poll it every 5 minutes.
-
- Currently there is no way to read the internal log of the EM1010PC with
- fhem, use the program em1010.pl in the contrib directory for this
- purpose.
-
- Examples:
-
- define em EM /dev/elv_em1010pc
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set EM <value>
-
- where value is either time or reset.
- If time has arguments of the form YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS, then the specified
- time will be set, else the time from the host.
- Note: after reset you should set the time.
-
-
- Define up to 4 EM1000WZ attached to the EM1010PC. The device number must
- be between 1 and 4. Defining an EMWZ will schedule an internal task, which
- reads the status of the device every 5 minutes, and triggers notify/filelog
- commands.
-
- Example:
-
- define emwz EMWZ 1
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set EMWZdevice <param> <value>
- where param is one of:
-
-
rperkw
- Number of rotations for a KiloWatt of the EM1000WZ device (actually
- of the device where the EM1000WZ is attached to). Without setting
- this correctly, all other readings will be incorrect.
-
alarm
- Alarm in WATT. if you forget to set it, the default value is
- rediculously low (random), and if a value above this threshold is
- received, the EM1010PC will start beeping once every minute. It can
- be very annoying.
-
price
- The price of one KW in EURO (use e.g. 0.20 for 20 Cents). It is used
- only on the EM1010PC display, it is of no interest for FHEM.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
- get EMWZ status
-
- This is the same command which is scheduled every 5 minutes internally.
-
-
- Define up to 4 EM1000GZ attached to the EM1010PC. The device number must
- be between 9 and 12.
- Defining an EMGZ will schedule an internal task, which reads the
- status of the device every 5 minutes, and triggers notify/filelog commands.
-
-
- Example:
-
- define emgz EMGZ 9
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set EMGZdevice <param> <value>
- where param is:
-
-
price
- The price of one KW in EURO (use e.g. 0.20 for 20 Cents). It is used
- only on the EM1010PC display, it is of no interest for FHEM.
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
- get EMGZ status
-
- This is the same command which is scheduled every 5 minutes internally.
-
-
- Define up to 4 EM1000EM attached to the EM1010PC. The device number must
- be between 5 and 8.
- Defining an EMEM will schedule an internal task, which reads the
- status of the device every 5 minutes, and triggers notify/filelog commands.
- Note: Currently this device does not support a "set" function.
-
-
- Example:
-
- define emem EMEM 5
-
-
-
-
- Set
N/A
-
-
-
- Get
-
- get EMEM status
-
- This is the same command which is scheduled every 5 minutes internally.
-
- KM271 is the name of the communication device for the Buderus Logamatic 2105
- or 2107 heating controller. It is connected via a serial line to the fhem
- computer. The fhem module sets the communication device into log-mode, which
- then will generate an event on change of the inner parameters. There are
- about 20.000 events a day, the FHEM module ignores about 90% of them, if the
- all_km271_events attribute is not set.
-
-
- Note: this module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module.
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> KM271 <serial-device-name>
-
- Example:
-
- define KM271 KM271 /dev/ttyS0@2400
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set KM271 <param> [<value> [<values>]]
- where param is one of:
-
-
hk1_tagsoll <temp>
- sets the by day temperature for heating circuit 1
- 0.5 celsius resolution - temperature between 10 and 30 celsius
-
hk2_tagsoll <temp>
- sets the by day temperature for heating circuit 2
- (see above)
-
hk1_nachtsoll <temp>
- sets the by night temperature for heating circuit 1
- (see above)
-
hk2_nachtsoll <temp>
- sets the by night temperature for heating circuit 2
- (see above)
-
hk1_betriebsart [automatik|nacht|tag]
- sets the working mode for heating circuit 1
-
-
automatik: the timer program is active and the summer configuration is in effect
-
nacht: manual by night working mode, no timer program is in effect
-
tag: manual by day working mode, no timer program is in effect
-
-
-
hk2_betriebsart [automatik|nacht|tag]
- sets the working mode for heating circuit 2
- (see above)
-
ww_soll <temp>
- sets the hot water temperature
- 1.0 celsius resolution - temperature between 30 and 60 celsius
-
ww_betriebsart [automatik|nacht|tag]
- sets the working mode for hot water
-
-
automatik: hot water production according to the working modes of both heating circuits
-
nacht: no hot water at all
-
tag: manual permanent hot water
-
-
ww_on-for-timer [period]
- start hot water production for the given period
- period must have the format HH:MM
- ww_betriebsart is set according to the attribut ww_timermode. For switching-off hot water a single one-time at command is automatically generated which will set ww_betriebsart back to nacht
-
hk1_programm [eigen|familie|frueh|spaet|vormittag|nachmittag|mittag|single|senior]
- sets the timer program for heating circuit 1
-
-
eigen: the custom program defined by the user (see below) is used
-
all others: predefined programs from Buderus for various situations (see Buderus manual for details)
-
-
hk2_programm [eigen|familie|frueh|spaet|vormittag|nachmittag|mittag|single|senior]
- sets the timer program for heating circuit 2
- (see above)
-
hk1_timer [<position> delete|<position> <on-day> <on-time> <off-day> <off-time>]
- sets (or deactivates) a by day working mode time interval for the custom program of heating circuit 1
-
-
position: addresses a slot of the custom timer program and must be between 1 and 21
- The slot will be set to the interval specified by the following on- and off-timepoints or is deactivated when the next argument is delete.
-
on-day: first part of the on-timepoint
- valid arguments are [mo|di|mi|do|fr|sa|so]
-
on-time: second part of the on-timepoint
- valid arguments have the format HH:MM (supported resolution: 10 min)
-
off-day: first part of the off-timepoint
- (see above)
-
off-time: second part of the off-timepoint
- valid arguments have the format HH:MM (supported resolution: 10 min)
-
- As the on-timepoint is reached, the heating circuit is switched to by day working mode and when the off-timepoint is attained, the circuit falls back to by night working mode.
- A program can be build up by chaining up to 21 of these intervals. They are ordered by the position argument. There's no behind the scene magic that will automatically consolidate the list.
- The consistency of the program is in the responsibility of the user.
-
- Example:
-
- set KM271 hk1_timer 1 mo 06:30 mo 08:20
-
- This will toogle the by day working mode every Monday at 6:30 and will fall back to by night working mode at 8:20 the same day.
-
hk2_timer [<position> delete|<position> <on-day> <on-time> <off-day> <off-time>]
- sets (or deactivates) a by day working mode time interval for the custom program of heating circuit 2
- (see above)
-
logmode set to logmode / request all readings again
all_km271_events
- If this attribute is set to 1, do not ignore following events:
- HK1_Vorlaufisttemperatur, HK2_Vorlaufisttemperatur, Kessel_Vorlaufisttemperatur,
- Kessel_Integral, Kessel_Integral1
- These events account for ca. 92% of all events.
- All UNKNOWN events are ignored too, most of them were only seen
- directly after setting the device into logmode.
-
-
-
ww_timermode [automatik|tag]
- Defines the working mode for the ww_on-for-timer command (default is tag).
- ww_on-for-timer will set the ww_betriebsart of the heater according to this attribute.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Generated events:
-
-
Abgastemperatur
-
Aussentemperatur
-
Aussentemperatur_gedaempft
-
Brenner_Ansteuerung
-
Brenner_Ausschalttemperatur
-
Brenner_Einschalttemperatur
-
Brenner_Laufzeit1_Minuten2
-
Brenner_Laufzeit1_Minuten1
-
Brenner_Laufzeit1_Minuten
-
Brenner_Laufzeit2_Minuten2
-
Brenner_Laufzeit2_Minuten1
-
Brenner_Laufzeit2_Minuten
-
Brenner_Mod_Stellglied
-
ERR_Fehlerspeicher1
-
ERR_Fehlerspeicher2
-
ERR_Fehlerspeicher3
-
ERR_Fehlerspeicher4
-
ERR_Letzter_Fehlerstatus
-
HK1_Ausschaltoptimierung
-
HK1_Betriebswerte1
-
HK1_Betriebswerte2
-
HK1_Einschaltoptimierung
-
HK1_Heizkennlinie_+10_Grad
-
HK1_Heizkennlinie_-10_Grad
-
HK1_Heizkennlinie_0_Grad
-
HK1_Mischerstellung
-
HK1_Pumpe
-
HK1_Raumisttemperatur
-
HK1_Raumsolltemperatur
-
HK1_Vorlaufisttemperatur
-
HK1_Vorlaufsolltemperatur
-
HK2_Ausschaltoptimierung
-
HK2_Betriebswerte1
-
HK2_Betriebswerte2
-
HK2_Einschaltoptimierung
-
HK2_Heizkennlinie_+10_Grad
-
HK2_Heizkennlinie_-10_Grad
-
HK2_Heizkennlinie_0_Grad
-
HK2_Mischerstellung
-
HK2_Pumpe
-
HK2_Raumisttemperatur
-
HK2_Raumsolltemperatur
-
HK2_Vorlaufisttemperatur
-
HK2_Vorlaufsolltemperatur
-
Kessel_Betrieb
-
Kessel_Fehler
-
Kessel_Integral
-
Kessel_Integral1
-
Kessel_Vorlaufisttemperatur
-
Kessel_Vorlaufsolltemperatur
-
Modulkennung
-
NoData
-
Versionsnummer_NK
-
Versionsnummer_VK
-
WW_Betriebswerte1
-
WW_Betriebswerte2
-
WW_Einschaltoptimierung
-
WW_Isttemperatur
-
WW_Pumpentyp
-
WW_Solltemperatur
-
-
- As I cannot explain all the values, I logged data for a period and plotted
- each received value in the following logs:
-
- All of these events are reported directly after initialization (or after
- requesting logmode), along with some 60 configuration records (6byte long
- each). Most parameters from these records are reverse engeneered, they
- all start with CFG_ for configuration and PRG_ for timer program information.
-
-
-
-
-
-
KS300
-
- Fhem can receive the KS300 radio (868.35 MHz) messages through FHZ, WS300 or an CUL
- device, so one of them must be defined first.
- This module services messages received by the FHZ device, if you use one of
- the other alternetives, see the WS300 or CUL_WS entries.
- Note: The KS555 is also reported to work.
-
-
-
- Define
-
-
- <housecode> is a four digit hex number,
- corresponding to the address of the KS300 device, right now it is ignored.
- The ml/raincounter defaults to 255 ml, but it must be specified if you wish
- to set the wind factor, which defaults to 1.0.
-
-
- Examples:
-
rainadjustment
- If this attribute is set, fhem automatically accounts for rain counter
- resets after a battery change and random counter switches as experienced
- by some users. The raw rain counter values are adjusted by an offset
- in order to flatten out the sudden large increases and decreases in
- the received rain counter values. Default is off.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MSG
-
- The MSG device is the backend device for all the message handling (I/O-engine).
- Under normal conditions only one MSG device is needed to serve multiple frontend
- message devices like file or email.
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> MSG
- Specifies the MSG device. A single MSG device could serve multiple MSG frontends.
- But, for special conditions there could be defined more than one MSG device.
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set <name> send|write <devicename>
-
- Notes:
-
- To send the data, both send or write could be used.
- The devicename is the name of a frontenddevice previously
- defined. Based on the type of the frontend device, the MSG device
- will send out the lines of data.
-
- Frontend devices are available for:
-
- For details about this devices, please review the device-definitions.
- After sending/writing the data, the data stills exists with the
- frontend device, MSG do not delete/purge any data, this must be done
- by the frontend device.
-
- The MSGFile device is a frontend device for message handling.
- With a MSGFile device data is written to disk (or other media).
- Multiple MSGFile devices could be defined.
- To write the data to disk, a MSG device is necessary.
- A MSGFile device needs the operating systems rights to write to the filesystem.
- To set the rights for a directory, please use OS related commands.
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> MSGFile <filename>
- Specifies the MSGFile device. At definition the message counter is set to 0.
- A filename must be specified at definition.
-
-
- Examples:
-
- define myFile MSGFile
-
-
-
- Set
-
set <name> add|clear|list [text]
- Set is used to manipulate the message buffer of the device. The message
- buffer is an array of lines of data, stored serial based on the incoming
- time into the buffer. Lines of data inside the buffer could not be deleted
- anymore, except of flashing the whole buffer.
-
add to add lines of data to the message buffer. All data behind
- "add" will be interpreted as text message. To add a carriage return to the data,
- please use the CR attribute.
-
-
clear to flash the message buffer and set the line counter to 0.
- All the lines of data are deleted and the buffer is flushed.
-
list to list the message buffer.
-
- Examples:
-
- set myFile add Dies ist Textzeile 1
- set myFile add Dies ist Textzeile 2
- set myFile clear
- Full working example to write two lines of data to a file:
- define myMsg MSG
- define myFile MSGFile /tmp/fhemtest.txt
- attr myFile filemode append
- set myFile add Textzeile 1
- set myFile add Textzeile 2
- set myMsg write myFile
- set myFile clear
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
filename
- sets the filename, must be a fully qualified filename.
- FHEM must have the rights to write this file to the directory
-
filemode
- sets the filemode, valid are "new" or "append"
- new creates a new, empty file and writes the data to this file. Existing files are cleared, the data is lost!
- append uses, if available, an existing file and writes the
- buffer data to the end of the file. If the file do not exist, it will
- be created
-
CR
- set the option to write a carriage return at the end of the line.
- CR could be set to 0 or 1, 1 enables this feature
- The MSGMail device is a frontend device for mail message handling.
- With a MSGMaildevice data is fowarded to a mail provider and send to a recipent.
- Multiple MSGMail devices could be defined.
- MSGMail supports by the moment only mail provider, which uses SSL secured connection
- like Googlemail, GMX, Yahoo or 1und1 for example.
- To send an email, a MSG device is necessary.
- MAIL::Lite and Net::SMTP::SSL from CPAN is needed to use MSGMail!!
-
- Specifies the MSGMail device. At definition the message counter is set to 0.
- From, To, SMTPHost and the authfile (see attributes below) need to be defined
- at definition time.
-
set <name> add|clear|list [text]
- Set is used to manipulate the message buffer of the device. The message
- buffer is an array of lines of data, stored serial based on the incoming
- time into the buffer. Lines of data inside the buffer could not be deleted
- anymore, except of flashing the whole buffer.
-
add to add lines of data to the message buffer. All data behind
- "add" will be interpreted as text message. To add a carriage return to the data,
- please use the CR attribute.
-
-
clear to flash the message buffer and set the line counter to 0.
- All the lines of data are deleted and the buffer is flushed.
-
list to list the message buffer.
-
- Examples:
-
- set myMail add Dies ist Textzeile 1
- set myMail add Dies ist Textzeile 2
- set myMail clear
- Full working example to send two lines of data to a recipent:
- define myMsg MSG
- define myMail MSGMail donald.duck@entenhausen.com dagobert.duck@duck-banking.com smtp.entenhausen.net /etc/fhem/msgmailauth
- attr myMail smtpport 9999
- attr myMail subject i need more money
- attr myMail CR 0
- set myMail add Please send me
- set myMail add 1.000.000 Taler
- set myMsg send myMail
- set myMail clear
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
- Almost all of these attributes are not optional, most of them could set at definition.
-
smtphost
- sets the name of the smtphost, for example for GMX
- you could use mail.gmx.net or for Googlemail the smtphost is
- smtp.googlemail.com
-
smtpport (optional)
- sets the port of the smtphost, for example for GMX
- or for Googlemail the smtport is 465, which is also
- the default and do not need to be set
-
subject (optional)
- sets the subject of this email. Per default the subject is set to "FHEM"
-
-
authfile
- sets the authfile for the SSL connection to the SMTP host
- the authfile is a simple textfile with the userid in line 1 and
- the password in line 2.
- Example:
- 123user45
- strenggeheim
- It is a good behaviour to protect this data and put the file, for
- example into the /etc directory and set the rights to 440
- (chmod 440 /etc/msgmailauthfile), so that not everyone could see the contents
- of the file. FHEM must have access to this file to read the userid and password.
-
-
-
CR
- set the option to write a carriage return at the end of the line.
- CR could be set to 0 or 1, 1 enables this feature.
- Per default this attribute is enabled
- Luxtronik 2.0 is a heating controller used in Alpha Innotec and Siemens Novelan Heatpumps.
- It can be directly integrated into a local area network (Ethernet port).
-
-
-
- Define
-
- Note: this module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module.
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> CM11 <serial-device>
-
- CM11 is the X10 module to interface X10 devices with the PC.
-
- The current implementation can evaluate incoming data on the powerline of
- any kind. It can send on, off, dimdown and dimup commands.
-
- The name of the serial-device depends on your distribution. If
- serial-device is none, then no device will be opened, so you can experiment
- without hardware attached.
-
- If you experience problems (for verbose 4 you get a lot of "Bad CRC message"
- in the log), then try to define your device as
- define <name> FHZ <serial-device> strangetty
-
-
- Example:
-
- define x10if CM11 /dev/ttyUSB3
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set <name> reopen
-
- Reopens the serial port.
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
- get <name> fwrev
-
- Reads the firmware revision of the CM11 device. Returns error
- if the serial connection to the device times out. Can be used for error
- detection.
-
-
- get <name> time
-
- Reads the internal time of the device which is the total uptime (modulo one
- year), since fhem sets the time to 0.00:00:00 if the device requests the time
- to be set after being powered on. Returns error
- if the serial connection to the device times out. Can be used for error
- detection.
-
-
- Defines an X10 device via its model, housecode and unitcode.
-
- Notes:
-
-
<model> is one of
-
-
lm12: lamp module, dimmable
-
lm15: lamp module, not dimmable
-
am12: appliance module, not dimmable
-
tm12: tranceiver module, not dimmable. Its
- unitcode is 1.
-
- Model determines whether a dim command is reasonable to be sent
- or not.
-
<housecode> ranges from A to P.
-
<unitcode> ranges from 1 to 16.
-
-
-
- Examples:
-
- define lamp1 X10 lm12 N 10
- define pump X10 am12 B 7
- define lamp2 X10 lm15 N 11
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set <name> <value> [<argument>]
-
- where value is one of:
-
- dimdown # requires argument, see the note
- dimup # requires argument, see the note
- off
- on
- on-till # Special, see the note
- on-for-timer # Special, see the note
-
- Examples:
-
- set lamp1 dimup 10
- set lamp1,lamp2 off
- set pump off
- set lamp2 on-till 19:59
- set lamp2 on-for-timer 00:02:30
-
-
- Notes:
-
-
Only switching and dimming are supported by now.
-
Dimming is valid only for a dimmable device as specified by
- the model argument in its define
- statement.
-
An X10 device has 210 discrete brightness levels. If you use a
- X10 sender, e.g. a remote control or a wall switch to dim, a
- brightness step is 100%/210.
-
dimdown and dimup take a number in the
- range from 0 to 22 as argument. It is assumed that argument 1 is
- a 1% brightness change (microdim) and arguments 2 to 22 are
- 10%..100% brightness changes. The meaning of argument 0 is
- unclear.
-
This currently leads to some confusion in the logs as the
- dimdown and dimup codes are logged with
- different meaning of the arguments depending on whether the commands
- were sent from the PC or from a remote control or a wall switch.
-
dimdown and dimup from on and off states may
- have unexpected results. This seems to be a feature of the X10
- devices.
-
on-till requires an absolute time in the "at" format
- (HH:MM:SS, HH:MM) or { <perl code> }, where the perl code
- returns a time specification).
- If the current time is greater than the specified time, then the
- command is ignored, else an "on" command is generated, and for the
- given "till-time" an off command is scheduleld via the at command.
-
-
on-for-timer requires a relative time in the "at" format
- (HH:MM:SS, HH:MM) or { <perl code> }, where the perl code
- returns a time specification).
-
- Use infrared signals received by an lirc device as toggle events.
-
- Note: this module needs the Lirc::Client perl module.
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> LIRC <lircrc_file>
- Example:
-
- define Lirc LIRC /etc/lirc/lircrc
-
- Note: In the lirc configuration file you have to define each possible event.
- If you have this configuration
-
- begin
- prog = fhem
- button = pwr
- config = IrPower
- end
- and you press the pwr button the IrPower toggle event occures at fhem.
-
- define IrPower01 notify IrPower set lamp toggle
- turns the lamp on and off.
- If you want a faster reaction to keypresses you have to change the
- defaultvalue of readytimeout from 5 seconds to e.g. 1 second in fhem.pl
-
-
-
-
- Set
N/A
-
-
- Get
N/A
-
-
- Attributes
N/A
-
-
-
-
WS300
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define WS300Device WS300 <serial device>
- or
- define <devname> WS300 [0-9]
-
- The first line is mandatory if you have a WS300 device: it defines the
- input device with its USB port. The name of this device is fixed and must
- be WS300Device. It must be the first defined WS300 device.
-
- For each additional device (with number 0 to 9) you have to define another
- WS300 device, with an arbitrary name. The WS300 device which reports the
- readings will be defined with the port number 9, an optional KS300 with the
- port number 8.
- define <name> Weather <location> [<interval> [<language>]]
-
- Defines a virtual device for weather forecasts.
-
- A Weather device periodically gathers current and forecast weather conditions
- from the Yahoo Weather API.
-
- The parameter location is the WOEID (WHERE-ON-EARTH-ID), go to
- http://weather.yahoo.com to find it out for your location.
-
- The optional parameter interval is the time between subsequent updates
- in seconds. It defaults to 3600 (1 hour).
-
- The optional language parameter may be one of
- de,
- en,
- nl,
-
- It determines the natural language in which the forecast information appears.
- It defaults to en. If you want to set the language you also have to set the interval.
- define <name> Twilight <latitude> <longitude> [<indoor_horizon> [<Weather_Position>]]
-
- Defines a virtual device for Twilight calculations
-
- A Twilight device periodically calculates the times of different twilight phases throughout the day.
- It calculates a virtual "light" element, that gives an indicator about the amount of the current daylight.
- Besides the location on earth it is influenced by a so called "indoor horizon" (e.g. if there are high buildings, mountains) as well as by weather conditions. Very bad weather conditions lead to a reduced daylight for nearly the whole day.
- The light calculated spans between 0 and 6, where the values mean the following:
- 0 - total night, sun is at least -18 degree below horizon
- 1 - astronomical twilight, sun is between -12 and -18 degree below horizon
- 2 - nautical twilight, sun is between -6 and -12 degree below horizon
- 3 - civil twilight, sun is between 0 and -6 degree below horizon
- 4 - indoor twilight, sun is between the indoor_horizon and 0 degree below horizon (not used if indoor_horizon=0)
- 5 - weather twilight, sun is between indoor_horizon and a virtual weather horizon (the weather horizon depends on weather conditions (optional)
- 6 - maximum daylight
-
-
- The parameters latitude and longitude are decimal numbers which give the position on earth for which the twilight states shall be calculated.
- The parameter indoor_horizon gives a virtual horizon higher than 0, that shall be used for calculation of indoor twilight (typical values are between 0 and 6)
- The parameter Weather_Position is the yahoo weather id used for getting the weather condition. Go to http://weather.yahoo.com/ and enter a city or zip code. In the upcoming webpage, the id is a the end of the URL. Example: Munich, Germany -> 676757
-
- Example:
-
-
- Defines the HTTP server. <infix> is the portion behind the FHEMWEB base URL (usually
- http://hostname:8083/fhem), <directory> is the absolute path the
- files are served from, and <friendlyname> is the name displayed in the side menu of FHEMWEB.
-
- Example:
-
- define myJSFrontend HTTPSRV jsf /usr/share/jsfrontend My little frontend
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- n/a
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
-
directoryindex: if the request is sent with no filename, i.e. the infix (with or without trailing slash) only, the file given in this attribute is loaded. Defaults to index.html.
-
-
-
- Usage information
-
-
-
- The above example on http://hostname:8083/fhem will return the file
- /usr/share/jsfrontend/foo.html for http://hostname:8083/fhem/jsf/foo.html.
- If no filename is given, the filename prescribed by the directoryindex attribute is returned.
-
- Notice: All links are relative to http://hostname:8083/fhem.
-
-
-
-
-
-
USF1000
-
- Fhem can receive your tank's fill level from the USF1000S device
- through a FHZ device, so one must be defined first.
- The state contains the fill level in % (lower case v in the device state)
- and the current volume in liters (upper case V in the device state).
- Measured distance to the liquid's surface, fill level, volume and warnings
- (Test mode, Battery low) are available. Due to the design of the USF1000S
- protocol, you can have only one USF1000S in range of your FHZ as these
- devices cannot be distinguished.
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> USF1000 <geometry>
-
-
- <geometry> determines the form of the tank and the
- position of the sensor. The following geometries are currently
- supported:
-
-
cub <length> <width> <height> <offset>
-
cylv <diameter> <height> <offset>
-
-
- cub stands for a cuboid whose base is <length> × <width>.
- cylv stands for a vertical cylinder whose diameter is <diameter>.
- <height> is the distance of the surface of the liquid from the ground
- if the tank is full. <offset> is the distance of the sensor relative to
- the surface of the liquid. All quantities are expressed in meters.
-
-
- Example:
-
- define MyTank USF1000 cylv 2 1 0.3: a cylindrical water tank with
- 2 meters diameter. The water stands 1 meter high if the tank is full. The
- sensor is fixed 1,3 meters above ground.
-
- Defines an Web-IO-Digital device (Box with up to 12 digital in/outputs, www.wut.de) via ip address. The status of the device is also pooled (delay interval).
- The POKEYS module is used to control the LAN POKEYS device (POKEYS56e) which supports
- up to 56 digital input, analog inputs, counter inputs and digital outputs.
- Each port/pin has to be configured before it can be used.
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> POKEYS <ip-address> <pin> <io-state> [<time in ms>]
-
- <ip-address> the IP address where the POKEYS device can be accessed
- <pin> the pin number which should be configured
- <io-state> the new io state of the pin Obsolete(=undef) DigIn DigOut AdcIn DigInCtRise DigInCtFall ExtDigOut GetBasic
- <time in ms> optional else 1000ms: cyclic update time for Input pin
-
-
- Example:
-
- define PoInfo POKEYS 192.168.178.34 0 GetBasic
- # creates a virtual pin for getting infos about the device with the get command
- define Pin44in POKEYS 192.168.178.34 44 DigIn 200
- # creates a digitial input port on pin 44
- define Pin25out POKEYS 192.168.178.34 25 DigOut
- # creates a digial output port on pin 25
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set <name> <state> [<time in ms>]
-
- <state> can be OFF ON OFF_PULSE ON_PULSE
- <time in ms> optional else 1000ms hold time for the ON_PULSE OFF_PULSE state
-
- Example:
-
- set Pin25out ON
- # sets Pin25out to ON (0V)
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
- get <name> <type>
-
- only supported for pins of type GetBasic
- <type> can be Version DevName Serial User CPUload
-
- Example:
-
- get PoInfo Version
- # gets the version of the POKEYS device
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
- todo
-
-
-
-
-
-
VantagePro2
-
- Note: this module needs the Net::Telnet perl module.
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> <ip-address> <port> <delay>
-
- Defines a Davis VantagePro2 weatherstation attached on transparent ethernet/usb|serial server accessable by telnet.
- Defines a temperature sensor connected on an Allnet 4000 device via its ip address and port. Use the delay argument to define the delay between polls.
- Defines an Allnet 4027 device (Box with 8 relays) connected to an ALL4000 via its ip address. The status of the device is also pooled (delay interval), because someone else is able to change the state via the webinterface of the device.
-
-
- Examples:
-
- define lamp1 ALL4027 192.168.8.200 0 7 60
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set <name> <value>
-
- where value is one of:
-
- off
- on
- on-for-timer <Seconds>
- toggle
-
- Examples:
-
- set poolpump on
-
-
- Notes:
-
-
Toggle is special implemented. List name returns "on" or "off" even after a toggle command
-
-
-
-
-
-
BS
-
- The module BS allows to collect data from a brightness sensor through a
- FHZ device. For details on the brightness sensor see
- busware wiki.
- You can have at most nine different brightness sensors in range of your
- FHZ.
-
-
- The state contains the brightness in % (reading brightness) and
- the brightness in lux (reading lux). The flags
- reading is always zero. The meaning of these readings is explained in more
- detail on the above mentioned wiki page.
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> BS <sensor#> [<RExt>]
-
-
- <sensor#> is the number of sensor in the brightness
- sensor address system that runs from 1 to 9.
-
- <RExt> is the value of the resistor on your brightness
- sensor in Ω (Ohm). The brightness reading in % is proportional to the resistance, the
- lux reading is proportional to the resistance squared. The value is
- optional. The default resistance is RExt= 50.000Ω.
-
-
- Example:
-
- The InterTechno 433MHZ protocol is used by a wide range of devices, which are either of
- the sender/sensor category or the receiver/actuator category. As we right now are only
- able to SEND InterTechno commands, but CAN'T receive them, this module at the moment
- supports just devices like switches, dimmers, etc. through an CUL device, so this must be defined first.
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> IT <housecode> <on-code> <off-code>
- [<dimup-code>] [<dimdown-code>]
- or
- define <name> IT <ITRotarySwitches|FLS100RotarySwitches>
-
-
- The value of housecode is a 10-digit InterTechno Code, consisting of 0/1/F as it is
- defined as a tri-state protocol. These digits depend on your device you are using.
-
- Bit 11/12 are used for switching/dimming. As different manufacturers are using
- different bit-codes you can specifiy here the 2-digit code for off/on/dimup/dimdown
- in the same form: 0/1/F.
-
- The value of ITRotarySwitches consist of the value of the alpha switch A-P and
- the numeric switch 1-16 as set on the intertechno device. E.g. A1 or G12.
-
- The value of FLS100RotarySwitches consist of the value of the I,II,II,IV switch
- and the numeric 1,2,3,4 swicht. E.g. I2 or IV4.
-
- The value of ITRotarySwitches and FLS100RotarySwitches is internaly translated
- into a houscode value.
-
-
-
<housecode> is a 10 digit tri-state number (0/1/F) depending on
- your device setting (see list below).
-
<on-code> is a 2 digit tri-state number for switching your device on;
- It is appended to the housecode to build the 12-digits IT-Message.
-
<off-code> is a 2 digit tri-state number for switching your device off;
- It is appended to the housecode to build the 12-digits IT-Message.
-
The optional <dimup-code> is a 2 digit tri-state number for dimming your device up;
- It is appended to the housecode to build the 12-digits IT-Message.
-
The optional <dimdown-code> is a 2 digit tri-state number for dimming your device down;
- It is appended to the housecode to build the 12-digits IT-Message.
-
-
-
- Examples:
-
- define lamp IT 01FF010101 11 00 01 10
- define roll1 IT 111111111F 11 00 01 10
- define otherlamp IT 000000000F 11 10 00 00
- define otherroll1 IT FFFFFFF00F 11 10
- define itswitch1 IT A1
- define lamp IT J10
- define flsswitch1 IT IV1
- define lamp IT II2
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set <name> <value> [<time>]
-
- where value is one of:
-
- dimdown
- dimup
- off
- on
- on-till # Special, see the note
-
- Examples:
-
- set lamp on
- set lamp1,lamp2,lamp3 on
- set lamp1-lamp3 on
- set lamp off
-
-
- Notes:
-
-
on-till requires an absolute time in the "at" format (HH:MM:SS, HH:MM
- or { <perl code> }, where the perl-code returns a time
- specification).
- If the current time is greater than the specified time, then the
- command is ignored, else an "on" command is generated, and for the
- given "till-time" an off command is scheduleld via the at command.
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
N/A
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
-
IODev
- Set the IO or physical device which should be used for sending signals
- for this "logical" device. An example for the physical device is a CUL.
- Note: Upon startup fhem DOES NOT assigns an InterTechno device an
- IODevice! The attribute IODev needs to be used AT ANY TIME!
-
-
-
eventMap
- Replace event names and set arguments. The value of this attribute
- consists of a list of space separated values, each value is a colon
- separated pair. The first part specifies the "old" value, the second
- the new/desired value. If the first character is slash(/) or komma(,)
- then split not by space but by this character, enabling to embed spaces.
- Examples:
- attr store eventMap on:open off:closed
- attr store eventMap /on-for-timer 10:open/off:closed/
- set store open
-
dummy
- Set the device attribute dummy to define devices which should not
- output any radio signals. Associated notifys will be executed if
- the signal is received. Used e.g. to react to a code from a sender, but
- it will not emit radio signal if triggered in the web frontend.
-
model
- The model attribute denotes the model type of the device.
- The attributes will (currently) not be used by the fhem.pl directly.
- It can be used by e.g. external programs or web interfaces to
- distinguish classes of devices and send the appropriate commands
- (e.g. "on" or "off" to a switch, "dim..%" to dimmers etc.).
- The spelling of the model names are as quoted on the printed
- documentation which comes which each device. This name is used
- without blanks in all lower-case letters. Valid characters should be
- a-z 0-9 and - (dash),
- other characters should be ommited. Here is a list of "official"
- devices:
- Sender/Sensor: itremote
-
- Dimmer: itdimmer
-
- Receiver/Actor: itswitch
-
-
-
-
-
ignore
- Ignore this device, e.g. if it belongs to your neighbour. The device
- won't trigger any FileLogs/notifys, issued commands will silently
- ignored (no RF signal will be sent out, just like for the dummy attribute). The device won't appear in the
- list command (only if it is explicitely asked for it), nor will it
- appear in commands which use some wildcard/attribute as name specifiers
- (see devspec). You still get them with the
- "ignored=1" special devspec.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Generated events:
-
- From an IT device you can receive one of the following events.
-
on
-
off
-
dimdown
-
dimup
- Which event is sent is device dependent and can sometimes configured on
- the device.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SCIVT
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> SCIVT <SCD-device>
-
-
- Define a SCD series solar controler device. Details see here.
- You probably need a Serial to USB controller like the PL2303.
-
- Defining an SCIVT device will schedule an internal task, which reads the
- status of the device every 5 minutes, and triggers notify/filelog commands.
- Note: Currently this device does not support a "set" function, only
- a single get function which reads the device status immediately.
-
-
- Currently a media RSS feed delivering status pictures in JPEG format is supported. This media
- RSS feed can be used to feed a status display to a network-enabled photo frame.
-
- You need to have the perl module GD installed. This module is most likely not
- available for small systems like Fritz!Box.
- RSS is an extension to FHEMWEB. You must install FHEMWEB to use RSS.
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> RSS jpg <hostname> <filename>
-
- Defines the RSS feed. jpg is a fixed literal to allow for future
- extensions. <hostname> is the hostname of the fhem server as
- seen from the consumer of the RSS feed. <filename> is the
- name of the file that contains the layout definition.
- Rereads the layout definition from the file. Useful to enable
- changes in the layout on-the-fly.
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
-
size The dimensions of the JPEG picture in the format
- <width>x<height>.
-
bg The directory that contains the background pictures (must be in JPEG format).
-
tmin The background picture is shown at least tmin seconds,
- no matter how frequently the RSS feed consumer accesses the page.
-
-
-
- Usage information
-
-
- If a least one RSS feed is defined, the menu entry RSS appears in the FHEMWEB
- side menu. If you click it you get a list of all defined RSS feeds. The URL of any such is
- RSS feed is http://hostname:port/fhem/rss/name.rss with hostname and
- name from the RSS feed's definition and the port
- (usually 8083) and literal /fhem from the underlying FHEMWEB
- definition.
-
- The media RSS feed points to a dynamically generated JPEG picture. The URL of the JPEG picture
- belonging to the RSS feed is http://hostname:port/fhem/rss/name.jpg, i.e. the URL
- of the RSS feed with the extension rss changed to jpg.
-
- To render the JPEG picture the current, or, if tmin seconds have elapsed, the next
- JPEG picture from the directory bg is chosen and scaled to the dimensions given
- in size. The background is black if no usable JPEG picture can be found. Next the
- script in the layout definition is used to superimpose items on
- the background.
-
- You can directly access the URL of the JPEG picture in your browser. Reload the page to see
- how it works.
-
- The media RSS feed advertises to refresh after 1 minute (ttl). Some photo frames ignore it and
- use their preset refresh rate. Go for a photo frame with an adjustable refresh rate (e.g
- every 5 seconds) if you have the choice!
-
- This is how the fhem config part might look like:
- The layout definition is a script for placing items on the background. It is read top-down.
- It consists of layout control commands and items placement commands. Layout control
- commands define the appearance of subsequent items. Item placement commands actually
- render items.
-
- Everything after a # is treated as a comment and ignored. You can fold long lines by
- putting a \ at the end.
-
- Layout control commands
-
-
font <font> Sets the font. <font> is the name of a TrueType font (e.g.
- Arial) or the full path to a TrueType font
- (e.g. /usr/share/fonts/truetype/arial.ttf),
- whatever works on your system.
-
-
rgb <color> Sets the color. <color> is a 6-digit hex number, every 2 digits
- determining the red, green and blue color components as in HTML color codes (e.g.
- FF0000 for red, C0C0C0 for light gray).
-
-
pt <pt> Sets the font size in points.
-
-
- Item placement commands
-
-
text <x> <y> <text> Renders the text <text> at the
- position (<x>, <y>) using the current font, font size and color.
- (0,0) is the upper left corner. Coordinates equal or
- greater than 1 are considered to be pixels, coordinates between 0 and 1 are considered to
- be relative to the total width or height of the picture. You can use
- { <perl special> } for <text> to fully
- access device readings and do some programming on the fly. See below for examples.
-
-
time <x> <y> Renders the current time in HH:MM format.
-
seconds <x> <y> <format> Renders the curent seconds. Maybe usefull for a RSS Clock. With option colon a :
-
date <x> <y> Renders the current date in DD:MM:YYY format.
-
img <x> <y> <s> <imgtype> <srctype> <arg> Renders a picture at the
- position (<x>, <y>). The <imgtype> is one of gif, jpeg, png.
- The picture is scaled by the factor <s> (a decimal value). If <srctype> is file, the picture
- is loaded from the filename <arg>, if <srctype> is url, the picture
- is loaded from the URL <arg>. You can use
- { <perl special> } for <arg>. See below for example.
- Notice: do not load the image from URL that is served by fhem as it leads to a deadlock.
-
-
-
- This is how a layout definition might look like:
-
- font /usr/share/fonts/truetype/arial.ttf # must be a TrueType font
- rgb c0c0c0 # HTML color notation, RGB
- pt 48 # font size in points
- time 0.10 0.90
- pt 24
- text 0.10 0.95 { ReadingsVal("MyWeather","temperature","?"). "C" }
- img 20 530 0.5 png file { "/usr/share/fhem/www/images/weather/" . ReadingsVal("MyWeather","icon","") . ".png" }
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ECMD
-
- Any physical device with request/response-like communication capabilities
- over a TCP connection can be defined as ECMD device. A practical example
- of such a device is the AVR microcontroller board AVR-NET-IO from
- Pollin with
- ECMD-enabled
- Ethersex firmware.
-
- A physical ECMD device can host any number of logical ECMD devices. Logical
- devices are defined as ECMDDevices in fhem.
- ADC 0 to 3 and I/O port 0 to 3 of the above mentioned board
- are examples of such logical devices. ADC 0 to 3 all belong to the same
- device class ADC (analog/digital converter). I/O port 0 to 3 belong to the device
- class I/O port. By means of extension boards you can make your physical
- device drive as many logical devices as you can imagine, e.g. IR receivers,
- LC displays, RF receivers/transmitters, 1-wire devices, etc.
-
- Defining one fhem module for any device class would create an unmanageable
- number of modules. Thus, an abstraction layer is used. You create a device class
- on the fly and assign it to a logical ECMD device. The
- class definition
- names the parameters of the logical device, e.g. a placeholder for the number
- of the ADC or port, as well as the get and set capabilities. Worked examples
- are to be found in the documentation of the ECMDDevice device.
-
-
- Note: this module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module
- if the module is connected via serial Port or USB.
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> ECMD telnet <IPAddress:Port>
- or
- define <name> ECMD serial <SerialDevice>[<@BaudRate>]
-
-
- Defines a physical ECMD device. The keywords telnet or
- serial are fixed.
-
- Examples:
-
- define AVRNETIO ECMD telnet 192.168.0.91:2701
- define AVRNETIO ECMD serial /dev/ttyS0
- define AVRNETIO ECMD serial /sev/ttyUSB0@38400
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set <name> classdef <classname> <filename>
-
- Creates a new device class <classname> for logical devices.
- The class definition is in the file <filename>. You must
- create the device class before you create a logical device that adheres to
- that definition.
-
- Closes and reopens the device. Could be handy if connection is lost and cannot be
- reestablished automatically.
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
- get <name> raw <command>
-
- Sends the command <command> to the physical ECMD device
- <name> and reads the response.
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
-
classdefs A colon-separated list of <classname>=<filename>.
- The list is automatically updated if a class definition is added. You can
- directly set the attribute.
-
-
-
-
-
- Class definition
-
-
-
- The class definition for a logical ECMD device class is contained in a text file.
- The text file is made up of single lines. Empty lines and text beginning with #
- (hash) are ignored. Therefore make sure not to use hashes in commands.
-
- The following commands are recognized in the device class definition:
- set <commandname> postproc { <perl command> }
- get <commandname> postproc { <perl command> }
-
- Declares a postprocessor for the command <commandname>.
-
-
-
-
-
- set <commandname> params <parameter1> [<parameter2> [<parameter3> ... ]]
- get <commandname> params <parameter1> [<parameter2> [<parameter3> ... ]]
-
- Declares the names of the named parameters that must be present in the
- set or get command <commandname>. Be careful not to use a parameter name that
- is already used in the device definition (see params above).
-
-
-
-
-
- The perl specials in the definitions of the set and get commands can
- contain macros. Apart from the rules outlined in the documentation of perl specials in fhem, the following
- rules apply:
-
-
The character @ will be replaced with the device
- name. To use @ in the text itself, use the double mode (@@).
-
-
The macro %NAME will expand to the device name (same
- as @).
-
-
The macro %<parameter> will expand to the
- current value of the named parameter. This can be either a parameter
- from the device definition or a parameter from the set or get
- command.
-
-
The macro substitution occurs before perl evaluates the
- expression. It is a plain text substitution.
-
-
If in doubt what happens, run the commands with loglevel 5 and
- observe the log file.
-
-
-
- The rules outlined in the documentation of perl specials
- for the <perl command> in the postprocessor definitions apply.
- Note: Beware of undesired side effects from e.g. doubling of semicolon!
-
- The perl command acts on $_. The result of the perl command is the
- final result of the get or set command.
-
- set <name> <commandname> [<parameter1> [<parameter2> [<parameter3> ... ]]]
-
- The number of given parameters must match those given for the set command <commandname> definition in
- the class definition.
- If set <commandname> is invoked the perl special in curly brackets from the command definition
- is evaluated and the result is sent to the physical ECMD device.
-
- Example:
-
- set myRelais1 on
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
- get <name> <commandname> [<parameter1> [<parameter2> [<parameter3> ... ]]]
-
- The number of given parameters must match those given for the get command <commandname> definition in
- the class definition.
- If get <commandname> is invoked the perl special in curly brackets from the command definition
- is evaluated and the result is sent to the physical ECMD device. The response from the physical ECMD device is returned
- and the state of the logical ECMD device is updated accordingly.
-
- The following example shows how to access the ADC of the AVR-NET-IO board from
- Pollin with
- ECMD-enabled
- Ethersex firmware.
-
- The class definition file /etc/fhem/ADC.classdef looks as follows:
-
- get value cmd {"adc get %channel"}
- get value params channel
-
-
- In the fhem configuration file or on the fhem command line we do the following:
-
- define AVRNETIO ECMD telnet 192.168.0.91:2701 # define the physical device
- set AVRNETIO classdef ADC /etc/fhem/ADC.classdef # define the device class ADC
- define myADC ECDMDevice ADC # define the logical device myADC with device class ADC
- get myADC value 1 # retrieve the value of analog/digital converter number 1
-
-
- The get command is evaluated as follows: get value has one named parameter
- channel. In the example the literal 1 is given and thus %channel
- is replaced by 1 to yield "adc get 1" after macro substitution. Perl
- evaluates this to a literal string which is send as a plain ethersex command to the AVR-NET-IO. The
- board returns something like 024 for the current value of analog/digital converter number 1.
-
-
-
-
-
- Example 2
-
-
- The following example shows how to switch a relais driven by pin 3 (bit mask 0x08) of I/O port 2 on for
- one second and then off again.
-
- The class definition file /etc/fhem/relais.classdef looks as follows:
-
- params pinmask
- set on cmd {"io set ddr 2 ff\nioset port 2 0%pinmask\nwait 1000\nio set port 2 00"}
- set on postproc {s/^OK\nOK\nOK\nOK$/success/; "$_" eq "success" ? "ok" : "error"; }
-
-
- In the fhem configuration file or on the fhem command line we do the following:
-
- define AVRNETIO ECMD telnet 192.168.0.91:2701 # define the physical device
- set AVRNETIO classdef relais /etc/fhem/relais.classdef # define the device class relais
- define myRelais ECMDDevice 8 # define the logical device myRelais with pin mask 8
- set myRelais on # execute the "on" command
-
-
- The set command is evaluated as follows: %pinmask
- is replaced by 8 to yield
- "io set ddr 2 ff\nioset port 2 08\nwait 1000\nio set port 2 00" after macro substitution. Perl
- evaluates this to a literal string which is send as a plain ethersex command to the AVR-NET-IO line by line.
-
- For any of the four plain ethersex commands, the AVR-NET-IO returns the string OK. They are
- concatenated and separated by line breaks (\n). The postprocessor takes the result from $_,
- substitutes it by the string success if it is OK\nOK\nOK\nOK, and then either
- returns the string ok or the string error.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
M232
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> M232 <m232-device>
-
-
- Define a M232 device. You can attach as many M232 devices as you like. A
- M232 device provides 6 analog inputs (voltage 0..5V with 10 bit resolution)
- and 8 bidirectional digital ports. The eighth digital port can be used as a
- 16 bit counter (maximum frequency 3kHz). The M232 device needs to be
- connected to a 25pin sub-d RS232 serial port. A USB-to-serial converter
- works fine if no serial port is available.
-
- Examples:
-
- define m232 M232 /dev/ttyUSB2
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set <name> stop
-
- Stops the counter.
-
- set <name> start
-
- Resets the counter to zero and starts it.
-
- set <name> octet
-
- Sets the state of all digital ports at once, value is 0..255.
-
- set <name> io0..io7 0|1
-
- Turns digital port 0..7 off or on.
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
- get <name> [an0..an5]
-
- Gets the reading of analog input 0..5 in volts.
-
- get <name> [io0..io7]
-
- Gets the state of digital ports 0..7, result is 0 or 1.
-
- get <name> octet
-
- Gets the state of all digital ports at once, result is 0..255.
-
- get <name> counter
-
- Gets the number of ticks of the counter since the last reset. The counter
- wraps around from 65,535 to 0 and then stops.
- See M232Counter for how we care about this.
-
-
- Define at most one M232Counter for a M232 device. Defining a M232Counter
- will schedule an internal task, which periodically reads the status of the
- counter, and triggers notify/filelog commands. unit is the unit
- name, factor is used to calculate the reading of the counter
- from the number of ticks. deltaunit is the unit name of the counter
- differential per second, deltafactor is used to calculate the
- counter differential per second from the number of ticks per second.
- Default values:
-
-
unit: ticks
-
factor: 1.0
-
deltaunit: ticks per second
-
deltafactor: 1.0
-
- Note: the parameters in square brackets are optional. If you wish to
- specify an optional parameter, all preceding parameters must be specified
- as well.
-
-
- Do not forget to start the counter (with set .. start for
- M232) or to start the counter and set the reading to a specified value
- (with set ... value for M232Counter).
- To avoid issues with the tick count reaching the end point, the device's
- internal counter is automatically reset to 0 when the tick count is 64,000
- or above and the reading basis is adjusted accordingly.
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set <name> value <value>
-
- Sets the reading of the counter to the given value. The counter is reset
- and started and the offset is adjusted to value/unit.
-
- set <name> interval <interval>
-
- Sets the status polling interval in seconds to the given value. The default
- is 60 seconds.
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
- get <name> status
-
- Gets the reading of the counter multiplied by the factor from the
- define statement. Wraparounds of the counter are accounted for
- by an offset (see reading basis in the output of the
- list statement for the device).
-
-
- Define as many M232Voltages as you like for a M232 device. Defining a
- M232Voltage will schedule an internal task, which reads the status of the
- analog input every minute, and triggers notify/filelog commands.
- unit is the unit name, factor is used to
- calibrate the reading of the analog input.
-
- Note: the unit defaults to the string "volts", but it must be specified
- if you wish to set the factor, which defaults to 1.0.
-
- Defines a serial link to a TV set of LG's xxLG70yy (e. g. 47LG7000) series
- and similar TV sets from LG. As of January 2010, the following TV sets should
- be compatible:
-
-
xxLG7000, e. g. 47LG7000 (tested)
-
xxPG7000, e. g. 50PG7000 (same Manual as 47LG7000 ;))
-
PS3000/6000/7000/8000 series (according to LG brochure; no liabilities assumed)
-
PQ3000/6000 series (see PS3000)
-
LU4000/5000 series (not LU7000; see PS3000)
-
LH2000/3000/4000/5000 series (see PS3000)
-
SL9500/9000/8000 series (see PS3000)
-
- These TV sets feature a serial connector which can officially be used to control
- the TV set (see your Onwer's Manual, there's an Appendix labelled "External Control
- Device setup", referening to cabling and command set). The xxLG7000 module is
- the FHEM module to actually utilize this. (BTW, those TVs run Linux internally ;))
- To exercise control over your TV set, use the LGTV module and
- bind it ("attr <LGTV-name> IODev <xxLG7000-name>") to xxLG7000.
SetID (1, 2, ...; see your TV's Owner's Manual how to set it. Defaults to 1 if unset.)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
LGTV
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> LGTV
-
-
- This module is expected to work with xxLG7000 as it's
- IODev. With LGTV and a compatible hardware module (currently, there's only
- xxLG7000), you are able to power your TV set on and off, query it's power state,
- select the input (AV, RGB, Composites, analogue TV, DVB-T, HDMI) or mute/unmute
- the volume.
- Defining a LGTV device will schedule an internal task, which periodically reads
- the status of the TV set (power state; if power is on, query the selected input)
- and triggers notify/filelog commands.
- Currently, the following commands are defined; not all may be available on a
- given TV set. An error messages should be recorded if e. g. the input in question
- is not usable.
-
-
power on
-power off
-input AV1
-input AV2
-input AV3
-input AV3
-input Component
-input RGB
-input HDMI1
-input HDMI2
-input HDMI3
-input HDMI4
-input DVBT
-input PAL
-audio mute
-audio normal
-
-
-
- Get
-
- get <name> <what>
-
- Currently, the following commands are defined; not all may be available on a
- given TV set. An error messages should be recorded if e. g. the input in question
- is not usable.
-
- The commands listed above are send 1:1 to the underlying IODev (e. g. xxLG7000); that IODev
- is responsible for translation into whatever means to invoke the function on the TV.
- It is my hope that other's will adopt this idea and write compatible low level drivers for other
- TV sets, to make this module (even ;)) more useful.
-
-
-
-
-
-
OREGON
-
- The OREGON module interprets Oregon sensor messages received by a RFXCOM receiver. You need to define a RFXCOM receiver first.
- See RFXCOM.
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> OREGON <deviceid>
-
- <deviceid> is the device identifier of the Oregon sensor. It consists of the sensors name and a one byte hex string (00-ff) that identifies the sensor. The define statement with the deviceid is generated automatically by autocreate. The following sensor names are used:
-BTHR918, BTHR918N, PCR800 RGR918, RTGR328N, THN132N, THGR228N, THGR328N, THGR918, THR128, THWR288A, THGR810, UV138, UVN800, WGR918, WGR800, WTGR800_A, WTGR800_T.
-
-The one byte hex string is generated by the Oregon sensor when is it powered on. The value seems to be randomly generated. This has the advantage that you may use more than one Oregon sensor of the same type even if it has no switch to set a sensor id. For exampple the author uses three BTHR918 sensors at the same time. All have different deviceids. The drawback is that the deviceid changes after changing batteries.
-
- OWFS is a suite of programs that designed to make the 1-wire bus and its
- devices easily accessible. The underlying priciple is to create a virtual
- filesystem, with the unique ID being the directory, and the individual
- properties of the device are represented as simple files that can be read
- and written.
- where value is one of (not supported by passive Devices e.g. DS9097):
-
-
- address (read-only)
- The entire 64-bit unique ID. address starts with the family code.
- Given as upper case hexidecimal digits (0-9A-F).
-
-
- crc8 (read-only)
- The 8-bit error correction portion. Uses cyclic redundancy check. Computed
- from the preceeding 56 bits of the unique ID number.
- Given as upper case hexidecimal digits (0-9A-F).
-
-
- family (read-only)
- The 8-bit family code. Unique to each type of device.
- Given as upper case hexidecimal digits (0-9A-F).
-
-
- id (read-only)
- The 48-bit middle portion of the unique ID number. Does not include the
- family code or CRC.
- Given as upper case hexidecimal digits (0-9A-F).
-
-
- locator (read-only)
- Uses an extension of the 1-wire design from iButtonLink company that
- associated 1-wire physical connections with a unique 1-wire code. If
- the connection is behind a Link Locator the locator will show a unique
- 8-byte number (16 character hexidecimal) starting with family code FE.
- If no Link Locator is between the device and the master, the locator
- field will be all FF.
-
-
- present (read-only)
- Is the device currently present on the 1-wire bus?
-
-
- type (read-only)
- Part name assigned by Dallas Semi. E.g. DS2401 Alternative packaging
- (iButton vs chip) will not be distiguished.
-
-
-
- Examples:
-
- get DS9490R type
- DS9490R type => DS1420
- get DS9490R address
- DS9490R address => 8193302D0000002B
-
- temperature (read-only)
- Read by the chip at high resolution (~12 bits). Units are selected from
- the defined OWFS Device. See temp-scale for choices.
-
sets the time period in seconds for "kicking" the 1-Wire bus
- (default is 300 seconds). This means:
-
With 1-Wire bus interfaces that do not supply power to the 1-Wire bus
- (attr buspower parasitic), the 1-Wire bus is reset at these intervals.
-
With 1-Wire bus interfaces that supply power to the 1-Wire bus (attr
- buspower = real), all temperature measurement devices on the bus receive
- the command to start a temperature conversion (saves a lot of time when
- reading)
-
With 1-Wire bus interfaces that contain a busmaster chip, the response
- to a reset pulse contains information about alarms.
performs an "alarm search" for devices on the 1-Wire bus and, if
- found, generates an event in the log (not with CUNO).
-
-
- get <name> devices
-
redicovers all devices on the 1-Wire bus. If a device found has a
- previous definition, this is automatically used. If a device is found but has no
- definition, it is autocreated. If a defined device is not on the 1-Wire bus, it
- is autodeleted.
attr <name> stateAL0
- <string>
- character string for denoting low normal condition, default is green down
- triangle, e.g. the code <span
- style="color:green">▾</span> leading to the sign ▾
-
-
attr <name> stateAH0
- <string>
- character string for denoting high alarm condition, default is green
- upward triangle, e.g. the code <span
- style="color:green">▴</span> leading to the sign ▴
-
-
attr <name> stateAL1
- <string>
- character string for denoting low alarm condition, default is red down
- triangle, e.g. the code <span style="color:red">▾</span>
- leading to the sign ▾
-
attr <name> stateAH1
- <string>
- character string for denoting high alarm condition, default is red upward
- triangle, e.g. the code <span style="color:red">▴</span>
- leading to the sign ▴
-
-
For each of the following attributes, the channel identification A,B,C,D may be
- used.
attr <name> event on-change|on-update
- This attribte work similarly, but not identically to the standard event-on-update-change/event-on-update-reading attribute.
-
event on-update (default) will write a notify/FileLog event any time a measurement is received.
-
event on-change will write a notify/FileLog event only when a measurement is different from the previous one.
attr <name> event on-change|on-update
- This attribte work similarly, but not identically to the standard event-on-update-change/event-on-update-reading attribute.
-
event on-update (default) will write a notify/FileLog event any time a measurement is received.
-
event on-change will write a notify/FileLog event only when a measurement is different from the previous one.
FHEM module for 1-Wire devices that know only their unique ROM ID
- Note: This 1-Wire module so far works only with the OWX interface module.
- Please define an OWX device first.
- Example
-
- define ROM1 OWX_ID OWCOUNT CE780F000000
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> OWID <id>
-
Define a 1-Wire device.
-
- <id>
- 12-character unique ROM id of the converter device without family id and
- CRC code
- [<model>] Defines the sensor model (and thus
- 1-Wire family id), currently the following values are permitted:
-
model DS2438 with family id 26 (default if the model parameter is
- omitted). Measured is a temperature value, an external voltage and the current supply voltage
-
-
-
- <id>
- 12-character unique ROM id of the converter device without family id and
- CRC code
-
- <interval>
- Measurement interval in seconds. The default is 300 seconds.
attr <name> event on-change|on-update
- This attribte work similarly, but not identically to the standard event-on-update-change/event-on-update-reading attribute.
-
event on-update (default) will write a notify/FileLog event any time a measurement is received.
-
event on-change will write a notify/FileLog event only when a measurement is different from the previous one.
- get <name> input <channel-name>
- state for channel (A,B, ... or defined channel name)
- This value reflects the measured value, not necessarily the one set as
- output state, because the output transistors are open collector switches. A measured
- state of 1 = OFF therefore corresponds to an output state of 1 = OFF, but a measured
- state of 0 = ON can also be due to an external shortening of the output.
attr <name> event on-change|on-update
- This attribte work similarly, but not identically to the standard event-on-update-change/event-on-update-reading attribute.
-
event on-update (default) will write a notify/FileLog event any time a measurement is received.
-
event on-change will write a notify/FileLog event only when a measurement is different from the previous one.
FHEM module to commmunicate with 1-Wire bus digital thermometer devices
- Note: This is the only 1-Wire module which so far works with both the OWFS and the
- OWX interface module. Please define an OWFS device or an OWX device first.
- Example
-
attr <name> stateAL <string>
-
- character string for denoting low alarm condition, default is red down
- triangle, e.g. the code <span style="color:red">▾</span>
- leading to the sign ▾
-
-
attr <name> stateAH <string>
-
- character string for denoting high alarm condition, default is red upward
- triangle, e.g. the code <span style="color:red">▴</span>
- leading to the sign ▴
-
attr <name> event on-change|on-update
- This attribte work similarly, but not identically to the standard event-on-update-change/event-on-update-reading attribute.
-
event on-update (default) will write a notify/FileLog event any time a measurement is received.
-
event on-change will write a notify/FileLog event only when a measurement is different from the previous one.
- This module is for the old RFXCOM USB or LAN based 433 Mhz RF receivers and transmitters (order order code 80002 and others). It does not support the new RFXtrx433 transmitter because it uses a different protocol. See RFXTRX for support of the RFXtrx433 transmitter.
-These receivers supports many protocols like Oregon Scientific weather sensors, RFXMeter devices, X10 security and lighting devices and others.
- Currently the following parser modules are implemented:
-
-
41_OREGON.pm (see device OREGON): Process messages Oregon Scientific weather sensors.
- See http://www.rfxcom.com/oregon.htm of
- Oregon Scientific weather sensors that could be received by the RFXCOM receivers.
- Until now the following Oregon Scientific weather sensors have been tested successfully: BTHR918, BTHR918N, PCR800, RGR918, THGR228N, THGR810, THR128, THWR288A, WTGR800, WGR918. It will probably work with many other Oregon sensors supported by RFXCOM receivers. Please give feedback if you use other sensors.
-
43_RFXX10REC.pm (see device RFXX10REC): Process X10 security and X10 lighting devices.
-
-
- Note: this module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module
- if the devices is connected via USB or a serial port.
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> RFXCOM <device> [noinit]
-
-
- USB-connected (80002):
- <device> specifies the USB port to communicate with the RFXCOM receiver.
- Normally on Linux the device will be named /dev/ttyUSBx, where x is a number.
- For example /dev/ttyUSB0.
-
- Example:
- define RFXCOMUSB RFXCOM /dev/ttyUSB0
-
-
-
- Network-connected devices:
-
- <device> specifies the host:port of the device. E.g.
- 192.168.1.5:10001
-
-
- noninit is optional and issues that the RFXCOM device should not be
- initialized. This is useful if you share a RFXCOM device. It is also useful
- for testing to simulate a RFXCOM receiver via netcat or via FHEM2FHEM.
-
-
- Example:
- define RFXCOMTCP RFXCOM 192.168.1.5:10001
-
- define RFXCOMTCP2 RFXCOM 192.168.1.121:10001 noinit
-
-
longids
- Comma separated list of device-types for RFXCOM that should be handled using long IDs. This additional ID is a one byte hex string and is generated by the Oregon sensor when is it powered on. The value seems to be randomly generated. This has the advantage that you may use more than one Oregon sensor of the same type even if it has no switch to set a sensor id. For example the author uses two BTHR918N sensors at the same time. All have different deviceids. The drawback is that the deviceid changes after changing batteries. All devices listed as longids will get an additional one byte hex string appended to the device name.
-Default is to use long IDs for all devices.
-
- Examples:
-# Do not use any long IDs for any devices:
-attr RFXCOMUSB longids 0
-# Use any long IDs for all devices (this is default):
-attr RFXCOMUSB longids 1
-# Use longids for BTHR918N devices.
-# Will generate devices names like BTHR918N_f3.
-attr RFXCOMUSB longids BTHR918N
-# Use longids for TX3_T and TX3_H devices.
-# Will generate devices names like TX3_T_07, TX3_T_01 ,TX3_H_07.
-attr RFXCOMUSB longids TX3_T,TX3_H
-
-
-
-
-
-
RFXMETER
-
- The RFXMETER module interprets RFXCOM RFXMeter messages received by a RFXCOM receiver. You need to define an RFXCOM receiver first.
- See the RFXCOM.
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> RFXMETER <deviceid> [<scalefactor>] [<unitname>]
-
- <deviceid> is the device identifier of the RFXMeter sensor and is a one byte hexstring (00-ff).
-
- <scalefactor> is an optional scaling factor. It is multiplied to the value that is received from the RFXmeter sensor.
-
- <unitname> is an optional string that describes the value units. It is added to the Reading generated to describe the values.
-
- The RFXX10REC module interprets X10 security and X10 lighting messages received by a RFXCOM RF receiver. Reported also to work with KlikAanKlikUit. You need to define an RFXCOM receiver first.
- See RFXCOM.
-
-
- specifies the type of the X10 device:
- X10 security devices:
-
-
ds10a (X10 security ds10a Door/Window Sensor or compatible devices. This device type reports the status of the switch [Open/Closed], status of the delay switch [min|max]], and battery status [ok|low].)
-
ms10a (X10 security ms10a motion sensor. This device type reports the status of motion sensor [normal|alert] and battery status [ok|low].))
-
sd90 (Marmitek sd90 smoke detector. This device type reports the status of the smoke detector [normal|alert] and battery status [ok|low].)
-
kr18 (X10 security remote control. Report the Reading "Security" with values [Arm|Disarm], "ButtonA" and "ButtonB" with values [on|off] )
-
- X10 lighting devices:
-
-
ms14a (X10 motion sensor. Reports [normal|alert] on the first deviceid (motion sensor) and [on|off] for the second deviceid (light sensor))
-
x10 (All other x10 devices. Report [on|off] on both deviceids.)
-
-
-
- <deviceid>
-
- specifies the first device id of the device. X10 security have a a 16-Bit device id which has to be written as a hex-string (example "5a54").
- A X10 lighting device has a house code A..P followed by a unitcode 1..16 (example "B1").
-
-
- <devicelog>
-
- is the name of the Reading used to report. Suggested: "Window" or "Door" for ds10a, "motion" for motion sensors, "Smoke" for sd90.
-
-
- <deviceid2>
-
- is optional and specifies the second device id of the device if it exists. For example sd90 smoke sensors can be configured to report two device ids. ms14a motion sensors report motion status on the first deviceid and the status of the light sensor on the second deviceid.
-
-
- <devicelog2>
-
- is optional for the name used for the Reading of <deviceid2>.
-
-
- Define a WS2000 series raw receiver device sold by ELV. Details see here.
- Unlike 86_FS10.pm it will handle the complete device communication itself
- and doesnt require an external program. For this reason you can now use
- this also on windows.
-
- This Device will be usually connect to a serial port, but you can also
- define a raw network redirector like lantronix XPORT(TM).
- Note: Currently this device does not support a "set" function
-
-
- Attributes:
-
-
rain: factor for calculating amount of rain in ml/count
-
altitude: height in meters to calculate pressure for NN (not used yet)
-
-
- Example:
-
- define WS2000 WS2000 /dev/ttyS0
-
-
- define WS2000 WS2000 xport:10001
-
-
- attr WS2000 rain 366 : use factor 366 ml/count for rain sensor S2000R
-
-
-
-
- Set
N/A
-
-
- Get
-
- get <name> list
-
- Gets the last reading of all received sensord
-
- get <name> [TH0..TH7, T0..T7, I0..I7, R0..R7, W0..W7, L0..L7, P0..P7,LAST,RAW]
- get the last reading for the name sensor,
- LAST: Last received Sensor
-
-
- Define a WS3600 series weather station (Europe Supplies, technotrade, etc; refer to
- Wetterstationen.info
- (german) for details on this model); the station is queried by means of an external program,
- fetch3600. It talks to the attached weather station (several WS do supply an RS323 interface
- but seem to use some kind of "morse code" on the RTS, CTS wires instead of using propper
- serial communication (RX, TX); it's no use to recode that crap into FHEM when there is a
- stable package of tools to talk to the station available: open3600)
- and delivers the current readings line by line as reading-value-pairs. These are read in
- and translated into more readable names for FHEM by the module WS3600.pm.
- As the WS3600 is rather similar to the WS2300
- and open3600 basically is a modified offspring of open2300, by exchanging the /path/to/fetch3600 with /path/to/fetch2300 this module
- should be able to handle the WS2300 was well.
- Currently, it is expected that the WS is attached to the local computer and fetch3600 is run
- locally. Basically the executable called needs to supply on stdout an output similar to what
- fetch3600 returns; how to implement a "networked setup" is left as an excercise to the reader.
-
- For the records, this is an output of fetch3600:
-
- There is no expectation on the readings received from the fetch3600 binary; so, in
- essence, if you have a similar setup (unsupported, attached weather station and a
- means to get it's reading into an output similar to above's), you should be able
- to use WS3600.pm with a custom written script to interface FHEM with your station
- as well. WS3600.pm only recognizes the above readings (and translates these
- into, e. g., Temp-inside for Ti for use within FHEM), other
- lines are silently dropped on the floor.
-
- fetch3600 is available as binary for the Windows OS as well, but I haven't tested operation
- under that OS, use it at your own risk and you mileage may vary ...
- Note: Currently this device does not support a "set" function nor anything to "get". The
- later would be possible to implement if neccessary, though.
-
-
- Implementation of WS3600.pm tries to be nice, that is it reads from the pipe only
- non-blocking (== if there is data), so it should be safe even to use it via ssh or
- a netcat-pipe over the Internet, but this, as well, has not been tested yet.
-
-
- Attributes:
-
-
model: WS3600 or WS2300 (not used for anything, yet)
- When using multiple SIS PMs on one host, sispmctl up to and including V 2.7 has a bug:
-
plug-2:# sispmctl -v -s -d 1 -g all -d 2 -g all
-
-SiS PM Control for Linux 2.7
-
-(C) 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 by Mondrian Nuessle, (C) 2005, 2006 by Andreas Neuper.
-This program is free software.
-[...]
-
-Gembird #0 is USB device 013.This device is a 4-socket SiS-PM.
-[...]
-
-Gembird #1 is USB device 015.This device is a 4-socket SiS-PM.
-[...]
-
-Accessing Gembird #1 USB device 015
-Status of outlet 1: on
-Status of outlet 2: on
-Status of outlet 3: on
-Status of outlet 4: on
-Error performing requested action
-Libusb error string: error sending control message: Invalid argument
-Terminating
-*** glibc detected *** sispmctl: double free or corruption (fasttop): 0x000251e0 ***
-[...]
- Well, the fix is simple and will be sent upstream, but in case it's not incorporated
- at the time you need it, here it is; it's easy to apply even by hand ;-)
-
-
- Defines a path to the program "sispmctl", which is used to control (locally attached)
- "Silver Shield Power Manager" devices. Usually these are connected to the local computer
- via USB, more than one "sispm" device per computer is supported. (Please note that, due
- to neglections in their USB driver, AVM's Fritz!Box 7170 (and derivates, like Deutsche
- Telekom's Speedport W901V) is not able to talk to these devices ... The Fritz!Box
- 72xx and 73xx should be fine.)
-
- The communication between FHEM and the Power Manager device is done by using the open
- source sispmctl program. Thus, for the
- time being, THIS functionality is only available running FHEM on Linux (or any other platform
- where you can get the sispmctl program compiled and running). On the bright side: by
- interfacing via commandline, it is possible to define multiple SISPM devices, e. g. with
- a wrapper that does execute sispmctl on a remote (Linux) system. And: sispmctl runs happily
- on Marvells SheevaPlug ;) Please note: if you're not running FHEM as root, you most likely
- have to make sispmctl setuid root (chmod 4755 /path/to/sispmctl) or fiddle with
- udev so that the devices of the Power Manager are owned by the user running FHEM.
-
- After defining a SISPM device, a first test is done, identifying attached PMs. If this
- succeeds, an internal task is scheduled to read the status every 30 seconds. (Reason
- being that someone else could have switched sockets externally to FHEM.)
-
- To actually control any power sockets, you need to define a SIS_PMS
- device ;) If autocreate is enabled, those should be autocreated for your convenience as
- soon as the first scan took place (30 seconds after the define).
-
- Implementation of SISPM.pm tries to be nice, that is it reads from the pipe only
- non-blocking (== if there is data), so it should be safe even to use it via ssh or
- a netcat-pipe over the Internet, but this, as well, has not been tested extensively yet.
-
- This module is responsible for handling the actual sockets (power on,
- power off, toggle) on a "Silver Shield Power Manager", see SISPM
- for how to define access to one (SIS_PMS stands for "Silver Shield Power Manager Socket").
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> SIS_PMS <serial> <socket>
-
-
- To securely distinguish multiple attached Power Manager devices, the
- serial number of those is used. You get these with "sispmctl -s" - or
- just let autocreate define the sockets attached for you.
-
-
-
<serial> is the serial number of the Power Manager device, see above.
-
<socket> is a number between 1 and 4 (for a 4 socket model)
- off
- on
- toggle
- on-till # Special, see the note
- off-till # Special, see the note
-
- Examples:
-
- set lamp on
- set lamp1,lamp2,lamp3 on
- set lamp1-lamp3 on
- set hql_lamp on-till 18:45
-
-
- Notes:
-
-
As an external program is used, a noticeable delay may occur.
-
*-till requires an absolute time in the "at" format (HH:MM:SS, HH:MM
- or { <perl code> }, where the perl-code returns a time
- specification).
- If the current time is greater than the specified time, then the
- command is ignored, else an "on" or "off" command, respectively, is
- generated, and for the given time an "off"/"on" command is
- scheduleld via the at command.
dummy
- Set the device attribute dummy to define devices which should not
- output any signals. Associated notifys will be executed if the signal
- is received. Used e.g. to react to a code from a sender, but it will
- not actually switch if triggered in the web frontend.
-
-This module supports "Intelligenter Strom Zhler"(ENBW) and "Sparzhler" (Yellow Strom).
-The electricity meter will be polled in a defined interval for new values.
-
- Note: this module needs the HTTP::Request and LWP::UserAgent perl modules.
-
- Please also note: the PDU must use firmware 3.1 or later and set to unencrypted mode.
-
- Defines a switching device, where sockets can be switched
-
-
-
separately (just use 0-4 as socket number)
-
all together (use 1234 as socket number)
-
in arbitrary groups (e.g 13 switches socket 1 and 3, 42
- switches socket 2 and 4, etc...), invalid numbers are
- ignored
-
-
- User name and password are optional. When no user name or
- password is passed, the module looks for a configfile at
- '/var/log/fhem/netio.conf'. If no config file is found, it
- uses 'admin/admin' as user/pass, since this is the default
- configuration for the device.
-
- Alternatively you can pass a path to a configfile instead of
- the user/pass combo. (e.g. /var/tmp/tmp.conf)
- Configfile-Format:
-
- returns the state of the socket(s)
-
- Example:
-
- get coffeemaker_and_light => on or off
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set <name> <value>
-
- where value is one of:
-
- on
- off
-
- Examples:
-
- set coffeemaker_and_light on
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
TellStick
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> TellStick </path/to/tdtool>
-
-
-
-
- Defines a path to the program "tdtool", which is used to control a (locally attached)
- "Telldus TellStick [Duo]" USB device. A TellStick controls a wide range of 433 MHz
- devices, like the widely available switchable power outlets from InterTechno.
- To keep things simple, FHEM interfaces with the telldus-core suite (available
- for Linux, Windows, Mac OSX) via the supplied tool, "tdtool". This FHEM module
- will initially use "tdtool --list" to receive a list of configured devices, then let
- autocreate (if enabled) create them as SIS_PMS devices.
- Please make sure that the user running FHEM under ("fhem" in a standard setup on
- Linux) has the r/w-right to access the stick's device ("/dev/tellstick"
- in telldus-core version 2.0) — if the state of your devices do not change when
- modified im FHEM, access rights problems are the most probable cause
- (chmod o+rw /dev/tellstick should fix that; you may want to automate it
- via udev or adding the fhem user to the proper group ;))
- This module has only been tested with the 2.0 branch of teldus-core because of a known bug
- in 2.1, preventing
- version 2.1 working properly with some TellSticks and/or "tdtool" application; FTR, the
- "Batch: 8" version a was granted usage of for writing this module was impacted by it ...
-
- To actually control any power sockets, you need to define a SIS_PMS
- device — TellStick.pm uses SIS_PMS devices ("socket" is te:ll:st:ck:01, "socketnr"
- is the ID of the device in "tdtool"), as as of now only on/off switching is supported and
- this was the easiest implementation path. SIS_PMS is supported by andFHEM, the Android
- frontend, so this make some sense. (Furthermore, I don't own dimmable devices and they are
- actually not really cheap; >15 EUR/socket compared to the 15 EUR for 5 switch-only, non-self
- learning socket adapters from Intertechno at your local home improvement store.)
-
-
- Defines a network camera device to trigger snapshots on events.
-
- Network cameras (IP cameras) usually have a build-in function to create
- snapshot images. This module enables the event- or time-controlled
- recording of these images.
- In addition, this module allows the recording of many image formats like
- JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, BMP, ICO, PPM, XPM, XBM and SVG. The only requirement
- is that the recorded image must be accessible via a URL.
- So it is also possible to record images of e.g. a public Weather Camera
- from the internet or any picture of a website.
-
- Examples:
- A local ip-cam takes 5 snapshots with 10 seconds delay per call:
-
-
- A public web-cam takes only 1 snapshot per call:
-
- define schloss IPCAM http://www2.braunschweig.de
- attr schloss path webcam/schloss.jpg
- attr schloss storage /srv/share/surveillance/snapshots
-
-
- An at-Job takes every hour a snapshot:
-
- define snapshot_schloss at +*00:01:00 get schloss image
-
-
-
-
- Set
N/A
-
-
- Get
-
- get <name> <value>
-
- where value is one of:
-
-
- image
- Get one or more images of the defined IP-Cam. The number of images
- and the time interval between images can be specified using the
- attributes snapshots and delay.
-
-
- last
- Show the name of the last snapshot.
-
-
- snapshots
- Show the total number of a image sequence.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
- credentials
- Defines the location of the credentials file.
- If you prefer to store your cam credentials in a file instead be a part of the
- URI (see attributes path and query), set the full path
- with filename on this attribute.
- Example: attr ipcam3 credentials /etc/fhem/ipcam.conf
-
- The credentials file has the following structure:
-
- Replace <name_cam1> respectively <name_cam2>
- with the names of your defined ip-cams and <your_username> respectively
- <your_password> with your credentials (all without the brackets
- < and >!).
-
-
- delay
- Defines the time interval between snapshots in seconds.
- If more then one snapshot is taken, then it makes sense to define a short delay
- between the snapshots. On the one hand, the camera is not addressed in short intervals
- and the second may be better represented movements between images.
- Example: attr ipcam3 delay 10
-
- path
- Defines the path and query component of the complete URI to get a snapshot of the
- camera. Is the full URI of your ip-cam for example http://CAMERA_IP/snapshot.cgi?user=admin&pwd=password,
- then only the path and query part is specified here (without the leading slash (/).
- Example: attr ipcam3 path snapshot.cgi?user=admin&pwd=password
-
- If you prefer to store the credentials in a file (take a look at the attribute credentials)
- you have to set the placeholder USERNAME and PASSWORD in the path string. These placeholders
- will be replaced with the values from the credentials file.
- Example: attr ipcam3 path snapshot.cgi?user=USERNAME&pwd=PASSWORD
-
- snapshots
- Defines the total number of snapshots to be taken with the get <name> image command.
- If this attribute is not defined, then the default value is 1.
- The snapshots are stored in the given path of the attribute storage and are
- numbered sequentially (starts with 1) like snapshot_01, snapshot_02, etc.
- Furthermore, an additional file last will be saved, which is identical with
- the last snapshot-image. The module checks the imagetype and stores all these files with
- the devicename and a correct extension, e.g. <devicename>_snapshot_01.jpg.
- If you like a timestamp instead a sequentially number, take a look at the attribute timestamp.
- All files are overwritten on every get <name> image command (except: snapshots
- with a timestamp. So, keep an eye on your diskspace if you use a timestamp extension!).
- Example: attr ipcam3 snapshots 5
-
-
- storage
- Defines the location for the file storage of the snapshots. Default: $modpath/www/snapshots
- Example: attr ipcam3 storage /srv/share/surveillance/snapshots
-
-
- timestamp
- If this attribute is unset or set to 0, snapshots are stored with a sequentially number
- like <devicename>_snapshot_01.jpg, <devicename>_snapshot_02.jpg, etc.
- If you like filenames with a timestamp postfix, e.g. <devicename>_20121023_002602.jpg,
- set this attribute to 1.
-
-
- Define a IPWE network attached weather data receiver device sold by ELV. Details see here.
- It's intended to receive the same sensors as WS300 (8 T/H-Sensors and one kombi sensor),
- but can be accessed via http and telnet.
-
- For unknown reason, my try to use the telnet interface was not working neither with raw sockets
- nor with Net::Telnet module. Therefore i choosed here the "easy" way
- to simple readout the http page and extract all data from the offered table. For this reason this module doesnt
- contain any option to configure this device.
-
Note: You should give your sensors a name within the web interface, once they a received the first time.
- To extract a single sensor simply match for this name or sensor id
-
-
- Attributes:
-
-
delay: seconds between read accesses(default 300s)
-
-
-
- Example:
-
- define ipwe IPWE ipwe1 120
-
-
- attr ipwe delay 600 : 10min between readouts
-
-
-
-
- Set
N/A
-
-
- Get
-
- get <name> status
-
- Gets actual data from device for sensors with data
-
- get <name> <sensorname>
-
- will grep output from device for this sensorname
-
- Note: this module needs the Net::Telnet module.
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> ITACH_RELAY <ip-address> <port>
-
- Defines an Global Cache iTach Relay device (Box with 3 relays) via its ip address.
-
-
- Examples:
-
- define motor1 ITACH_RELAY 192.168.8.200 1
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set <name> <value>
-
- where value is one of:
-
- off
- on
- toggle
-
- Examples:
-
- set motor1 on
-
-
- Notes:
-
-
Toggle is special implemented. List name returns "on" or "off" even after a toggle command
-
-
-
-
-
-
USBWX
-
- The USBWX module interprets the messages received by the ELV USB-WDE1
- weather receiver. This receiver is compaptible with the following ELV sensors:
- KS200/KS300, S300IA, S300TH, ASH2200, PS50. It also known to work with Conrad
- weather sensors KS555, S555TH and ASH555. This module was tested with ELV
- S300TH, ELV ASH2200, ELV KS300, Conrad S555TH and Conrad KS555. Readings
- and STATE of temperature/humidity sensors are compatible with the CUL_WS
- module. For KS300/KS555 sensors STATE is compatible with the KS300 module. The
- module is integrated into autocreate to generate the appropriate filelogs and
- weblinks automatically.
-
- Note: this module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module
- if the devices is connected via USB or a serial port.
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> USBWX <serial device>
-
- Defines USB-WDE1 attached via usb.
-
- define <name> USBWX <code> [corr1...corr4]
-
- <code> is the code which must be set on the sensor. Valid values
- are 1 through 8. 9 is used as the sensor id of the ks300 sensor.
- corr1..corr4 are up to 4 numerical correction factors, which will be added
- to the respective value to calibrate the device. Note: rain-values will be
- multiplied and not added to the correction factor.
-
-
- Example:
- The TCM module serves an USB or TCP/IP connected TCM120 or TCM310 EnOcean
- Transceiver module. These are mostly packaged together with a serial to USB
- chip and an antenna, e.g. the BSC BOR contains the TCM120, the EUL from
- busware contains a TCM310. See also the datasheet available from www.enocean.com.
-
- As the TCM120 and the TCM310 speak completely different protocols, this
- module implements 2 drivers in one. It is the "physical" part for the EnOcean module.
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> TCM [120|310] <device>
-
- First you have to specify the type of the EnOcean Transceiver Chip , i.e
- either 120 for the TCM120 or 310 for the TCM310.
- device can take the same parameters (@baudrate, @directio,
- TCP/IP, none) like the CUL, but you probably have
- to specify the baudrate: the TCM120 should be opened with 9600 Baud, the
- TCM310 with 57600 baud.
- Example:
-
- This module is for the RFXCOM RFXtrx433 USB based 433 Mhz RF transmitters.
-This USB based transmitter is able to receive and transmit many protocols like Oregon Scientific weather sensors, X10 security and lighting devices, ARC ((address code wheels) HomeEasy, KlikAanKlikUit, ByeByeStandBy, Intertechno, ELRO,
-AB600, Duewi, DomiaLite, COCO) and others.
- Currently the following parser modules are implemented:
-
-
46_TRX_WEATHER.pm (see device TRX): Process messages Oregon Scientific weather sensors.
- See http://www.rfxcom.com/oregon.htm for a list of
- Oregon Scientific weather sensors that could be received by the RFXtrx433 tranmitter.
- Until now the following Oregon Scientific weather sensors have been tested successfully: BTHR918, BTHR918N, PCR800, RGR918, THGR228N, THGR810, THR128, THWR288A, WTGR800, WGR918. It will also work with many other Oregon sensors supported by RFXtrx433. Please give feedback if you use other sensors.
-
-
46_TRX_SECURITY.pm (see device TRX_SECURITY): Receive X10, KD101 and Visonic security sensors.
-
46_TRX_LIGHT.pm (see device RFXX10REC): Process X10, ARC, ELRO AB400D, Waveman, Chacon EMW200, IMPULS, RisingSun, Philips SBC, AC, HomeEasy EU and ANSLUT lighting devices (switches and remote control). ARC is a protocol used by devices from HomeEasy, KlikAanKlikUit, ByeByeStandBy, Intertechno, ELRO, AB600, Duewi, DomiaLite and COCO with address code wheels. AC is the protocol used by different brands with units having a learning mode button:
-KlikAanKlikUit, NEXA, CHACON, HomeEasy UK.
-
-
- Note: this module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module
- if the devices is connected via USB or a serial port.
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> TRX <device> [noinit]
-
-
- USB-connected:
- <device> specifies the USB port to communicate with the RFXtrx433 receiver.
- Normally on Linux the device will be named /dev/ttyUSBx, where x is a number.
- For example /dev/ttyUSB0. Please note that RFXtrx433 normally operates at 38400 baud. You may specify the baudrate used after the @ char.
-
- Example:
- define RFXTRXUSB TRX /dev/ttyUSB0@38400
-
-
-
- Network-connected devices:
-
- <device> specifies the host:port of the device. E.g.
- 192.168.1.5:10001
-
-
- noninit is optional and issues that the RFXtrx433 device should not be
- initialized. This is useful if you share a RFXtrx433 device via LAN. It is
- also useful for testing to simulate a RFXtrx433 receiver via netcat or via
- FHEM2FHEM.
-
-
-
- Example:
- define RFXTRXTCP TRX 192.168.1.5:10001
-
- define RFXTRXTCP2 TRX 192.168.1.121:10001 noinit
-
-
longids
- Comma separated list of device-types for TRX_WEATHER that should be handled using long IDs. This additional ID is a one byte hex string and is generated by the Oregon sensor when is it powered on. The value seems to be randomly generated. This has the advantage that you may use more than one Oregon sensor of the same type even if it has no switch to set a sensor id. For example the author uses two BTHR918N sensors at the same time. All have different deviceids. The drawback is that the deviceid changes after changing batteries. All devices listed as longids will get an additional one byte hex string appended to the device name.
-Default is to use no long IDs.
-
- Examples:
-# Do not use any long IDs for any devices (this is default):
-attr RFXCOMUSB longids 0
-# Use long IDs for all devices:
-attr RFXCOMUSB longids 1
-# Use longids for BTHR918N devices.
-# Will generate devices names like BTHR918N_f3.
-attr RFXTRXUSB longids BTHR918N
-# Use longids for TX3_T and TX3_H devices.
-# Will generate devices names like TX3_T_07, TX3_T_01 ,TX3_H_07.
-attr RFXTRXUSB longids TX3_T,TX3_H
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
TRX_SECURITY
-
- The TRX_SECURITY module interprets X10, KD101 and Visonic security sensors received by a RFXCOM RFXtrx433 RF receiver. You need to define an RFXtrx433 receiver first. See TRX.
-
-
- specifies one of the following security devices:
-
-
DS10A (X10 security ds10a Door/Window Sensor or compatible devices. This device type reports the status of the switch [Open/Closed], status of the delay switch [min|max]], and battery status [ok|low].)
-
MS10A (X10 security ms10a motion sensor. This device type reports the status of motion sensor [normal|alert] and battery status [ok|low].))
-
SD90 (Marmitek sd90 smoke detector. This device type reports the status of the smoke detector [normal|alert] and battery status [ok|low].)
-
KR18 (X10 security remote control. Report the Reading "Security" with values [Arm|Disarm], "ButtonA" and "ButtonB" with values [on|off] )
-
KD101 (KD101 smoke sensor. Report the Reading "smoke" with values [normal|alert])
-
VISONIC_WINDOW (VISONIC security Door/Window Sensor or compatible devices. This device type reports the status of the switch [Open/Closed] and battery status [ok|low].)
-
VISONIC_MOTION (VISONIC security motion sensor. This device type reports the status of motion sensor [normal|alert] and battery status [ok|low].))
-
-
-
- <deviceid>
-
- specifies the first device id of the device. X10 security (DS10A, MS10A) and SD90 have a a 16 bit device id which has to be written as a hex-string (example "5a54"). All other devices have a 24 bit device id.
-
-
- <devicelog>
-
- is the name of the Reading used to report. Suggested: "Window" or "Door" for ds10a, "motion" for motion sensors, "smoke" for sd90.
-
-
- <deviceid2>
-
- is optional and specifies the second device id of the device if it exists. For example sd90 smoke sensors can be configured to report two device ids.
-
-
- <devicelog2>
-
- is optional for the name used for the Reading of <deviceid2>.
-
- The TRX_LIGHT module receives and sends X10, ARC, ELRO AB400D, Waveman, Chacon EMW200, IMPULS, RisingSun, AC, HomeEasy EU and ANSLUT lighting devices (switches and remote control). Allows to send Philips SBC (receive not possible). ARC is a protocol used by devices from HomeEasy, KlikAanKlikUit, ByeByeStandBy, Intertechno, ELRO, AB600, Duewi, DomiaLite and COCO with address code wheels. AC is the protocol used by different brands with units having a learning mode button:
-KlikAanKlikUit, NEXA, CHACON, HomeEasy UK. You need to define an RFXtrx433 transceiver receiver first.
- See TRX.
-
-
- specifies the type of the device:
- X10 lighting devices:
-
-
MS14A (X10 motion sensor. Reports [normal|alert] on the first deviceid (motion sensor) and [on|off] for the second deviceid (light sensor))
-
X10 (All other x10 devices. Report [off|on|dim|bright|all_off|all_on] on both deviceids.)
-
ARC (ARC devices. ARC is a protocol used by devices from HomeEasy, KlikAanKlikUit, ByeByeStandBy, Intertechno, ELRO, AB600, Duewi, DomiaLite and COCO with address code wheels. Report [off|on|all_off|all_on|chime].)
AC (AC devices. AC is the protocol used by different brands with units having a learning mode button: KlikAanKlikUit, NEXA, CHACON, HomeEasy UK. Report [off|on|level <NUM>|all_off|all_on|all_level <NUM>].)
-
HOMEEASY (HomeEasy EU devices. Report [off|on|level|all_off|all_on|all_level].)
- specifies the first device id of the device.
- A lighting device normally has a house code A..P followed by a unitcode 1..16 (example "B1").
- For AC, HomeEasy EU and ANSLUT it is a 10 Character-Hex-String for the deviceid, consisting of
- - unid-id: 8-Char-Hex: 00000001 to 03FFFFFF
- - unit-code: 2-Char-Hex: 01 to 10
-
-
- <devicelog>
-
- is the name of the Reading used to report. Suggested: "motion" for motion sensors.
-
-
- <deviceid2>
-
- is optional and specifies the second device id of the device if it exists. For example ms14a motion sensors report motion status on the first deviceid and the status of the light sensor on the second deviceid.
-
-
- <devicelog2>
-
- is optional for the name used for the Reading of <deviceid2>.
-
- off
- on
- dim # only for X10, KOPPLA
- bright # only for X10, KOPPLA
- all_off # only for X10, ARC, EMW200, AC, HOMEEASY, ANSLUT
- all_on # only for X10, ARC, EMW200, AC, HOMEEASY, ANSLUT
- chime # only for ARC
- level <levelnum> # only AC, HOMEEASY, ANSLUT: set level to <levelnum> (range: 0=0% to 15=100%)
-
- The TRX_WEATHER module interprets weather sensor messages received by a RTXtrx receiver. See http://www.rfxcom.com/oregon.htm for a list of
- Oregon Scientific weather sensors that could be received by the RFXtrx433 tranmitter. You need to define a RFXtrx433 receiver first. See
- See TRX.
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> OREGON <deviceid>
-
- <deviceid> is the device identifier of the Oregon sensor. It consists of the sensors name and (only if the attribute longids is set of the RFXtrx433) an a one byte hex string (00-ff) that identifies the sensor. If an sensor uses an switch to set an additional is then this is also added. The define statement with the deviceid is generated automatically by autocreate. The following sensor names are used:
- "THR128" (for THR128/138, THC138),
- "THGR132N" (for THC238/268,THN132,THWR288,THRN122,THN122,AW129/131),
- "THWR800",
- "RTHN318",
- "TX3_T" (for LaCrosse TX3, TX4, TX17),
- "THGR228N" (for THGN122/123, THGN132, THGR122/228/238/268),
- "THGR810",
- "RTGR328",
- "THGR328",
- "WTGR800_T" (for temperature of WTGR800),
- "THGR918" (for THGR918, THGRN228, THGN500),
- "TFATS34C" (for TFA TS34C),
- "BTHR918",
- "BTHR918N (for BTHR918N, BTHR968),
- "RGR918" (for RGR126/682/918),
- "PCR800",
- "TFA_RAIN" (for TFA rain sensor),
- "WTGR800_A" (for wind sensor of WTGR800),
- "WGR800" (for wind sensor of WGR800),
- "WGR918" (for wind sensor of STR918 and WGR918),
- "TFA_WIND" (for TFA wind sensor)
-
-
- The TUL module is the representation of a EIB / KNX connector in FHEM.
- EIB instances represent the EIB / KNX devices and will need a TUL as IODev to communicate with the EIB / KNX network.
- The TUL module is designed to connect to EIB network either using EIBD or the TUL usb stick created by busware.de
-
- Note: this module may require the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort
- module if you attach the device via USB and the OS sets strange default
- parameters for serial devices.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> TUL <device> <physical address>
-
- TUL usb stick / TPUART serial devices:
- <device> specifies the serial port to communicate with the TUL.
- The name of the serial-device depends on your distribution, under
- linux the cdc_acm kernel module is responsible, and usually a
- /dev/ttyACM0 device will be created. If your distribution does not have a
- cdc_acm module, you can force usbserial to handle the TUL by the
- following command:
modprobe usbserial vendor=0x03eb
- product=0x204b
In this case the device is most probably
- /dev/ttyUSB0.
-
- You can also specify a baudrate if the device name contains the @
- character, e.g.: /dev/ttyACM0@19200
- Note: For TUL usb stick the baudrate 19200 is needed and this is the default
- when no baudrate is given.
-
-
- Example:
- define tul TUL tul:/dev/ttyACM0 1.1.249
-
- EIBD:
- <device> specifies the host:port of the eibd device. E.g.
- eibd:192.168.0.244:2323. When using the standard port, the port can be omitted.
-
-
- Example:
- define tul TUL eibd:localhost 1.1.249
-
-
- If the device is called none, then no device will be opened, so you
- can experiment without hardware attached.
-
- The physical address is used as the source address of telegrams sent to EIB network.
-
-
- This module controls AV receiver from Yamaha via network connection. You are able
- to power your AV reveiver on and off, query it's power state,
- select the input (HDMI, AV, AirPlay, internet radio, Tuner, ...), select the volume
- or mute/unmute the volume.
- Defining a YAMAHA_AVR device will schedule an internal task (interval can be set
- with optional parameter <status_interval> in seconds, if not set, the value is 60 seconds), which periodically reads
- the status of the AV receiver (power state, selected input, volume and mute status)
- and triggers notify/filelog commands.
-
- Example:
-
- define AV_Receiver YAMAHA_AVR 192.168.0.10
-
-
- Set
-
- set <name> <command> [<parameter>]
-
- Currently, the following commands are defined; the available inputs are depending on the used receiver.
- The module only offers the real available inputs. The following input commands are just an example and can differ.
-
-
on
-off
-input hdmi1
-input hdmi2
-input hdmi3
-input hdmi4
-input av1
-input av2
-input av3
-input av3
-input av4
-input av5
-input av6
-input usb
-input airplay
-input tuner
-input v-aux
-input audio
-input server
-volume -80..16 (volume between -80 and +16 dB)
-mute on
-mute off
-
-
-
- Get
-
- get <name> <what>
-
- Currently, the following commands are defined and return the current state of the receiver.
-
- Optional attribute to define the time window for the volume smoothing in seconds.
- For example the value 2 means the smooth process in general should take 2 seconds.
- The value 0 means "as fast as possible". Default value is 0.
-
-
- Implementator's note
-
- The module is only usable if you activate "Network Standby" on your receiver.
- Technically there are many more commands and readings possible, but I think
- these are the main usecases within FHEM.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ZWDongle
-
- This module serves a ZWave dongle, which is attached via USB or TCP/IP, and
- enables the use of ZWave devices (see also the ZWave
- module). It was tested wit a Goodway WD6001, but since the protocol is
- standardized, it should work with other devices too. A notable exception is
- the USB device from Merten.
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> ZWDongle <device>
-
-
- Upon initial connection the module will get the homeId of the attached
- device. Since the DevIo module is used to open the device, you can also use
- devices connected via TCP/IP. See this paragraph on
- device naming details.
-
- Example:
-
addNode [on|off]
- Activate (or deactivate) inclusion mode. The controller (i.e. the dongle)
- will accept inclusion (i.e. pairing/learning) requests only while in this
- mode. After activating inclusion mode usually you have to press a switch
- three times within 1.5 seconds on the node to be included into the network
- of the controller. If autocreate is active, a fhem device will be created
- after inclusion.
-
-
removeNode [on|off]
- Activate (or deactivate) exclusion mode. Note: the corresponding fhem
- device have to be deleted manually.
-
-
createNode id
- Request the class information for the specified node, and create a fhem
- device upon reception of the answer. Used for previously included nodes,
- see the nodeList get command below.
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
-
nodeList
- return the list of included nodeIds. Can be used to recreate fhem-nodes
- with the createNode command.
-
-
homeId
- return the six hex-digit homeId of the controller.
-
-
caps, ctrlCaps, version
- return different controller specific information. Needed by developers only.
-
-
nodeInfo
- return node specific information. Needed by developers only.
-
-
-
raw
- Send raw data to the controller. Developer only.
-
- This module is used to control ZWave devices via FHEM, see www.z-wave.com on details for this device family.
- This module is a client of the ZWDongle module, which
- is directly attached to the controller via USB or TCP/IP.
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> ZWave <homeId> <id> [classes]
-
-
- <homeId> is the homeId of the controller node, and id is the id of the
- slave node in the network of this controller.
- classes is a hex-list of ZWave device classes. This argument is usually
- specified by autocreate when creating a device. If you wish to manually
- create a device, use the classes attribute instead, see below for details.
- Defining a ZWave device the first time is usually done by autocreate.
-
- Example:
-
- define lamp ZWave 00ce2074 9
- attr lamp classes SWITCH_BINARY BASIC MANUFACTURER_SPECIFIC VERSION SWITCH_ALL ASSOCIATION METER CONFIGURATION ALARM
-
-
-
-
- Note: the sets/gets/generated events of a gven node depend on the classes
- supported by this node. If a node supports 3 classes, then the union of
- these sets/gets/events will be available for this node.
- Commands for battery operated nodes will be queues internally, and sent when
- the node sends a message. Answer to get commands appear then as events, the
- corresponding readings will be updated.
-
-
-
- Set
-
-
- Class BASIC
-
basicValue value
- Send value (0-255) to this device. The interpretation is device dependent,
- e.g. for a SWITCH_BINARY device 0 is off and anything else is on.
-
-
Class SWITCH_BINARY
-
on
- switch the device on
-
off
- switch the device off
-
reportOn,reportOff
- activate/deactivate the reporting of device state changes to the association group.
-
-
Class CONFIGURATION
-
configByte cfgAddress 8bitValue
- configWord cfgAddress 16bitValue
- configLong cfgAddress 32bitValue
- Send a configuration value for the parameter cfgAddress. cfgAddress and
- value is node specific.
-
configDefault cfgAddress
- Reset the configuration parameter for the cfgAddress parameter to its default value.
- See the device documentation to determine this value.
-
-
Class WAKE_UP
-
wakeupInterval value
- Set the wakeup interval of battery operated devices to the given value in
- seconds. Upon wakeup the device sends a wakeup notification.
-
-
Class ASSOCIATION
-
associationAdd groupId nodeId ...
- Add the specified list of nodeIds to the assotion group groupId.
- Note: upon creating a fhem-device for the first time fhem will automatically
- add the controller to the first association group of the node corresponding
- to the fhem device, i.e it issues a "set name associationAdd 1 controllerNodeId"
-
-
associationDel groupId nodeId ...
- Remove the specified list of nodeIds from the assotion group groupId.
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
-
- Class BASIC
-
basicStatus
- return the status of the node as basicReport:XY. The value (XY) depends on
- the node, e.g a SWITCH_BINARY device report 00 for off and FF (255) for on.
-
-
Class SWITCH_BINARY
-
swbStatus
- return the status of the node, as state:on or state:off.
-
-
Class SENSOR_BINARY
-
sbStatus
- return the status of the node, as state:open or state:closed.
-
-
Class CONFIGURATION
-
config cfgAddress
- return the value of the configuration parameter cfgAddress. The value is
- device specific.
-
-
Class ALARM
-
alarm alarmId
- return the value for alarmId. The value is device specific.
-
-
Class BATTERY
-
battery
- return the charge of the battery in %, as battery:value %
-
-
Class WAKE_UP
-
wakeupInterval
- return the wakeup interval in seconds, in the form
- wakeupReport:interval:seconds target:id
-
-
Class ASSOCIATION
-
association groupId
- return the list of nodeIds in the association group groupId in the form:
- assocGroup_X:Max:Y Nodes:id,id...
-
-
Class VERSION
-
version
- return the version information of this node in the form:
- Lib:A Prot:x.y App:a.b
-
-
classes
- This attribute is needed by the ZWave module, as the list of the possible
- set/get commands depends on it. It contains a space separated list of
- class names (capital letters).
-
- This is a placeholder used with webpgm2 to be able to integrate links
- into it, and to be able to put more than one gnuplot/SVG picture on one
- page. It has no set or get methods.
-
- Examples:
-
Normally you won't have to define fileplot weblinks manually, as
- FHEMWEB makes it easy for you, just plot a logfile (see
- logtype) and convert it to weblink. Now you
- can group these weblinks by putting them into rooms. If you convert
- the current logfile to a weblink, it will always refer to the current
- file, even if its name changes regularly (and not the one you
- originally specified).
-
-
-
-
- Set
N/A
-
-
- Get
N/A
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
-
htmlattr
- HTML attributes to be used for link, image and iframe type of links. E.g.:
-
-
- define yw weblink wl_im1 iframe http://weather.yahooapis.com/forecastrss?w=650272&u=c
- attr yw weblink htmlattr width="480" height="560"
-
-
label
- Double-Colon separated list of values. The values will be used to replace
- <L#> type of strings in the .gplot file, with # beginning at 1
- (<L1>, <L2>, etc.). Each value will be evaluated as a perl
- expression, so you have access e.g. to the Value functions.
-
- If the plotmode is gnuplot-scroll or SVG, you can also use the min, max,
- avg, cnt, sum, currval (last value) and currdate (last date) values of the
- individual curves, by accessing the corresponding values from the data
- hash, see the example below:
-
-
.gplot file entry:
- set ylabel <L1>
- set y2label <L2>
-
-
Title with maximum and current values of the 1st curve (FileLog)
-
-
Fhem config:
- attr wl_1 label "Max $data{max1}, Current $data{currval1}"
-
.gplot file entry:
- set title <L1>
-
-
-
-
-
-
title
- A special form of label (see above), which replaces the string <TL>
- in the .gplot file. It defaults to the filename of the logfile.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
FHEM2FHEM
-
- FHEM2FHEM is a helper module to connect separate fhem installations.
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> FHEM2FHEM <host>[:<portnr>][:SSL] [LOG:regexp|RAW:devicename] {portpassword}
-
-
-
- Connect to the remote fhem on <host>. <portnr> is a telnet
- port on the remote fhem, defaults to 7072. The optional :SSL suffix is
- needed, if the remote fhem configured SSL for this telnet port. In this case
- the IO::Socket::SSL perl module must be installed for the local host too.
-
- Note: if the remote fhem is on a separate host, the telnet port on the remote
- fhem musst be specified with the global option.
-
- The next parameter specifies the connection
- type:
-
-
LOG
- Using this type you will receive all events generated by the remote fhem,
- just like when using the inform on command, and you
- can use these events just like any local event for FileLog or notify.
- The regexp will prefilter the events distributed locally, for the syntax
- see the notify definition.
- Drawbacks: the remote devices wont be created locally, so list wont
- show them and it is not possible to manipulate them from the local
- fhem. It is possible to create a device with the same name on both fhem
- instances, but if both of them receive the same event (e.g. because both
- of them have a CUL attached), then all associated FileLogs/notifys will be
- triggered twice.
-
-
RAW
- By using this type the local fhem will receive raw events from the remote
- fhem device devicename, just like if it would be attached to the
- local fhem.
- Drawback: only devices using the Dispatch function (CUL, FHZ, CM11,
- SISPM, RFXCOM, TCM, TRX, TUL) generate raw messages, and you must create a
- FHEM2FHEM instance for each remote device.
- devicename must exist on the local
- fhem server too with the same name and same type as the remote device, but
- with the device-node "none", so it is only a dummy device.
- All necessary attributes (e.g. rfmode if the remote
- CUL is in HomeMatic mode) must also be set for the local device.
- Do not reuse a real local device, else duplicate filtering (see dupTimeout)
- won't work correctly.
-
-
- The last parameter specifies an optional portpassword, if the remote server
- activated portpassword.
-
- Examples:
-
- define ds1 FHEM2FHEM 192.168.178.22:7072 LOG:.*
-
- define RpiCUL CUL none 0000
- define ds2 FHEM2FHEM 192.168.178.22:7072 RAW:RpiCUL
- and on the RPi (192.168.178.22):
- rename CUL_0 RpiCUL
-
- FHEMWEB is the builtin web-frontend (webpgm2). It implements a simple web
- server (optionally with Basic-Auth and HTTPS), so no additional program is
- needed.
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> FHEMWEB <tcp-portnr> [global]
-
- Enable the webfrontend on port <tcp-portnr>. If global is specified,
- then requests from all interfaces (not only localhost / 127.0.0.1) are
- serviced.
- To enable listening on IPV6 see the comments here.
-
- Feature: http://host:port/fhem/icons/<devicename> will return
- the icon associated with the current status of <devicename>.
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set <name> rereadicons
-
- Rereads the icons in the icon path and updates the mapping from logical icons to physical files.
- Use after adding, deleting or changing icons.
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
-
icon <logical icon>
-
- returns the absolute path to the logical icon. Example:
-
- get myFHEMWEB icon FS20.on
- /data/Homeautomation/fhem/FHEM/FS20.on.png
-
-
-
pathlist
- return FHEMWEB specific directories, where files for given types are located
-
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
-
webname
- Path after the http://hostname:port/ specification. Defaults to fhem,
- i.e the default http address is http://localhost:8083/fhem
-
-
-
-
refresh
- If set, a http-equiv="refresh" entry will be genererated with the given
- argument (i.e. the browser will reload the page after the given
- seconds).
-
-
-
-
plotmode
- Specifies how to generate the plots:
-
-
gnuplot
- Call the gnuplot script with each logfile. The filename
- specification of the FileLog device will
- determine what is in the plot. The data is converted into an
- image on the backend with gnuplot.
-
gnuplot-scroll
- Fhemweb will offer zoom and scroll buttons in order to navigate
- in the current logfile, i.e. you can select just a part of the
- data to be displayed. The more data is contained in a single
- logfile, the easier you can navigate. The recommendation is to
- store the data for a whole year in one logfile. The data is
- converted into an image on the backend with gnuplot.
-
SVG
- The same scrolling as with gnuplot scroll, but the data is sent
- as an SVG script to the frontend, which will compute
- the image: no need for gnuplot on the backend.
- This is the default. Note: SVG is supported on the Android
- platform by Opera/Firefox and the Internet Explorer before 9
- needs a plugin.
-
-
- See also the attribute fixedrange.
- Note: for gnuplot & gnuplot-scroll mode the gnuplot output is
- redirected to the file gnuplot.err in the /tmp directory
-
-
-
-
plotsize
- the default size of the plot, in pixels, separated by comma:
- width,height. You can set individual sizes by setting the plotsize of
- the weblink. Default is 800,160 for desktop, and 480,160 for
- smallscreen.
-
-
-
-
fixedrange
- Can be applied to weblink devices (FHEMWEB).
- Contains two time specs in the form YYYY-MM-DD separated by a space.
- In plotmode gnuplot-scroll or SVG the given time-range will be used,
- and no scrolling for this weblinks will be possible. Needed e.g. for
- looking at last-years data without scrolling.
- If the value is one of day, week, month, year than set the zoom level
- for this weblink independently of the user specified zoom-level.
- This is useful for pages with multiple plots: one of the plots is best
- viewed in with the default (day) zoom, the other one with a week zoom.
-
-
-
-
-
smallscreen, touchpad
- Optimize for small screen size (i.e. smartphones) or for touchpad
- devices (i.e. tablets)
- Note: The default configuration installed with make install-pgm2
- installs 2 FHEMWEB instances: port 8083 for desktop browsers and
- port 8084 for smallscreen browsers, both using SVG rendering.
- On Android SVG is supported by Opera/Firefox.
-
- WebApp suppport if specifying one of the above options: After viewing
- the site on the iPhone or iPad in Safari, add it to the home-screen to
- get full-screen support.
-
-
-
-
plotfork
- If set, generate the logs in a parallel process. Note: do not use it
- on Windows and on systems with small memory foorprint.
-
-
-
-
basicAuth, basicAuthMsg
- request a username/password authentication for access. You have to set
- the basicAuth attribute to the Base64 encoded value of
- <user>:<password>, e.g.:
- # Calculate first the encoded string with the commandline program
- $ echo -n fhemuser:secret | base64
- ZmhlbXVzZXI6c2VjcmV0
- fhem.cfg:
- attr WEB basicAuth ZmhlbXVzZXI6c2VjcmV0
-
- You can of course use other means of base64 encoding, e.g. online
- Base64 encoders. If basicAuthMsg is set, it will be displayed in the
- popup window when requesting the username/password.
-
- If the argument of basicAuth is enclosed in {}, then it will be
- evaluated, and the $user and $password variable will be set to the
- values entered. If the return value is true, then the password will be
- accepted.
- Example:
-
- attr WEB basicAuth { "$user:$password" eq "admin:secret" }
- attr WEB basicAuth {use FritzBoxUtils;;FB_checkPw("localhost","$password") }
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
HTTPS
- Enable HTTPS connections. This feature requires the perl module
- IO::Socket::SSL, to be installed with cpan -i IO::Socket::SSL or
- apt-get install libio-socket-ssl-perl; OSX and the FritzBox-7390
- already have this module.
-
- A local certificate has to be generated into a directory called certs,
- this directory must be in the modpath
- directory, at the same level as the FHEM directory.
-
stylesheetPrefix
- prefix for the files style.css, svg_style.css and svg_defs.svg. If the file
- with the prefix is missing, the default file (without prefix) will be used.
- These files have to be placed into the FHEM directory, and can be selected
- directly from the "Select style" FHEMWEB menu entry. Example:
-
- attr WEB stylesheetPrefix dark
-
- Referenced files:
-
hiddenroom
- Komma separated list of rooms to "hide", i.e. not to show. Special
- values are input, detail and save, in which case the input areas, link
- to the detailed views or save button is hidden (although each aspect
- still can be addressed through url manipulation).
- The list can also contain values from the additional "Howto/Wiki/FAQ"
- block.
-
-
-
-
-
longpoll
- Affects devices states in the room overview only.
- In this mode status update is refreshed more or less instantaneously,
- and state change (on/off only) is done without requesting a complete
- refresh from the server.
-
-
-
-
-
redirectCmds
- Clear the browser URL window after issuing the command by redirecting
- the browser, as a reload for the same site might have unintended
- side-effects. Default is 1 (enabled). Disable it by setting this
- attribute to 0 if you want to study the command syntax, in order to
- communicate with FHEMWEB.
-
-
-
-
-
webCmd
- Colon separated list of commands to be shown in the room overview for a
- certain device. On smallscreen devices only the first value is
- accessible.
- If the first value references a command, for which "set
- device ?" lists a number possible choices (e.g. desired-temp for FHT
- devices), then a select widget will be displayed. If the values are
- "slider,min,step,max", then a javascript driven slider is displayed.
- if the value is "time", then a javascript timepicker is displayed.
- If the command is state, then the value will be used as a command.
- Examples:
-
- attr lamp webCmd on:off:on-for-timer 10
- define d1 dummy
- attr d1 webCmd state
- attr d1 set setList state:on,off
- define d2 dummy
- attr d2 webCmd state
- attr d2 set setList state:slider,0,1,10
- define d3 dummy
- attr d3 webCmd state
- attr d3 set setList state:time
-
- Note: this is an attribute for the displayed device, not for the FHEMWEB
- instance.
-
-
-
-
-
fwmodpath
- Set the "modpath" for this intance of FHEMWEB. Used to search .gplot
- files, pictures, etc. Default is the modpath/FHEM directory.
-
-
-
-
-
fwcompress
- Enable compressing the HTML data (default is 1, i.e. yes, use 0 to switch it off).
-
-
-
-
-
icon
- Set the icon for a device in the room overview. There is an
- icon-chooser in FHEMWEB to ease this task. Setting icons for the room
- itself is indirect: there must exist an icon with the name
- ico.png in the modpath/fwmodpath directory.
-
-
-
-
-
reverseLogs
- Display the lines from the logfile in a reversed order, newest on the
- top, so that you dont have to scroll down to look at the latest entries.
- Note: enabling this attribute will prevent FHEMWEB from streaming
- logfiles, resulting in a considerably increased memory consumption
- (about 6 times the size of the file on the disk).
-
- Implements an additional entry "Floorplans" to your fhem menu, leading to a userinterface without fhem-menu, rooms or devicelists.
- Devices can be displayed at a defined coordinate on the screen, usually with a clickable icon allowing to switch
- the device on or off by clicking on it. A background-picture can be used - use e.g. a floorplan of your house, or any picture.
- Use floorplanstyle.css to adapt the representation.
- Step-by-step setup guides are available in
- english and
- german.
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> FLOORPLAN
-
-
- Hint: Store fp_<name>.png in your image folder (www/images/default , www/pgm2 or FHEM) to use it as background picture.
- A userattr fp_<name> will be created automatically if it does not exist yet.
-
-
top = screen-position, pixels from top of screen
-
left = screen-position, pixels from left of screen
-
style =
-
-
0 icon/state only
-
1 devicename and icon/state
-
2 devicename, icon/state and commands
-
3 device-reading and optional description
-
4 S300TH-specific, displays temperature above humidity
-
5 icon/state and commands
-
6 device-reading, reading-timestamp and optional description
-
-
description will be displayed instead of the original devicename
-
- Examples:
-
-
-
attr lamp1 fp_Groundfloor 100,100
#display lamp1 with icon only at screenposition 100,100
-
attr lamp2 fp_Groundfloor 100,140,1,Art-Deco
#display lamp2 with description 'Art-Deco-Light' at 100,140
-
attr lamp2 fp_FirstFloor 130,100,1
#display the same device at different positions on other floorplans
-
attr myFHT fp_Groundfloor 300,20,10,Temperature
#display given Text + FHT-temperature
-
-
- Hint: no blanks between parameters
-
-
-
fp_arrange
- Activates the "arrange mode" which shows an additional menu on the screen,
- allowing to place devices easily on the screen.
- Example:
-
- attr Groundfloor fp_arrange 1
- attr Groundfloor fp_arrange detail #displays the devices with infos room, type, alias
- attr Groundfloor fp_arrange WEB #activates arrange mode for frontend-device WEB only
-
-
-
stylesheet
- Explicitely sets your personal stylesheet for the floorplan. This overrides the standard stylesheet.
- The standard stylesheet for floorplans is floorplanstyle.css. If the stylesheetPrefix is set for the corresponding FHEMWEB instance, this same
- stylesheetPrefix is also prepended to the stylesheet for floorplans.
- All stylesheets must be stored in the stylesheet subfolder of the fhem filesystem hierarchy. Store your personal
- stylesheet along with floorplanstyle.css in the same folder.
- Example:
-
- The optional + indicates that the specification is
- relative(i.e. it will be added to the current time).
- The optional * indicates that the command should be
- executed repeatedly.
- The optional {N} after the * indicates,that the command
- should be repeated N-times only.
- <timedet> is either HH:MM, HH:MM:SS or {perlfunc()}, where perlfunc
- must return a HH:MM or HH:MM:SS date.
-
-
-
- Examples:
-
- # absolute ones:
- define a1 at 17:00:00 set lamp on # fhem command
- define a2 at 17:00:00 { Log 1, "Teatime" } # Perl command
- define a3 at 17:00:00 "/bin/echo "Teatime" > /dev/console" # shell command
- define a4 at *17:00:00 set lamp on # every day
-
- # relative ones
- define a5 at +00:00:10 set lamp on # switch on in 10 seconds
- define a6 at +00:00:02 set lamp on-for-timer 1 # Blink once in 2 seconds
- define a7 at +*{3}00:00:02 set lamp on-for-timer 1 # Blink 3 times
-
- # Blink 3 times if the piri sends a command
- define n1 notify piri:on.* define a8 at +*{3}00:00:02 set lamp on-for-timer 1
-
- # Switch the lamp on from sunset to 11 PM
- define a9 at +*{sunset_rel()} set lamp on
- define a10 at *23:00:00 set lamp off
-
- # More elegant version, works for sunset > 23:00 too
- define a11 at +*{sunset_rel()} set lamp on-till 23:00
-
- # Only do this on weekend
- define a12 at +*{sunset_rel()} { fhem("set lamp on-till 23:00") if($we) }
-
- # Switch lamp1 and lamp2 on from 7:00 till 10 minutes after sunrise
- define a13 at *07:00 set lamp1,lamp2 on-till {sunrise(+600)}
-
- # Switch the lamp off 2 minutes after sunrise each day
- define a14 at +{sunrise(+120)} set lamp on
-
- # Switch lamp1 on at sunset, not before 18:00 and not after 21:00
- define a15 at *{sunset(0,"18:00","21:00")} set lamp1 on
-
-
-
- Notes:
-
-
if no * is specified, then a command will be executed
- only once, and then the at entry will be deleted. In
- this case the command will be saved to the statefile (as it
- considered volatile, i.e. entered by cronjob) and not to the
- configfile (see the save command.)
-
-
-
if the current time is greater than the time specified, then the
- command will be executed tomorrow.
-
-
For even more complex date handling you either have to call fhem from
- cron or filter the date in a perl expression, see the last example and
- the section Perl special.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
N/A
-
-
- Get
N/A
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
-
disable
- Can be applied to at/watchdog/notify/FileLog devices.
- Disables the corresponding at/notify or FileLog device. Note:
- If applied to an at, the command will not be executed,
- but the next time will be computed.
-
-
-
skip_next
- Used for at commands: skip the execution of the command the next
- time.
-
-
-
alignTime
- Applies only to relative at definitions: adjust the time of the next
- command execution so, that it will also be executed at the desired
- alignTime. The argument is a timespec, see above for the
- definition.
- Example:
-
- # Make sure that it chimes when the new hour begins
- define at2 at +*01:00 set Chime on-for-timer 1
- attr atr2 alignTime 00:00
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
autocreate
-
-
- Automatically create not yet defined fhem devices upon reception of a message
- generated by this device. Note: devices which are polled (like the EMEM/EMWZ
- accessed through the EM1010PC) will NOT be automatically created.
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> autocreate
-
-
- It makes no sense to create more than one instance of this module.
- By defining an instance, the global attribute autoload_undefined_devices
- is set, so that modules for unknnown devices are automatically loaded.
- The autocreate module intercepts the UNDEFINED event generated by each
- module, creates a device and optionally also FileLog and weblink
- entries.
- Note 1: devices will be created with a unique name, which contains
- the type and a unique id for this type. When renaming
- the device, the automatically created filelog and weblink devices
- will also be renamed.
- Note 2: you can disable the automatic creation by setting the
- disable attribute, in this case only the rename
- hook is active, and you can use the createlog
- command to add FileLog and weblink to an already defined device.
-
autosave
- After creating a device, automatically save the config file with the
- command save command. Default is 1 (i.e. on), set
- it to 0 to switch it off.
-
-
-
device_room
- "Put" the newly created device in this room. The name can contain the
- wildcards %TYPE and %NAME, see the example above.
-
-
-
filelog
- Create a filelog associated with the device. The filename can contain
- the wildcards %TYPE and %NAME, see the example above. The filelog will
- be "put" in the same room as the device.
-
-
-
weblink
- Create a weblink associated with the device/filelog.
-
-
-
weblink_room
- "Put" the newly weblink in this room. The name can contain the
- wildcards %TYPE and %NAME, see the example above.
ignoreTypes
- This is a regexp, to ignore certain devices, e.g. you neighbours FHT.
- You can specify more than one, with usual regexp syntax, e.g.
- attr autocreate ignoreTypes CUL_HOERMANN.*|FHT_1234|CUL_WS_7
-
-
-
-
-
-
- createlog
-
- Use this command to manually add a FileLog and a weblink to an existing
- device. E.g. if a HomeMatic device is created automatically by something
- else then a pairing message, the model is unknown, so no plots will be
- generated. You can set the model/subtype attribute manually, and then call
- createlog to add the corresponding logs.
- This command is part of the autocreate module.
-
-
-
-
- usb
-
- Usage:
-
- usb scan
- usb create
-
- This command will scan the /dev directory for attached USB devices, and
- will try to identify them. With the argument scan you'll get back a list
- of fhem commands to execute, with the argument create there will be no
- feedback, and the devices will be created instead.
-
- Note that switching a CUL to HomeMatic mode is still has to be done
- manually.
-
- On Linux it will also check with the lsusb command, if unflashed CULs are
- attached. If this is the case, it will call CULflash with the appropriate
- parameters (or display the CULflash command if scan is specified). Only
- one device to flash is displayed at a time.
-
- This command is part of the autocreate module.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
average
-
-
- Compute additional average, minimum and maximum values for current day and
- month.
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> average <regexp>
-
-
- The syntax for <regexp> is the same as the
- regexp for notify.
- If it matches, and the event is of the form "eventname number", then this
- module computes the daily and monthly average, maximum and minimum values
- and generates events of the form
-
-
- at the beginning of the next day or month respectively.
- The current average, minimum, maximum and the cumulated values are stored
- in the device readings.
-
-
-
- Example:
- # Compute the average, minimum and maximum for the temperature events of
- # the ws1 device
- define avg_temp_ws1 average ws1:temperature.*
-
- # Compute the average, minimum and maximum for each temperature event
- define avg_temp_ws1 average .*:temperature.*
-
- # Compute the average, minimum and maximum for all temperature and humidity events
- # Events:
- # ws1 temperature: 22.3
- # ws1 humidity: 67.4
- define avg_temp_ws1 average .*:(temperature|humidity).*
-
- # Hunt only for the humidity: take the value from the first
- # parenthesis ($1 in perl regexp) if it is a number
- # Event: ws1 T: 52.3 H: 67.4
- define avg_temp_ws1 average ws1:.*H:.([-\d\.]+)
-
- Calculates dewpoint for device <devicename-regex> from temperature and humidity
- and write it to a new reading named dewpoint.
- If optional <temp_name>, <hum_name> and <new_name> is specified
- then read temperature from reading <temp_name>, humidity from reading <hum_name>
- and write the calculated dewpoint to reading <new_name>.
- If <temp_name> is T then use temperature from state T: H:, add <new_name> to the state.
-
-
-
- Example:
- # Compute the dewpoint for the temperature/humidity
- # events of the temp1 device and generate reading dewpoint.
- define dew_temp1 dewpoint dewpoint temp1
- define dew_temp1 dewpoint dewpoint temp1 temperature humidity dewpoint
-
- # Compute the dewpoint for the temperature/humidity
- # events of all devices offering temperature and humidity
- # and generate reading dewpoint.
- define dew_all dewpoint dewpoint .*
- define dew_all dewpoint dewpoint .* temperature humidity dewpoint
-
- # Compute the dewpoint for the temperature/humidity
- # events of the device Aussen_1 offering temperature and humidity
- # and insert is into STATE.
- define dew_state dewpoint dewpoint Aussen_1 T H D
-
- # Compute the dewpoint for the temperature/humidity
- # events of all devices offering temperature and humidity
- # and insert the result into the STATE.
- # Example STATE: "T: 10 H: 62.5" will change to
- # "T: 10 H: 62.5 D: 3.2"
- define dew_state dewpoint dewpoint .* T H D
-
-
- May be used to turn an fan on or off if the outside air has less water.
-
-
- Generate event "fan: on" if (dewpoint of <devicename-outside>) + <diff_temp> is lower
- than dewpoint of <devicename> and temperature of <devicename-outside> is >= min-temp
- and reading "fan" was not already "on". The event will be generated for <devicename>. Parameter <diff-temp> is optional
-
Generate event "fan: off": else and if reading "fan" was not already "off".
-
-
-
-
- Example:
- # Generate event "fan: on" when dewpoint of Aussen_1 is first
- # time lower than basement_tempsensor and outside temperature is >= 0
- # and change it to "fan: off" is this condition changes.
- # Set a switch on/off (fan_switch) depending on the state.
- define dew_fan1 dewpoint fan basement_tempsensor Aussen_1 0
- define dew_fan1_on notify basement_tempsensor.*fan:.*on set fan_switch on
- define dew_fan1_off notify basement_tempsensor.*fan:.*off set fan_switch off
-
-
- Generate a mold alarm if a reference temperature is lower that the current dewpoint.
-
-
- Generate reading/event "alarm: on" if temperature of <devicename-reference> - <diff-temp> is lower
- than dewpoint of <devicename> and reading "alarm" was not already "on". The event will be generated for <devicename>.
-
Generate reading/event "alarm: off" if temperature of <devicename-reference> - <diff-temp> is higher than dewpoint of <devicename> and reading "alarm" was not already "off".
-
-
-
-
- Example:
- # Using a wall temperature sensor (wallsensor) and a temp/hum sensor
- # (roomsensor) to alarm if the temperature of the wall is lower than
- # the dewpoint of the air. In this case the water of the air will
- # condense on the wall because the wall is cold.
- # Set a switch on (alarm_siren) if alarm is on using notify.
- define dew_alarm1 dewpoint alarm roomsensor wallsensor 0
- define roomsensor_alarm_on notify roomsensor.*fan:.*on set alarm_siren on
- define roomsensor_alarm_off notify roomsensor.*fan:.*off set alarm_siren off
-
- # If you do not have a temperature sensor in/on the wall, you may also
- # compare the rooms dewpoint to the temperature of the same or another
- # inside sensor. Alarm is temperature is 5 degrees colder than the
- # inside dewpointinside.
- define dev_alarm2 dewpoint alarm roomsensor roomsensor 5
-
-
- Define a set of holidays. The module will try to open the file
- <name>.holiday in the modpath/FHEM directory.
- If entries in the holiday file match the current day, then the STATE of
- this holiday instance displayed in the list command
- will be set to the corresponding values, else the state is set to the text
- none. Most probably you'll want to query this value in some perl script:
- see Value() in the perl section or the global attribute
- holiday2we. The file will be reread once
- every night, to compute the value for the current day, and by each get
- command (see below).
-
-
- Holiday file definition:
- The file may contain comments (beginning with #) or empty lines.
- Significant lines begin with a number (type) and contain some space
- separated words, depending on the type. The different types are:
-
5
- Date relative, weekday fixed holiday. Arguments: <nth>
- <weekday> <month> <day> < holiday-name>
- Note that while +0 or -0 as offsets are not forbidden, their behaviour
- is undefined in the sense that it might change without notice.
- Examples:
-
- 5 -1 Wed 11 23 Buss und Bettag (first Wednesday before Nov, 23rd)
- 5 1 Mon 01 31 First Monday after Jan, 31st (1st Monday in February)
-
-
-
- See also he.holiday in the contrib directory for official holidays in the
- german country of Hessen, and by.holiday for the Bavarian definition.
-
-
-
-
- Set
N/A
-
-
- Get
-
- get <name> <MM-DD>
- get <name> yesterday
- get <name> today
- get <name> tomorrow
-
- Return the holiday name of the specified date or the text none.
-
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
N/A
-
-
-
-
-
notify
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> notify <pattern> <command>
-
- Execute a command when received an event for the definition<pattern>. If
- <command> is enclosed in {}, then it is a perl expression, if it is
- enclosed in "", then it is a shell command, else it is a "plain" fhem.pl
- command (chain). See the trigger command for
- testing it.
-
- Examples:
-
The character % will be replaced with the received event,
- e.g. with on or off or measured-temp: 21.7
- (Celsius) It is advisable to put the % into double
- quotes, else the shell may get a syntax error.
-
-
The character @ will be replaced with the device
- name.
-
-
To use % or @ in the text itself, use the double mode (%% or @@).
-
-
Instead of % and @, the parameters
- %EVENT (same as %), %NAME (same as
- @) and %TYPE (contains the device type, e.g.
- FHT) can be used. The space separated event "parts" are
- available as %EVTPART0, %EVTPART1, etc. A single % looses
- its special meaning if any of these parameters appears in the
- definition.
-
-
<pattern> may also be a compound of
- definition:event to filter for events.
-
-
<pattern> must completely (!)
- match either the device name, or the compound of the device name and the
- event. The event is either the string you see in the list output in paranthesis after the device name, or the
- string you see when you do a detailed list of the device.
-
-
To use database logging, copy the file contrib/91_DbLog.pm into your
- modules directory, and change the $dbconn parameter in the file.
-
-
Following special events will be generated for the device "global"
-
-
INITIALIZED after initialization is finished.
-
DEFINED <devname> after a device is defined.
-
DELETED <devname> after a device was deleted.
-
RENAMED <old> <new> after a device was renamed.
-
UNDEFINED <defspec> upon reception of a message for an
- undefined device.
-
-
-
Notify can be used to store macros for manual execution. Use the trigger command to execute the macro.
- E.g.
- fhem> define MyMacro notify MyMacro { Log 1, "Hello"}
- fhem> trigger MyMacro
-
-
-
forwardReturnValue
- Forward the return value of the executed command to the caller,
- default is disabled (0). If enabled (1), then e.g. a set command which
- triggers this notify will also return this value. This can cause e.g
- FHEMWEB to display this value, when clicking "on" or "off", which is
- often not intended.
-
- A sequence is used to allow to trigger events for a certain combination of
- button presses on a remote. E.g. to switch on a lamp when pressing the
- Btn1:on, then Btn2:off and at last Btn1:on one after the other you could
- define the following:
-
-
-
- define lampseq sequence Btn1:on 0.5 Btn2:off 0.5 Btn1:on
- define lampon notify lampseq:trigger set lamp on
-
-
- The structure device is used to organize/structure devices in order to
- set groups of them at once (e.g. switching everything off in a house).
-
- The list of attached devices can be modified through the addstruct /
- delstruct commands. Each attached device will get the attribute
- <struct_type>=<name> when it is added to the list, and the
- attribute will be deleted if the device is deleted from the structure.
-
- The structure devices can also be added to a structure, e.g. you can have
- a building consisting of levels which consists of rooms of devices.
-
-
- Example:
-
-
define kitchen structure room lamp1 lamp2
-
addstruct kitchen TYPE=FS20
-
delstruct kitchen lamp1
-
define house structure building kitchen living
-
set house off
-
-
-
- The backward propagated status change from the devices to this structure
- works in two different ways.
- Attribute clientstate_behavior
-
absolute
-
- The structure status will changed to the common device status of all defined devices
- to this structure if all devices are identical. Otherwise the structure status is "undefined".
-
-
relative
-
- You have to set the attribute "clientstate_priority" with all states of
- the defined devices to this structure in descending order. Each group are
- delemited by space. Each entry of one group are delimited by "pipe"
-
attr house clientstate_priority Any_On|An All_Off|Aus
-
-
- To group more devices from different types of devices you can define
- a clientstate redefining on each device. For example the Reading "A" of device door
- is "open" or "closed" and the state of device lamp1 should redefine from
- "on" to "An" and "off" to "Aus"
- Example:
-
-
define door OWSWITCH <ROMID>
-
define lamp1 dummy
-
attr lamp1 cmdlist on off
-
define kitchen structure struct_kitchen lamp1 door
- Every set command is propagated to the attached devices. Exception: if an
- attached devices has an attribute structexcluse, and the attribute value
- matches (as a regexp) the name of the current structure.
-
-
-
- Get
-
- get is not supported through a structure device.
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
structexclude
- exclude the device from set operations, see the set command above.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
watchdog
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> watchdog <regexp1> <timespec> <regexp2> <command>
-
- Start an arbitrary fhem.pl command if after <timespec> receiving an
- event matching <regexp1> no event matching <regexp2> is
- received.
- The syntax for <regexp1> and <regexp2> is the same as the
- regexp for notify.
- <timespec> is HH:MM[:SS]
- <command> is a usual fhem command like used int the at or notify
-
-
- Examples:
-
- # Request data from the FHT80 _once_ if we do not receive any message for
- # 15 Minutes.
- define w watchdog FHT80 00:15:00 SAME set FHT80 date
-
- # Request data from the FHT80 _each_ time we do not receive any message for
- # 15 Minutes, i.e. reactivate the watchdog after it triggered. Might be
- # dangerous, as it can trigger in a loop.
- define w watchdog FHT80 00:15:00 SAME set FHT80 date;; trigger w .
-
- # Shout once if the HMS100-FIT is not alive
- define w watchdog HMS100-FIT 01:00:00 SAME "alarm-fit.sh"
-
- # Send mail if the window is left open
- define w watchdog contact1:open 00:15 contact1:closed "mail_me close window1"
- attr w regexp1WontReactivate
-
-
- Notes:
-
-
if <regexp1> is . (dot), then activate the watchdog at
- definition time. Else it will be activated when the first matching
- event is received.
-
<regexp1> resets the timer of a running watchdog, to avoid it
- use the regexp1WontReactivate attribute.
-
if <regexp2> is SAME, then it will be the same as the first
- regexp, and it will be reactivated, when it is received.
-
-
trigger <watchdogname> . will activate the trigger if its state
- is defined, and set it into state defined if its state is
- triggered. You always have to reactivate the watchdog with this
- command once it has triggered (unless you restart fhem)
-
a generic watchdog (one watchdog responsible for more devices) is
- currently not possible.
regexp1WontReactivate
- When a watchdog is active, a second event matching regexp1 will
- normally reset the timeout. Set this attribute to prevents this.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
telnet
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> telnet <portNumber> [global]
-
-
- Listen on the TCP/IP port <portNumber> for incoming
- connections. If the second parameter global is not specified,
- the server will only listen to localhost connections.
-
-
- To use IPV6, specify the portNumber as IPV6:<number>, in this
- case the perl module IO::Socket:INET6 will be requested.
- On Linux you may have to install it with cpan -i IO::Socket::INET6 or
- apt-get libio-socket-inet6-perl; OSX and the FritzBox-7390 perl already has
- this module.
-
-
- Note: The old global attribute port is automatically converted to a
- telnet instance with the name telnetPort. The global allowfrom attibute is
- lost in this conversion.
-
password
- Specify a password, which has to be entered as the very first string
- after the connection is established. If the argument is enclosed in {},
- then it will be evaluated, and the $password variable will be set to
- the password entered. If the return value is true, then the password
- will be accepted. If thies parameter is specified, fhem sends telnet
- IAC requests to supress echo while entering the password.
- Also all returned lines are terminated with \r\n.
- Example:
-
- attr tPort password secret
- attr tPort password {use FritzBoxUtils;;FB_checkPw("localhost","$password") }
-
-
-
-
-
globalpassword
- Just like the attribute password, but a password will only required for
- non-local connections.
-
-
-
-
SSL
- Enable SSL encryption of the connection, see the description here on generating the needed SSL certificates. To
- connect to such a port use one of the following commands:
-
allowfrom
- Regexp of allowed ip-addresses or hostnames. If set,
- only connections from these addresses are allowed.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DbLog
-
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> DbLog <configfilename> <regexp>
-
-
- Log events to a database. The database connection is defined in
- <configfilename> (see sample configuration file
- db.conf). The configuration is stored in a separate file
- to avoid storing the password in the main configuration file and to have it
- visible in the output of the list command.
-
-
- You must have 93_DbLog.pm in the FHEM subdirectory
- to make this work. Additionally, the modules DBI and
- DBD::<dbtype> need to be installed (use
- cpan -i <module> if your distribution does not have it).
-
- Sample code to create a MySQL database is in fhemdb_create.sql.
- The database contains two tables: current and
- history. The latter contains all events whereas the former only
- contains the last event for any given reading and device.
- The columns have the following meaning:
-
-
TIMESTAMP: timestamp of event, e.g. 2007-12-30 21:45:22
-
DEVICE: device name, e.g. Wetterstation
-
TYPE: device type, e.g. KS300
-
EVENT: event specification as full string,
- e.g. humidity: 71 (%)
-
READING: name of reading extracted from event,
- e.g. humidity
-
VALUE: actual reading extracted from event,
- e.g. 71
-
UNIT: unit extracted from event, e.g. %
-
- The content of VALUE is optimized for automated post-processing, e.g.
- yes is translated to 1.
-
- The current values can be retrieved by means of the perl script
- fhemdb_get.pl. Its output is adapted to what a
- Cacti data input method expects.
- Call fhemdb_get.pl without parameters to see the usage
- information.
-
- The regexp will be checked against the device name
- devicename:event or timestamp:devicename:event combination.
- The regexp must match the complete string, not just a part of it.
-
- <filename> may contain %-wildcards of the
- POSIX strftime function of the underlying OS (see your strftime manual).
- Common used wildcards are:
-
-
%d day of month (01..31)
-
%m month (01..12)
-
%Y year (1970...)
-
%w day of week (0..6); 0 represents Sunday
-
%j day of year (001..366)
-
%U week number of year with Sunday as first day of week (00..53)
-
%W week number of year with Monday as first day of week (00..53)
-
- FHEM also replaces %L by the value of the global logdir attribute.
- Before using %V for ISO 8601 week numbers check if it is
- correctly supported by your system (%V may not be replaced, replaced by an
- empty string or by an incorrect ISO-8601 week number, especially
- at the beginning of the year)
- If you use %V you will also have to use %G
- instead of %Y for the year!
- Examples:
-
- define lamplog FileLog %L/lamp.log lamp
- define wzlog FileLog /var/tmp/wz-%Y-%U.log
- wz:(measured-temp|actuator).*
- With ISO 8601 week numbers, if supported:
- define wzlog FileLog /var/tmp/wz-%G-%V.log
- wz:(measured-temp|actuator).*
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set <name> reopen
-
- Used to reopen a FileLog after making some manual changes to the logfile.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
- get <name> <infile> <outfile> <from>
- <to> <column_spec>
-
- Read data from the logfile, used by frontends to plot data without direct
- access to the file.
-
-
-
<infile>
- Name of the logfile to grep. "-" is the current logfile, or you can
- specify an older file (or a file from the archive).
-
<outfile>
- If it is "-", you get the data back on the current connection, else it
- is the prefix for the output file. If more than one file is specified,
- the data is separated by a comment line for "-", else it is written in
- separate files, numerated from 0.
-
-
<from> <to>
- Used to grep the data. The elements should correspond to the
- timeformat or be an initial substring of it.
-
<column_spec>
- For each column_spec return a set of data in a separate file or
- separated by a comment line on the current connection.
- Syntax: <col>:<regexp>:<default>:<fn>
-
-
<col>
- The column number to return, starting at 1 with the date.
- If the column is enclosed in double quotes, then it is a fix text,
- not a column nuber.
-
<regexp>
- If present, return only lines containing the regexp. Case sensitive.
-
-
<default>
- If no values were found and the default value is set, then return
- one line containing the from value and this default. We need this
- feature as gnuplot aborts if a dataset has no value at all.
-
-
<fn>
- One of the following:
-
-
int
- Extract the integer at the beginning og the string. Used e.g.
- for constructs like 10%
-
delta-h or delta-d
- Return the delta of the values for a given hour or a given day.
- Used if the column contains a counter, as is the case for the
- KS300 rain column.
-
everything else
- The string is evaluated as a perl expression. @fld is the
- current line splitted by spaces. Note: The string/perl
- expression cannot contain spaces, as the part after the space
- will be considered as the next column_spec.
-
-
-
-
- Example:
-
get outlog out-2008.log - 2008-01-01 2008-01-08 4:IR:int: 9:IR::
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
-
-
-
archivecmd / archivedir / nrarchive
- When a new FileLog file is opened, the FileLog archiver wil be called.
- This happens only, if the name of the logfile has changed (due to
- time-specific wildcards, see the FileLog
- section), and there is a new entry to be written into the file.
-
-
- If the attribute archivecmd is specified, then it will be started as a
- shell command (no enclosing " is needed), and each % in the command
- will be replaced with the name of the old logfile.
-
- If this attribute is not set, but nrarchive and/or archivecmd are set,
- then nrarchive old logfiles are kept along the current one while older
- ones are moved to archivedir (or deleted if archivedir is not set).
-
logtype
- Used by the pgm2 webfrontend to offer gnuplot/SVG images made from the
- logs. The string is made up of tokens separated by comma (,), each
- token specifies a different gnuplot program. The token may contain a
- colon (:), the part before the colon defines the name of the program,
- the part after is the string displayed in the web frontend. Currently
- following types of gnuplot programs are implemented:
-
-
fs20
- Plots on as 1 and off as 0. The corresponding filelog definition
- for the device fs20dev is:
- define fslog FileLog log/fs20dev-%Y-%U.log fs20dev
-
-
fht
- Plots the measured-temp/desired-temp/actuator lines. The
- corresponding filelog definitions (for the FHT device named
- fht1) looks like:
- define fhtlog1 FileLog log/fht1-%Y-%U.log fht1:.*(temp|actuator).*
-
-
-
temp4rain10
- Plots the temperature and rain (per hour and per day) of a
- ks300. The corresponding filelog definitions (for the KS300
- device named ks300) looks like:
- define ks300log FileLog log/fht1-%Y-%U.log ks300:.*H:.*
-
-
hum6wind8
- Plots the humidity and wind values of a
- ks300. The corresponding filelog definition is the same as
- above, both programs evaluate the same log.
-
-
text
- Shows the logfile as it is (plain text). Not gnuplot definition
- is needed.
-
setList
- Space separated list of commands, which will be returned upon "set name ?",
- so the FHEMWEB frontend can construct a dropdown and offer on/off
- switches. Example: attr dummyName setList on off
-
- perl functions, to be used in at or FS20 on-till commands.
- First you should set the longitude and latitude global attributes to the
- exact longitude and latitude values (see e.g. maps.google.com for the exact
- values, which should be in the form of a floating point value). The default
- value is Frankfurt am Main, Germany.
-
- The default altitude ($defaultaltit in SUNRISE_EL.pm) defines the sunrise/sunset
- for Civil twilight (i.e. one can no longer read outside without artificial
- illumination), which differs from sunrise/sunset times found on different
- websites. See perldoc "DateTime::Event::Sunrise" for alternatives.
-
-
- sunrise()/sunset() returns the absolute time of the next sunrise/sunset,
- adding 24 hours if the next event is tomorrow, to use it in the timespec of
- an at device or for the on-till command for FS20 devices.
-
- sunrise_rel()/sunset_rel() returns the relative time to the next
- sunrise/sunset.
- sunrise_abs()/sunset_abs() return the absolute time of the corresponding
- event today (no 24 hours added).
- All functions take up to three arguments:
-
-
The first specifies an offset (in seconds), which will be added to the
- event.
-
The second and third specify min and max values (format: "HH:MM").
-
-
- isday() can be used in some notify or at commands to check if the sun is up or
- down.
-
- Optionally, for all functions you can set first argument which defines a horizon value
- which then is used instead of the $defaultaltit in SUNRISE_EL.pm.
- Possible values are: "REAL", "CIVIL", "NAUTIC", "ASTRONOMIC" or a
- positive or negative number preceded by "HORIZON="
- REAL is 0, CIVIL is -6, NATUIC is -12, ASTRONOMIC is -18 degrees above horizon.
- Example:
-
-
- # When sun is 6 degrees below horizon - same as sunrise();
- sunrise("CIVIL");
-
- # When sun is 3 degrees below (-3 above) horizon (Between real and civil sunset)
- sunset("HORIZON=-3");
-
- # When sun is 1 degree above horizon
- sunset("HORIZON=1");
-
- # Switch lamp1 on at real sunset, not before 18:00 and not after 21:00
- define a15 at *{sunset("REAL",0,"18:00","21:00")} set lamp1 on
-
-
-
- Define
N/A
-
- Set
N/A
-
- Get
N/A
-
- Attributes
-
-
latitude
- If set, this latitude is used to calculate sunset/sunrise
- Notation need to be in decimal format (for example Berlin = 52.666)
- As default Frankfurt/Main, Germany (50.112) is used.
-
-
-
longitude
- If set, this longitude is used to calculate sunset/sunrise
- Notation need to be in decimal format (for example Berlin = 13.400)
- As default Frankfurt/Main, Germany (8.686) is used.
-
- Note: these are global attributes, e.g.
-
- attr global latitude 50.112
- attr global longitude 8.686
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
FHEMRENDERER
-
- The FHEMRENDERER module is intended to render (draw) graphics based on the FHEM Log-Files.
- This can be done either based on a timer (used in the module) or based on a direct call of GET.
- The rendered graphics will be stored in a pre-defined directory with a predefined prefix of the files. The renderer can also work in a multi-process mode,
- which doesn't block the main FHEM-Loop.
-
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> FHEMRENDERER [global]
-
- This defines a new "device", that is of type FHEMRENDERER. The option 'global' can be used if needed for sorting reasons.
- Otherwise this option has no real meaning for FHEMRENDERER.
-
- As a side-effect of defining this "device" the following attributes will be set for this "device":
- plotmode gnuplot
- plotsize 800,200
- refresh 00:10:00
- room Unsorted
- status off
- tmpfile /tmp/
- multiprocess off
-
- NOTE: The Logfile will report (with LogLevel 2) that the FHEMRENDERER has been defined.
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
- set <name> <value>
- Set either on or off.
-
- This switches the timer-based rendering on/off. The attribute 'status' will be modified accordingly.
- NOTE: only WebLink based graphics will be rendered.
-
-
-
-
-
- Get
-
- get <name> <[[file-name] device type logfile [pos=zoom=XX&off=YY]]>
-
- The get function supports different sets of arguments:
- Arguments:
- NONE: all WebLink based FilePlots will be rerendered
- The resulting filename will be '.png'
- THREE: device type logfile
- In this case only one specific graphic will be rendered:
- A graphic will be rendered for 'device', where device is a FileLog, based on the type 'type' based on the given 'logfile'
- The resulting filename will be 'attr-tmpfile logfile.png'
- FOUR: file-name device type logfile
- In this case only one specific graphic will be rendered:
- A graphic will be rendered for 'device', where device is a FileLog, based on the type 'type' based on the given 'logfile'
- The resulting filename will be 'attr-tmpfile file-name.png'
- FIVE: file-name device type logfile pos=zoom=XX&off=YYY
- In this case only one specific graphic will be rendered assuming that plotmode is 'gnuplot-scroll':
- A graphic will be rendered for 'device', where device is a FileLog, based on the type 'type' based on the given 'logfile'
- The 'zoom' will be either qday/day/week/month/year (same as used in FHEMWEB).
- The offset 'off' is either 0 (then the second part can be omitted), or -1/-2.... to jump back in time.
- The resulting filename will be 'attr-tmpfile file-name.png'
-
- NOTE: If you want to use zoom AND offset then you have to concatenate via '&' !!
-
- NOTE: combinations are possible in limited ranges:
- meaning: you can add the 'pos=zoom=XX&off=YY' to any of the first three sets.
- This may e.g. result in rendering all WebLinks with a specific zoom or offset
- (if you just pass the 'pos=zoom=xx&off=yy' parameter);
-
- Any rendered image (one or all WebLinks) will be stored in 'attr-tmpfile' followed by a 'filename.png'. The filename will be
- either derived (from weblink-name or logfile-name) or, for single files, can be assigend.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
-
plotmode
- Specifies how to generate the plots:
-
-
gnuplot
- Call the gnuplot script with each logfile. The filename
- specification of the FileLog device will
- determine what is in the plot. The data is converted into an
- image on the backend with gnuplot.
-
gnuplot-scroll
- FHEMRENDERER will offer zoom and offset possibilities in order to navigate
- in the current logfile, i.e. you can select just a part of the
- data to be displayed. The more data is contained in a single
- logfile, the easier you can navigate. The recommendation is to
- store the data for a whole year in one logfile. The data is
- converted into an image on the backend with gnuplot.
-
-
-
-
-
plotsize
- the default size of the plot, in pixels, separated by comma:
- width,height. You can set individual sizes by setting the plotsize of
- the weblink.
-
-
-
status
- Reflects the status, if the renderer timer has been set to ON or OFF.
- By reading the status, you can detect, if the timer is running, or not.
-
-
-
-
refresh
- This defines the time-interval in which a new rendering of the defined
- WebLinks will be done.
-
-
-
-
tmpfile
- This gives the path and a possible prefix for the rendered
- filenames. You can specify a path to which the files will be
- rendered. If you also specify a prefix, this will be used to build the
- resulting filename.
-
-
multiprocess
- This defines if the Renderer works in a multiprocessing mode.
- You can set multiprocessing either to on / off and the renderer will draw the
- time-scheduled tasks either in multiprocessing mode, or not.
- NOTE: Direct GET calls, except for a general GET (for all weblinks) will be renderer
- in an interactive mode, meaning that the FHEM-Loop will be block as long as the graphics are rendered.
- If you want to use multiprocessing, set the RENDERER and multiprocessing to on and the
- weblink-graphics will be rendered in the background.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PachLog
-
- The PachLog-Module Logs SensorData like (temperature and humidity) to www.pachube.com.
-
- Note: this module needs the HTTP::Request and LWP::UserAgent perl modules.
-
-
- Define
-
- define <name> PachLog <Pachube-API-Key>
-
- <Pachube-API-Key>:
- The Pachube-API-Key however is what you need in your code to authenticate your application's access the Pachube service.
- Don't share this with anyone: it's just like any other password.
- www.pachube.com
-
-
-
-
-
- Set
-
-
- Add a new Device for Logging to www.pachube.com
- set <NAME> ADD <FHEM-DEVICENAME> FEED-NR:ID:READING:ID:READING
- Example: KS300-Weather-Data
- READINGS: temperature humidity wind rain
- 1. Generate Input-Feed on www.pachube.com => Yout get your FEED-NR: 1234
- 2. Add Datastreams to the Feed:
-
-
-
ID
0
temperature
-
ID
1
humidity
-
ID
2
wind
-
ID
3
rain
-
- 3. Add the KS300 to your PachLog-Device
- set <NAME> ADD <My-KS300> 1234:0temperature:1:humidity:2:wind:3:rain
- If you want to automate some tasks via fhem, then you'll probably use at or notify. For more complex tasks
- you'll use either a shell-script or a perl "oneliner" as the at/notify
- argument. This chapter gives some tips in using the perl oneliners.
-
-
To test perl oneliners, type them on the telnet prompt (or FHEMWEB text
- input) by enclosing it in {}, one line at once. The last line will only
- write something in the logfile, the output of the other lines is directly
- visible.
-
- Perl expressions are separated by ;, in fhem oneliners they have to
- escaped with ;;
-
- { my $a = 1+1;; Log 1, "Hello $a" }
-
-
-
-
To use fhem commands from the perl expression, use the function fhem(),
- which takes a string argument, this string will be evaluated as a fhem
- command:
-
- Note: if this function returns a value, it will also be logged into the
- global fhem log. Use 1 as a second argument to disable this logging, this
- makes sense when obtainig some values via fhem "get...".
-
-
-
-
Notify can be used to store macros for manual execution. Use the trigger command to execute the macro:
-
To make date and time handling easier, the variables $sec, $min, $hour,
- $mday, $month, $year, $wday, $yday, $isdst are available in the perl
- oneliners (see also perldoc -f localtime). Exceptions: $month is in the
- range of 1 to 12, and $year is corrected by 1900 (as I would expect).
- Additionally the variabe $we is 1 if it is weekend (i.e $wday == 0 or
- $wday == 6), and 0 otherwise. If the holida2we
- global attribute is set, $we is 1 for holidays too.
-
- offset is in seconds, and the format of min/max is "HH:MM" or "HH:MM:SS".
- isday returns 1 if the sun is visible, and 0 else.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
gnuplot file syntax
-
-The .gplot files are also used by the FHEMWEB/SVG module
-when the plotmode attribute is set to SVG. In this case
-only a subset of the .gnuplot attributes are used, and some lines have special
-meanings: the difference will be explained in this chapter. See also this fhemwiki entry on
-creating logs.
-Following is a minimal .gplot definition (valid only for plotmode SVG):
-
- set terminal size <SIZE>
- #FileLog 4:::
- plot title 'Temperature' with lines
-
-The .gnuplot file consists of 3 parts:
-
-
set commands
- Following sets are recognized:
-
-
terminal, only the size parameter.
- This is usually set to <SIZE>, which is replaced by the plotsize attribute of the FHEMWEB or weblink
- instance.
-
-
title
- Usually set to <TL> which is replace by the weblink title attribute, or to <Lx>, which is replaced
- by the weblink label attribute.
-
-
ylabel,y2label
- Left and right labels, printed vertically. Are also subject to label
- replacement.
-
-
yrange,y2range
- Specify the range of the left and right axis. Examples:
-
- set yrange [-0.1:1.1]
- set y2range [0:]
-
-
-
ytics,y2tics
- the label for the left/right axis tics. Examples:
-
- set ytics ("on" 0, "off" 1)
- set y2tics
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
#FileLog entries
- Each line from the plot section must have one corresponding #FileLog
- line. For the syntax see the column_spec paragraph of the Filelog get description.
- Note that for SVG plots the first column of the input file always has to
- be in the standard fhem timestamp format (YYYY-MM-DD_HH:MM:SS)
-
-
-
-
plot entries
- There is always one plot command with comma separated argument-blocks.
- Each argument-block represents one line, and has its own parameters.
- Following parameters are recognized:
-
-
axes x1y1 / x1y2
- tells the program to assign the current line to one of the two axes
- (left or right).
-
-
title
- Caption of the line. Whan clicking on this title, a small javascript
- program will change the title to the min/max and last values of the plot,
- will enable copying this line or pasting an already copied one (the
- existing scale of the plot wont'be changed, only the pasted line will
- be scaled), and other lines of the plot will temporarily be hidden.
-
-
with <linetype>
- Specify the line type. Following types are recognized: points,
- steps, fsteps, histeps and lines. Everything unknown will be mapped to
- the type lines.
-
-
ls <linestyle>
- The linestyle defaults to l0 for the first line, l1 for the second, and
- so on. It is defined in the svg_style.css file. There are two sets
- defined here: l0-l8 and l0fill-l6fill. The second set must be specified
- explicitly. If the name of the linestyle contains the word fill, then
- plots of the lineytype "lines" will have an additional starting and
- ending segment, so that filling is done correctly.
- See the SVG spec for details of this CSS file.
- Note: if you plan to use this attribute, you have to specify it for all
- the lines (attribute-blocks) in the plot command.
-
-
lw <linewidth>
- Sets the stroke-width style of the line. This attribute is deprecated,
- the corresponding feature of the CSS file / (attribute ls) should be
- used instead.
-
-
+Fhem is mainly used for home automation, but it is suitable for other tasks
+too, where notification, timers and logging plays an important role.
+
+
+It supports different hardware devices to interface with certain protocols
+(e.g. FHZ1000 to interface FS20 and HMS, CM11 to access X10), and logical
+devices like FS20 or FHT to digest the messages for a certain device type using
+this protocol.
+
+
+Fhem is modular. The different devices are represented through modules which
+implement certain functions (e.g. define, get, set). Even seemingly integral
+parts of fhem like triggers (notify) and timers (at) are implemented this way, giving the possibility to
+replace/extend this functionality.
+
+Fhem is controlled through readable / ascii commands, which are specified in
+files (e.g. the configuration file), or issued over a TCP/IP connection, either
+directly in a telnet session, with a fhem.pl in client mode or from one of the
+web frontends.
+
+When starting the server you have to specify a configuration file:
+
+ fhem.pl ~/.fhem
+
+
+
+A minimal configuration file:
+ attr global logfile /tmp/fhem.log
+ attr global statefile /tmp/fhem.save
+ attr global verbose 3
+ attr global port 7072
+ attr global modpath /usr/share/fhem
+ define FHZ FHZ /dev/tts/USB0
+
+ define lamp FS20 8765 01
+
+ For other configuration files see the examples subdirectory.
+
+
+TCP/IP communication with fhem can either happen in a "session" (via
+telnet) or single client command (via fhem.pl). Example:
+
+There are three types of commands: "fhem" commands (described in this
+document), shell commands (they must be enclosed in double quotes ") and perl
+expressions (enclosed in curly brackets {}). shell commands or perl expressions
+are needed for complex at or notify
+arguments, but can also issued as a "normal" command.
+
+E.g. the following three commands all do the same when issued from a telnet
+prompt:
+
+ set lamp off
+ "fhem.pl 7072 "set lamp off""
+ {fhem("set lamp off")}
+
+
+
+Shell commands will be executed in the background, perl expressions and
+fhem commands will be executed in the main "thread". In order to make perl
+expressions easier to write, some special functions and variables are
+available. See the section Perl special for a description.
+To trigger fhem commands from a shell script (this is the "other way round"),
+use the client form of fhem.pl (described above).
+
+
+Multiple fhem commands are separated by semicolon (;). In order to use semicolon
+in perl code or shell programs, they have to be escaped by the double semicolon
+(;;). See the Notes section of the notify
+chapter on command parameters and escape rules.
+
+E.g. the following first command switches Lamp1 off at 07:00 and Lamp2
+immediately (at the point of definition), the second one switches both lamps
+off at 07:00.
+
+ define lampoff at 07:00 set Lamp1 off; set Lamp2 off
+ define lampoff at 07:00 set Lamp1 off;; set Lamp2 off
+
+
+
+
+Commands can be either typed in plain, or read from a file (e.g. the
+configuration file at startup). The commands are either executed directly, or
+later if they are arguments to the at and notify fhem commands.
+
+
+A line ending with \ will be concatenated with the next one, so long lines
+(e.g. multiple perl commands) can be split in multiple lines. Some web fronteds
+(e.g. webpgm2) make editing of multiline commands transparent for you (i.e. there is no need for \) .
+
+
+
+
+
+
Device specification (devspec)
+
+ The commands
+ attr,
+ deleteattr,
+ delete,
+ get,
+ list,
+ set,
+ setstate,
+ trigger
+ can take a more complex device specification as argument, which will be
+ expanded to a list of devices. A device specification (short devspec) can be:
+
+
a single device name. This is the most common case.
+
a list of devices, separated by comma (,)
+
a range of devices, separated by dash (-)
+
a regular expression, if the the spec contains on e of the following
+ characters: ^*[]$
+
an attribute of the device, followed by an equal sign (=) and then a
+ regexp for this attribute. As attribute you can specify either attributes
+ set with the attr command or one of the "internal" attributes DEF, STATE
+ and TYPE.
+
+ Example:
+
+ set lamp1 on
+ set lamp1,lamp2,lamp3 on
+ set lamp[1-3] on
+ set lamp.* on
+ set lamp1-lamp3 on
+ set lamp1-lamp3,lamp3 on
+ set room=kitchen off
+ list disabled=
+ list TYPE=FS20
+
+ Notes:
+
+
first the spec is separated by komma, then the range or the regular
+ expression operations are executed.
+
if there is a device which exactly corresponds to the spec, then
+ no special processing is done.
+
the returned list can contain the same device more than once, so
+ "set lamp1-lamp3,lamp3 on" switches lamp3 twice.
+
for more complex structuring demands see the
+ structure device.
+
+
+
+
+
?, help
+
+ ?
+ help
+
+ Get a list of all commands and short description for each one
+
+
+
+
attr
+
+ attr <devspec> <attrname> [<value>]
+
+ Set an attribute for a device defined by define.
+ You can define your own attributes too to use them in other applications.
+
+ Use "attr <name> ?" to get a list of possible attributes.
+ See the Device specification section for details on
+ <devspec>.
+
+
+ Attributes used by all devices:
+
+
+
comment
+ Add an arbitrary comment.
+
+
alias
+ Used by FHEMWEB to display a device with another name e.g. when using
+ special characters/spaces not accepted by device definition.
+
+
room
+ Filter/group devices. Recognized by web-pgm2 and web-pgm3. A device
+ can appear in more than one room, in this case the rooms have to be
+ specified comma-separated.
+ Devices in the room hidden will not appear in the web output, or set
+ the FHEMWEB attribute to selectively disable
+ rooms for certain FHEMWEB instances.
+
+
+
+
group
+ Group devices. Recognized by web-pgm2 (module FHEMWEB), it makes
+ devices in the same group appear in the same box).
+ This is used to further group
+ devices together. A device can appear in more than one group, in this
+ case the groups have to be specified comma-separated.
+ If this attribute is not set then the device type is used as the
+ grouping attribute.
+
+
+
+
showtime
+ Used in the webfrontend pgm2 to show the time of last activity
+ instead of the state in the summary view. Useful e.g. for FS20 PIRI
+ devices.
+
+
+
The following attributes are honored by the modules that make use
+ of the standardized readings updating mechanism in fhem.pl. Check the modules
+ Attributes list if you want to know if it is supporting it.
+
+
+
+
event-on-update-reading
+ If not set, every update of any reading creates an event, which e.g. is handled
+ by notify or FileLog. The attribute takes
+ a comma-separated list of readings. If set, only updates of the listed readings create
+ events.
+
+
+
+
event-on-change-reading
+ The attribute takes a comma-separated list of readings. If set, only changes of the listed readings create events. In other words, if a reading listed here is updated with the new value
+ identical to the old value, no event is created.
+
+
+ The precedence of event-on-update-reading and event-on-change-reading is as follows:
+
+
If both attributes are not set, any update of any reading of the device creates an event.
+
If any of the attributes is set, no events occur for updates or changes of readings
+ not listed in any of the attributes.
+
If a reading is listed in event-on-update-reading, an update of the reading creates an
+ event no matter whether the reading is also listed in event-on-change-reading.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Device specific attributes are documented in the corresponding device section.
+
+
+ Examples:
+
+ setdefaultattr [<attrname> [<value>]]
+
+ Add a default attribute. Each device defined from now on will receive
+ this attribute. If no attrname is specified, then the default attribute
+ list will be deleted.
+
+
+ Example to set the attribute "room kitchen" and "loglevel 4" to
+ each of the lamps:
+
There is no way to delete a single default-attribute from the list
+
+
+
+
+
+
define
+
+ define <name> <type> <type-specific>
+
+ Define a device. You need devices if you want to manipulate them (e.g.
+ set on/off), and the logfile is also more readable if it contains e.g.
+ "lamp off" instead of "Device 5673, Button 00, Code 00 (off)".
+ Use "define <name> ?" to get a list of possible types.
+ After definition, the global event "DEFINED" will be generated, see the
+ notify section for details.
+
+
+ Each device takes different additional arguments at definition, see the
+ corresponding device section for details.
+
+
+
+
+
+
deleteattr
+
+ deleteattr <devspec> [<attrname>]
+
+ Delete either a single attribute (see the attr command)
+ or all attributes for a device (if no <attrname> is defined).
+ See the Device specification section for details on
+ <devspec>.
+
+
+ Examples:
+
+ delete <devspec>
+
+ Delete something created with the define command.
+ See the Device specification section for details on
+ <devspec>.
+ After deletion, the global event "DELETED" will be generated, see the notify
+ section for details.
+ Examples:
+
+ delete lamp
+
+
+
+
+
+
get
+
+ get <devspec> <type-specific>
+
+ Ask a value directly from the device, and wait for an answer. In general, you
+ can get a list of possible parameters by
+
+ get <device> ?
+
+ See the Device specification section for details on
+ <devspec>.
+
+ Each device has different get parameters, see the corresponding device
+ section for details.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
getstate
+
+ getstate <devspec>
+
+ Output a short space seperated status for <devspec>. It is useful for
+ monitoring the device in e.g. Cacti.
+ Examples:
+
+ Note: to use this command copy the file contrib/getstate/99_getstate.pm into
+ your FHEM directory.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
include
+
+ include <filename>
+
+ Read in the file, and process every line as a fhem command. Makes
+ configuration files more modular and enables to reread them.
+
+
+
+
+
inform
+
+ inform {on|off|timer|raw} [regexp]
+
+ If set to on, and a device state changes, send a notification to the current
+ client. This command can be used by other programs/modules to receive a
+ notification.
+ The option timer prepends a timerstamp to the line. Note: this command is
+ a nice way to check which events are generated, to help you when creating
+ notify or FileLog entries.
+
+
+
+
+
+
list
+
+ list [devspec] [value]
+
+ Output a list of all definitions, all notify settings and all at
+ entries. This is one of the few commands which return a string in a
+ normal case.
+ See the Device specification section for details on
+ <devspec>.
+
+ If value is specified, then output this property (like DEF, TYPE, etc) or
+ reading (actuator, measured-temp) for all devices from the devspec.
+
+ If specifying name, then a detailed status for name
+ will be displayed, e.g.:
+
fhem> list fl
+
+ Internals:
+ CODE 5102
+ DEF 5102
+ NAME fl
+ NR 15
+ STATE measured-temp: 21.1 (Celsius)
+ TYPE FHT
+ IODev FHZ
+ Attributes:
+ room Heizung
+ Readings:
+ 2006-11-02 09:45:56 actuator 19%
+ [...]
+
+
+
+
+
+
modify
+
+ modify <name> <type-dependent-options>
+
+
+ Used to modify some definitions. Useful for changing some at or notify definitions. If specifying
+ one argument to an at type definition, only the time part will be changed. In
+ case of a notify type definition, only the regex part will be changed. All
+ other values (state, attributes, etc) will remain intact.
+
+ Example:
+
+ define lampon at 19:00 set lamp on
+ modify lampon *19:00
+ modify lampon 19:00 set lamp on-for-timer 16
+
+
+
+
+
quit
+
+ quit
+
+ If used in a TCP/IP session, terminate the client session.
+ If used in a script, terminate the parsing of the current script.
+
+ Example:
+
+ quit
+
+
+
+
+
+
reload
+
+ reload <module>
+
+ Reload the given module from the module directory. It is a convenient way to
+ test modules whithout restarting the program.
+
+ Example:
+
+ reload 99_PRIV
+
+
+
+
+
rename
+
+ rename <oldname> <newname>
+
+ Rename a device from the <oldname> to <newname>, together with
+ its attributes. The global event RENAMED will be generated, see the notify
+ section for details.
+
+ Example:
+
+ rename FHT_1234 fht.kitchen
+
+
+
+
+
+
rereadcfg
+
+ rereadcfg [fhem-config-file]
+
+ Re-read the active configuration file, or the optionally specified file.
+ The sequence: the statefile will be saved first,
+ then all devices will be deleted, then the currently active config file (or
+ the specified file) will be read and at last the statefile will be
+ reloaded.
+ Upon completion it triggers the global:REREADCFG event. All existing
+ connections up to the one issuing the rereadcfg will be closed.
+
+
+ Example:
+
+ rereadcfg
+
+
+
+
+
save
+
+ save [<configfile>]
+
+ Save first the statefile, then the
+ configfile information. If a parameter is specified,
+ it will be used instead the global configfile attribute.
+ Notes:
+
+
save only writes out definitions and attributes, but no (set/get)
+ commands which were previously part of the config file. If you need such
+ commands after the initialization (e.g. FHTcode), you
+ should trigger them via notify, when receiving the
+ INITIALIZED event.
+
+
save tries to preserve comments (lines starting with #) and include
+ structures, but it won't work correctly if some of these files are not
+ writeable.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
set
+
+ set <devspec> <type-specific>
+
+ Set parameters of a device / send signals to a device. You can
+ get a list of possible parameters by
+
+ set <name> ?
+
+ See the Device specification section for details on
+ <devspec>. The set command returns only a value on error.
+
+ Each device has different set parameters, see the corresponding device
+ section for details.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
setstate
+
+ setstate <devspec> <value>
+
+ Set the "STATE" for <name> as shown in paranthesis in the
+ list command
+ to <value> without sending any signals to the device
+ itself. This command is also used in the statefile.
+ See the Device specification section for details on
+ <devspec>.
+
+ Examples:
+
+ setstate lamp on
+
+ Note:
+
+
The statefile uses another version of this command, don't be surprised.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
shutdown
+
+ shutdown [restart]
+
+ Shut down the server (after saving the state information
+ ). It triggers the global:SHUTDOWN event. If the optional restart
+ parameter is specified, fhem tries to restart itself.
+
+
+ Note: sleep followed by another command and issued in at/notify/etc is not
+ blocking fhem.
+
+
+
+
+
global
+
+ The global device is used to set different global attributes. It will be
+ automatically defined, it cannot be deleted or renamed and has no set or get
+ parameters
+
+
+ Define
autoload_undefined_devices
+ If set, automatically load the corresponding module when a message
+ of this type is received. This is used by the
+ autocreate device, to automatically create a fhem device upon
+ receiving a corresponding message.
+
+
+
+
+
backup_before_update
+ If this attribute is set to 0, an update skip always backing up your
+ installation via the backup command. The default
+ is to backup always before updates.
+ Note: Set this attribute only if you know what you do!
+ This Attribute is used by the update command.
+ Example:
+
+ attr global backup_before_update 0
+
+
+
+
+
backupcmd
+ You could pass the backup to your own command / script by using this attribute.
+ If this attribute is specified, then it will be started as a shell command and
+ passes a space separated list of files / directories as one
+ argument to the command, like e.g.:
+
+
+ Note: Your command / script has to return the string "backup done" or
+ everything else to report errors, to work properly with updatefhem!
+ This Attribute is used by the backup command.
+ Example:
+
+ attr global backupcmd /usr/local/bin/myBackupScript.sh
+
+
+
+
+
backupdir
+ A folder to store the compressed backup file.
+ This Attribute is used by the backup command.
+ Example:
+
+ attr global backupdir /Volumes/BigHD
+
+
+
+
+
backupsymlink
+ If this attribute is set to everything else as "no", the archive command tar
+ will support symlinks in your backup. Otherwise, if this attribute is set to
+ "no" symlinks are ignored by tar.
+ This Attribute is used by the backup command.
+ Example:
+
+ attr global backupsymlinks yes
+
+
+
+
+
configfile
+ Contains the name of the fhem configuration file. If save is called without argument, then the output will
+ be written to this file.
+
+
+
+
exclude_from_update
+ Contains a space separated list of file which will be excluded by an update.
+ This Attribute is used by the update command.
+ Example:
+
+ attr global exclude_from_update 21_OWTEMP.pm temp4hum4.gplot FS20.on.png FS20.off.png
+
+
+
+
+
holiday2we
+ If this attribute is set, then the $we variable
+ will be true, if the value of the holiday
+ variable referenced by this attribute is not none.
+ Example:
+
+ attr global holiday2we hessen
+
+
+
+
+
lastinclude
+ If this attribute is set, then the last command of the generated
+ configfile (see the save command) will be
+ include <lastinclude-value>
+ This attribute is DEPRECATED, use notify, with
+ the INITIALIZED event to execute commands after initialization.
+
+
+
+
logfile
+ Specify the logfile to write. You can use "-" for
+ stdout, in this case the server won't background itself.
+ The logfile name can also take wildcards for easier logfile rotation,
+ see the FileLog section. Just apply the
+ archivecmd / archivedir / nrarchive attributes to the
+ global device as you would do for a FileLog device.
+ You can access the current name of the logfile with
+ { $currlogfile }.
+
+
+
+
modpath
+ Specify the path to the modules directory FHEM. The path
+ does not contain the directory FHEM. Upon setting the
+ attribute, the directory will be scanned for filenames of the form
+ NN_<NAME>.pm, and make them available for device definition under
+ <NAME>. If the first device of type <NAME> is defined, the
+ module will be loaded, and its function with the name
+ <NAME>_Initialize will be called. Exception to this rule are
+ modules with NN=99, these are considered to be utility modules
+ containing only perl helper functions, they are loaded at startup (i.e.
+ modpath attribute definition time).
+
+
+
+
motd
+ Message Of The Day. Displayed on the homescreen of the FHEMWEB package,
+ or directly after the telnet logon, before displaying the fhem> prompt.
+ SecurityCheck is setting motd if it is not defined upon startup, to
+ avoid this set the motd value to none
+
+
+
+
mseclog
+ If set, the timestamp in the logfile will contain a millisecond part.
+
+
+
+
nofork
+ If set and the logfile is not "-", do not try to background. Needed
+ on some Fritzbox installations.
+
+
+
+
pidfilename
+ Write the process id of the perl process to the specified file. The
+ server runs as a daemon, and some distributions would like to check by
+ the pid if we are still running. The file will be deleted upon
+ shutdown.
+
+
+
+
+
statefile
+ Set the filename where the state and certain at
+ information will be saved before shutdown. If it is not specified, then
+ no information will be saved.
+
+
+
+
title
+ Used by the web frontend fhemweb.pl (webpgm2) as a Page title.
+
+
+
+
updatebranch
+ The update branch will be set by the file FhemUtils/release.pm contained
+ in the modpath. For example, if a stable version (version 5.3 upwards) of
+ fhem is installed via a direct download connection of the archieve on the
+ fhem-website, then the branch of the update is automatically on "stable".
+ In this branch, only updates fixing confirmed errors, relevant security
+ fixes or new stable versions are provided.
+ By using the command "update development <filename>", particular files
+ or packages can always be installed directly from the development branch
+ (e.g. "update development <package>").
+ If you want to update from the development branch in stable verion in
+ general, you can force this behaviour by using the attribute "updatebranch DEVELOPMENT".
+ In case the installation of fhem should generally using the development
+ branch, this attribute would not have to be set. Instead, use "update development force"
+ to update all files including release.pm (containing the release-information)
+ to the newest version.
+
+
+
+
userattr
+ A space separated list which contains the names of additional
+ attributes. Without specifying them you will not be able to set them
+ (in order to prevent typos).
+
+
+
+
verbose
+ Set the verbosity level. Possible values:
+
+
0 - server start/stop
+
1 - error messages or unknown packets
+
2 - major events/alarms.
+
3 - commands sent out will be logged.
+
4 - you'll see whats received by the different devices.
+
5 - debugging.
+
+ Recommended level is 3 for normal use.
+
+
+
+
dupTimeout
+ Define the timeout for which 2 identical events from two different
+ receiver are considered a duplicate. Default is 0.5 seconds.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Perl specials
+ If you want to automate some tasks via fhem, then you'll probably use at or notify. For more complex tasks
+ you'll use either a shell-script or a perl "oneliner" as the at/notify
+ argument. This chapter gives some tips in using the perl oneliners.
+
+
To test perl oneliners, type them on the telnet prompt (or FHEMWEB text
+ input) by enclosing it in {}, one line at once. The last line will only
+ write something in the logfile, the output of the other lines is directly
+ visible.
+
+ Perl expressions are separated by ;, in fhem oneliners they have to
+ escaped with ;;
+
+ { my $a = 1+1;; Log 1, "Hello $a" }
+
+
+
+
To use fhem commands from the perl expression, use the function fhem(),
+ which takes a string argument, this string will be evaluated as a fhem
+ command:
+
+ Note: if this function returns a value, it will also be logged into the
+ global fhem log. Use 1 as a second argument to disable this logging, this
+ makes sense when obtainig some values via fhem "get...".
+
+
+
+
Notify can be used to store macros for manual execution. Use the trigger command to execute the macro:
+
To make date and time handling easier, the variables $sec, $min, $hour,
+ $mday, $month, $year, $wday, $yday, $isdst are available in the perl
+ oneliners (see also perldoc -f localtime). Exceptions: $month is in the
+ range of 1 to 12, and $year is corrected by 1900 (as I would expect).
+ Additionally the variabe $we is 1 if it is weekend (i.e $wday == 0 or
+ $wday == 6), and 0 otherwise. If the holida2we
+ global attribute is set, $we is 1 for holidays too.
+
+ offset is in seconds, and the format of min/max is "HH:MM" or "HH:MM:SS".
+ isday returns 1 if the sun is visible, and 0 else.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
gnuplot file syntax
+
+The .gplot files are also used by the FHEMWEB/SVG module
+when the plotmode attribute is set to SVG. In this case
+only a subset of the .gnuplot attributes are used, and some lines have special
+meanings: the difference will be explained in this chapter. See also this fhemwiki entry on
+creating logs.
+Following is a minimal .gplot definition (valid only for plotmode SVG):
+
+ set terminal size <SIZE>
+ #FileLog 4:::
+ plot title 'Temperature' with lines
+
+The .gnuplot file consists of 3 parts:
+
+
set commands
+ Following sets are recognized:
+
+
terminal, only the size parameter.
+ This is usually set to <SIZE>, which is replaced by the plotsize attribute of the FHEMWEB or weblink
+ instance.
+
+
title
+ Usually set to <TL> which is replace by the weblink title attribute, or to <Lx>, which is replaced
+ by the weblink label attribute.
+
+
ylabel,y2label
+ Left and right labels, printed vertically. Are also subject to label
+ replacement.
+
+
yrange,y2range
+ Specify the range of the left and right axis. Examples:
+
+ set yrange [-0.1:1.1]
+ set y2range [0:]
+
+
+
ytics,y2tics
+ the label for the left/right axis tics. Examples:
+
+ set ytics ("on" 0, "off" 1)
+ set y2tics
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
#FileLog entries
+ Each line from the plot section must have one corresponding #FileLog
+ line. For the syntax see the column_spec paragraph of the Filelog get description.
+ Note that for SVG plots the first column of the input file always has to
+ be in the standard fhem timestamp format (YYYY-MM-DD_HH:MM:SS)
+
+
+
+
plot entries
+ There is always one plot command with comma separated argument-blocks.
+ Each argument-block represents one line, and has its own parameters.
+ Following parameters are recognized:
+
+
axes x1y1 / x1y2
+ tells the program to assign the current line to one of the two axes
+ (left or right).
+
+
title
+ Caption of the line. Whan clicking on this title, a small javascript
+ program will change the title to the min/max and last values of the plot,
+ will enable copying this line or pasting an already copied one (the
+ existing scale of the plot wont'be changed, only the pasted line will
+ be scaled), and other lines of the plot will temporarily be hidden.
+
+
with <linetype>
+ Specify the line type. Following types are recognized: points,
+ steps, fsteps, histeps and lines. Everything unknown will be mapped to
+ the type lines.
+
+
ls <linestyle>
+ The linestyle defaults to l0 for the first line, l1 for the second, and
+ so on. It is defined in the svg_style.css file. There are two sets
+ defined here: l0-l8 and l0fill-l6fill. The second set must be specified
+ explicitly. If the name of the linestyle contains the word fill, then
+ plots of the lineytype "lines" will have an additional starting and
+ ending segment, so that filling is done correctly.
+ See the SVG spec for details of this CSS file.
+ Note: if you plan to use this attribute, you have to specify it for all
+ the lines (attribute-blocks) in the plot command.
+
+
lw <linewidth>
+ Sets the stroke-width style of the line. This attribute is deprecated,
+ the corresponding feature of the CSS file / (attribute ls) should be
+ used instead.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/webfrontend/pgm5/02_FHEMRENDERER.pm b/webfrontend/pgm5/02_FHEMRENDERER.pm
index 2e6327873..a907b975b 100644
--- a/webfrontend/pgm5/02_FHEMRENDERER.pm
+++ b/webfrontend/pgm5/02_FHEMRENDERER.pm
@@ -631,4 +631,151 @@ FHEMRENDERER_calcWeblink($$)
}
-1;
\ No newline at end of file
+1;
+=pod
+=begin html
+
+
+
FHEMRENDERER
+
+ The FHEMRENDERER module is intended to render (draw) graphics based on the FHEM Log-Files.
+ This can be done either based on a timer (used in the module) or based on a direct call of GET.
+ The rendered graphics will be stored in a pre-defined directory with a predefined prefix of the files. The renderer can also work in a multi-process mode,
+ which doesn't block the main FHEM-Loop.
+
+
+
+ Define
+
+ define <name> FHEMRENDERER [global]
+
+ This defines a new "device", that is of type FHEMRENDERER. The option 'global' can be used if needed for sorting reasons.
+ Otherwise this option has no real meaning for FHEMRENDERER.
+
+ As a side-effect of defining this "device" the following attributes will be set for this "device":
+ plotmode gnuplot
+ plotsize 800,200
+ refresh 00:10:00
+ room Unsorted
+ status off
+ tmpfile /tmp/
+ multiprocess off
+
+ NOTE: The Logfile will report (with LogLevel 2) that the FHEMRENDERER has been defined.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Set
+
+ set <name> <value>
+ Set either on or off.
+
+ This switches the timer-based rendering on/off. The attribute 'status' will be modified accordingly.
+ NOTE: only WebLink based graphics will be rendered.
+
+
+
+
+
+ Get
+
+ get <name> <[[file-name] device type logfile [pos=zoom=XX&off=YY]]>
+
+ The get function supports different sets of arguments:
+ Arguments:
+ NONE: all WebLink based FilePlots will be rerendered
+ The resulting filename will be '.png'
+ THREE: device type logfile
+ In this case only one specific graphic will be rendered:
+ A graphic will be rendered for 'device', where device is a FileLog, based on the type 'type' based on the given 'logfile'
+ The resulting filename will be 'attr-tmpfile logfile.png'
+ FOUR: file-name device type logfile
+ In this case only one specific graphic will be rendered:
+ A graphic will be rendered for 'device', where device is a FileLog, based on the type 'type' based on the given 'logfile'
+ The resulting filename will be 'attr-tmpfile file-name.png'
+ FIVE: file-name device type logfile pos=zoom=XX&off=YYY
+ In this case only one specific graphic will be rendered assuming that plotmode is 'gnuplot-scroll':
+ A graphic will be rendered for 'device', where device is a FileLog, based on the type 'type' based on the given 'logfile'
+ The 'zoom' will be either qday/day/week/month/year (same as used in FHEMWEB).
+ The offset 'off' is either 0 (then the second part can be omitted), or -1/-2.... to jump back in time.
+ The resulting filename will be 'attr-tmpfile file-name.png'
+
+ NOTE: If you want to use zoom AND offset then you have to concatenate via '&' !!
+
+ NOTE: combinations are possible in limited ranges:
+ meaning: you can add the 'pos=zoom=XX&off=YY' to any of the first three sets.
+ This may e.g. result in rendering all WebLinks with a specific zoom or offset
+ (if you just pass the 'pos=zoom=xx&off=yy' parameter);
+
+ Any rendered image (one or all WebLinks) will be stored in 'attr-tmpfile' followed by a 'filename.png'. The filename will be
+ either derived (from weblink-name or logfile-name) or, for single files, can be assigend.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Attributes
+
+
+
plotmode
+ Specifies how to generate the plots:
+
+
gnuplot
+ Call the gnuplot script with each logfile. The filename
+ specification of the FileLog device will
+ determine what is in the plot. The data is converted into an
+ image on the backend with gnuplot.
+
gnuplot-scroll
+ FHEMRENDERER will offer zoom and offset possibilities in order to navigate
+ in the current logfile, i.e. you can select just a part of the
+ data to be displayed. The more data is contained in a single
+ logfile, the easier you can navigate. The recommendation is to
+ store the data for a whole year in one logfile. The data is
+ converted into an image on the backend with gnuplot.
+
+
+
+
+
plotsize
+ the default size of the plot, in pixels, separated by comma:
+ width,height. You can set individual sizes by setting the plotsize of
+ the weblink.
+
+
+
status
+ Reflects the status, if the renderer timer has been set to ON or OFF.
+ By reading the status, you can detect, if the timer is running, or not.
+
+
+
+
refresh
+ This defines the time-interval in which a new rendering of the defined
+ WebLinks will be done.
+
+
+
+
tmpfile
+ This gives the path and a possible prefix for the rendered
+ filenames. You can specify a path to which the files will be
+ rendered. If you also specify a prefix, this will be used to build the
+ resulting filename.
+
+
multiprocess
+ This defines if the Renderer works in a multiprocessing mode.
+ You can set multiprocessing either to on / off and the renderer will draw the
+ time-scheduled tasks either in multiprocessing mode, or not.
+ NOTE: Direct GET calls, except for a general GET (for all weblinks) will be renderer
+ in an interactive mode, meaning that the FHEM-Loop will be block as long as the graphics are rendered.
+ If you want to use multiprocessing, set the RENDERER and multiprocessing to on and the
+ weblink-graphics will be rendered in the background.
+
+ 
+ 
